JP7061399B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Since the symbol group is temporarily stopped and displayed by swinging the symbol group in the vertical direction near the effective line, the fluctuation display is continued from the temporarily stopped state to just before the end of the fluctuation due to the shaking fluctuation. There is a gaming machine that can strongly hold the expectation of the player and maintain the expectation of the game.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2002-153640

However, it was not possible to easily recognize the fluctuation state of the symbol due to the temporary stop display mode.
In one aspect, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of easily recognizing a variable state of a symbol by a temporary stop display mode.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine as shown below is provided. The gaming machine displays a display means, a variable display game that displays a variable display of a symbol, a hold display that indicates the start memory number of the variable display game, and a hold digestion display that indicates that the variable display game is in the variable display state. It includes a control means to be displayed on the means, and includes a first symbol and a second symbol as symbols, and the first symbol is composed of a first large symbol, a second large symbol, and a third large symbol, and is a first symbol. The two symbols are composed of a first small symbol, a second small symbol, and a third small symbol smaller than the first symbol, and the control means is executed in a mode in which the variable display game forms a reach mode. The 1st large symbol and the 2nd large symbol that perform the temporary stop display at the 1st trigger are set as the 1st temporary stop display mode, and the 3rd large symbol that performs the temporary stop display at the 2nd trigger after the 1st trigger. Is displayable on the display means as the first temporary stop display mode, and when the first large symbol , the second large symbol, and the third large symbol perform the temporary stop display in the first temporary stop display mode, the first When the small symbol, the second small symbol, and the third small symbol do not perform the temporary stop display and the variable display game derives the variable display result, the first large symbol, the second large symbol , the third large symbol , The first small symbol, the second small symbol, and the third small symbol are stopped and displayed, and the hold digestion display is hidden so that the variable display and the stop display of the variable display game can be distinguished .

According to one aspect, in the gaming machine, the variable state of the symbol can be easily recognized by the temporary stop display mode.

It is a perspective view which shows an example of the gaming machine of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view which shows an example of the game board of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the control system of the gaming machine of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the structure of the effect control device of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the collective display device of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flowchart of the main process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the flowchart of the main process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the checksum calculation process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the initial value random number update process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the input process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the switch reading process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the output processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the payout command transmission process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the random number update process 1 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the random number update process 2 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the winning opening switch / state monitoring processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the fraud & prize-winning monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the winning number counter update processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the gaming machine state check process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the payout busy signal check process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure game processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the start port switch monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the hard random number acquisition processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure start port switch common processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure hold information determination processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening switch monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. The special figure of 1st Embodiment is a figure which shows the flowchart of the usual processing. The special figure of 1st Embodiment is a figure which shows the flowchart of the normal process transition setting process 1. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 variation start processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 2 variation start processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the jackpot flag 1 setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the jackpot flag 2 setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big hit determination process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit determination process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure information setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the variation pattern setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the fluctuation start information setting processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure changing process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process transition setting process during special figure display of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flowchart of the special figure display process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the flowchart of the special figure display process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the high probability fluctuation number update process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the effect mode information check process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the fanfare / in-interval process transition setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process transition setting process 1 in a small hit fanfare of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the fanfare / interval processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process transition setting process while opening a big prize opening of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process during opening of a large winning opening of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening residual ball processing transition setting processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening residual ball processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the fanfare / in-interval process transition setting process 2 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the jackpot end processing transition setting processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big hit end processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big hit end setting process 1 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big hit end setting process 2 of 1st Embodiment. The special figure of 1st Embodiment is a figure which shows the flowchart of the normal process transition setting process 2. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit fanfare middle processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit medium process transition setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit middle processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit operation transition setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the small hit operation of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit residual sphere processing transition setting processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit residual sphere processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit end process transition setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit end processing of 1st Embodiment. The special figure of 1st Embodiment is a figure which shows the flowchart of the normal process transition setting process 3. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the effect command setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the symbol variation control processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the blinking control timer initial value table of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the distribution processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the 2-byte distribution processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the normal figure game processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the gate switch monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the Fukuden prize switch monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the ordinary process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the ordinary process transition setting process 1 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process transition setting process during a change of a normal figure of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process during the change of a general drawing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process transition setting process while displaying a normal figure of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the processing during display of a general drawing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process transition setting process per ordinary figure of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process in the middle of a normal figure of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the normal electric operation transition setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the normal electric operation timing chart of the ordinary fluctuation winning apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the normal electric residual ball processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the end process transition setting process per ordinary figure of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the end processing per ordinary figure of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the ordinary process transition setting process 2 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the segment LED editing process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the magnet fraud monitoring processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the board radio wave fraud monitoring processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flowchart of the external information editing process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the flowchart of the external information editing process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the main prize ball signal editing process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the transmission timing chart of the main prize ball signal of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the start port signal editing process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the main processing in the effect control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the received command check processing in the effect control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the received command analysis processing in the effect control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the decoration control processing in the effect control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the decoration setting process in the effect control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view which shows an example of the game board of 2nd Embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of the special variation winning apparatus of the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the control system of the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 1) of the screen displayed by the display device of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 1) of the production flow of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 2) of the production flow of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 2) of the screen displayed by the display device of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 3) of the screen displayed by the display device of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 4) of the screen displayed by the display device of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (No. 5) of the screen displayed by the display device of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (6) of the screen displayed by the display device of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the unit of the cumulative display of 2nd Embodiment, and a round. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart which shows the execution timing of the special round progress effect of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart of the clear process of the cumulative round counter of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 3) of the production flow of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (7) of the screen displayed by the display device of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (8) of the screen displayed by the display device of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the screen displayed by the display device of the modification 1 of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between a character of 3rd Embodiment and an effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart which shows the timing which can accept the selection of the character of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the screen which the display device of 3rd Embodiment displays. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart which shows the timing which can accept the selection of the character of the modification 1 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the flowchart of the deviation effect setting process of the modification 2 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the flowchart of the deviation effect setting processing of the modification 3 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the flowchart of the character selection effect setting process of the modification 4 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the screen displayed by the display device of the modification 4 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure (No. 2) which shows an example of the screen displayed by the display device of the modification 4 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 3) which shows an example of the screen displayed by the display device of the modification 4 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 4) which shows an example of the screen displayed by the display device of the modification 4 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the flowchart of the character selection effect setting process of the modification 5 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the flowchart of the character selection effect setting process of the modification 6 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the flowchart of the character selection effect setting process of the modification 7 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the option corresponding to the character in the selection of the modification 7 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the performance for every hit of 4th Embodiment. It is a timing table which shows an example of the game progress of the hit A in the 4th Embodiment. It is a timing table which shows an example of the game progress of the hit B of the 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the jackpot system command list of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart which shows the big winning opening opening mode in 1R, 2R of hit A of 4th Embodiment, and the big winning opening opening mode in 1R of hit B. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart which shows the reception timing of the nth command of opening a big prize opening of 4th Embodiment, and the display timing of a round correspondence display. It is a figure which shows an example (the 1) of the screen displayed by the display device of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 2) of the screen displayed by the display device of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 3) of the screen displayed by the display device of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the correspondence relationship between the round correspondence display and the round of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the correspondence relation between the number of rounds of 4th Embodiment, and the number of unit conversion rounds. It is a figure which shows an example (the 4) of the screen displayed by the display device of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (No. 5) of the screen displayed by the display device of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the model specification system command list of the modification 1 of the 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the correspondence relationship between the number of prize balls of the modification 1 of 4th Embodiment, and the number of unit conversion prize balls. It is a figure which shows an example of the screen displayed by the display device of the modification 1 of the 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the correspondence relation with the number of prize balls, and the cumulative number of points of the modification 1 of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the performance table for each hit including the presence / absence of the V notification game of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the game flow of the probability fluctuation notification for each hit of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the game flow of the V notification game of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the progress of the V notification game in hit B of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (6) of the screen displayed by the display device of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (7) of the screen displayed by the display device of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (8) of the screen displayed by the display device of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the progress of the V notification game in the hit X of the modification 2 of the 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 1) of the screen displayed by the display device of the modification 2 of the 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 2) of the screen displayed by the display device of the modification 2 of the 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the decorative pattern of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode during change in the decorative symbol A of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the display screen in the display device of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows an example of the display screen in the display device of 5th Embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram (No. 3) showing an example of a display screen in the display device of the fifth embodiment. It is a figure (the 4) which shows an example of the display screen in the display device of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart which shows the switching timing of the decorative symbol display mode in the special figure game variation of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the decorative symbol of the modification 1 of the 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen in the display device of the modification 2 of the 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of a large symbol in the display device of the modification 2 of the 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the temporary stop display mode list for each state of a large symbol in the display device of the modification 2 of the 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 1) of the screen displayed by the display device of the modification 2 of the 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 2) of the screen displayed by the display device of the modification 2 of the 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 3) of the screen displayed by the display device of the modification 2 of the 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 4th) of the screen displayed by the display device of the modification 2 of the 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the temporary stop display mode of a large symbol in the display device of the modification 3 of the 5th Embodiment.

Hereinafter, embodiments will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
[First Embodiment]
First, the first embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing an example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment.

The gaming machine (pachinko machine) 10 of the first embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is rotatably assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame (transparent plate (transparent member) holding frame) 15 provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built into the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 for decoration and production, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamp, LED, etc. are displayed in an abnormality notification color (for example). A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) in red) and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, a sound effect) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided in the lower part of the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the contents of the abnormality are notified from the speakers 19a and 19b by an output sound (voice). A lamp for notifying the payout abnormality may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate (storage plate) 21 for supplying a game ball to a hitting ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the game machine 10 are provided. An outlet 22 for the upper plate to be discharged, a lower plate (receiver) 23 for storing the game balls discharged when the upper plate 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of the hitting ball launching device, and the like are provided. Further, the upper edge portion of the upper plate 21 is provided with an option setting unit 25 in which the player sets various options. A plurality of selection button switches 25a are provided around the upper surface of the option setting unit 25, and a determination button switch 25b is provided in the center of the upper surface of the option setting unit 25. The option setting unit 25 functions as an effect setting unit in which the player sets the effect mode. In this case, the selection button switch 25a functions as an effect button switch for selecting the effect mode, and the decision button switch 25b functions as a decision button switch for determining the effect mode. Further, on the lower right side of the lower part of the front frame 12, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.

When the selection button switch 25a functions as an effect button switch, the gaming machine 10 intervenes the operation of the player based on the operation of the player received from the selection button switch 25a and the decision button switch 25b. Can be done. For example, the effect in which the operation of the player is intervened includes the effect in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) in the display device (variable display device) 41 (see FIG. 2), and the gaming machine 10 is the display device. The character displayed on the 41 can be operated, and the identification information in the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 can be stopped.

Further, on the right side of the option setting unit 25, there is a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an operation for ejecting a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A discharge button 28, a balance display unit (not shown) that displays the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the hitting ball launching device transfers the gaming ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to the gaming area 32 on the front surface of the gaming board 30. Fire towards (see Figure 2). Further, by operating the selection button switch 25a and the decision button switch 25b, the player can, for example, set the volume radiated from the speakers 19a and 19b and set the brightness of the game board 30. ..

Next, the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the first embodiment.
On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect component) 40 provided with a display device (variable display device) 41 is arranged substantially in the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the periphery of the display area of the display device 41, project forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and make it difficult for the game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 41 is composed of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD or a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube). In the area (display area) where the image on the display screen can be displayed, information related to the game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbol), a character that directs the special figure variation display game, and a background image that enhances the effect of the effect is displayed. .. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variablely displayed (variable display), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, an image for producing an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

Further, the left portion and the right portion of the center case 40 are provided with a board effect device 44 that produces a game by operating. The board effect device 44 can be operated from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

On the lower right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (normal map start gate) 34 that gives a start condition of the normal map variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the prize in the normal drawing start gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).

Further, three general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40 and below the normal drawing start gate 34. The mouth 35 is arranged. The game balls that have won in these general winning openings 35 are detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a start winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting winning area) that gives a start condition of the special figure variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won a prize in the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

Further, immediately below the start winning opening 36, a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting winning area) that gives a start condition for the special figure variation display game is provided.
The ordinary variable winning device 37 includes a movable member 37b that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side tilts toward the front side and can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in. It holds a closed closed state (a state that is disadvantageous to the player) in which the game ball cannot flow in. Then, when the result of the normal fluctuation display game is in a predetermined stop display mode, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is easily opened by the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a driving device. It can be changed to a state (a state that is advantageous to the player). The game ball that has won the ordinary variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3).

Further, below the normal variable winning device 37, an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that did not win in the winning opening or the like is provided.
Further, on the lower side of the center case 40 in the game area 32 and on the right side of the starting winning opening 36, there is a special variation that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A winning device (large winning opening) 38 is arranged.

The special variable winning device 38 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 38c that can be opened by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side, depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. The big winning opening is changed from a closed state (a state that is disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a state that is advantageous to the player). That is, the special variable winning device 38 includes, for example, a large winning opening opened and closed by an opening / closing door 38c driven by a large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device, and is provided in a special gaming state or a small hit game. During the state, by converting the large winning opening from the closed state to the open state, the inflow of the game ball into the large winning opening is facilitated, and the player is given a predetermined game value (prize ball). It has become. The game ball that has won a prize in these special variable winning devices 38 is detected by the large winning opening switch 38a (see FIG. 3).

In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, of the gaming areas 32 in which the gaming balls flow down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left gaming area, and the right area of the center case 40 is the right gaming area. It is said that. Then, the player can adjust the firing force and launch the game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed) to aim for a prize in the start winning opening 36, and launch the game ball to the right game area (so-called left-handed). By hitting right), it is possible to aim for a prize in the normal fluctuation winning device 34, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 38.

Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, a flow path forming member 42 attached to the right end portion of the center case 40 is disposed at a position corresponding to the right gaming region, and the right gaming region is reached. The launched game ball is configured to pass through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42. Since the material at least on the front surface of the flow path forming member 42 is a material that allows the game ball passing through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42 to be visually recognized from the outside, the player or the like can see the flow path. A game ball passing through the flow path formed by the forming member 42 (that is, a game ball flowing down the right game area) can be visually recognized through the flow path forming member 42 from the front of the flow path forming member 42. ..

Further, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right of the game board 30), the first special figure fluctuation display game, the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the normal figure start gate 34, which form the special figure fluctuation display game, are reached. A batch display device 50 for displaying a normal map fluctuation display game triggered by a prize and displaying various information is provided.

The batch display device 50 includes a round display unit 51 composed of LEDs and the like, a special figure 1 hold display unit 52, a special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, a special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and a normal symbol display unit. It includes 55, a general drawing hold display unit 56, and a status display unit 57.

Next, the control system of the gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the control system of the gaming machine of the first embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that collectively controls a game, and is a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. The CPU (Central Processing Unit) unit 110, the input unit 120 having an input port, the output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130 are connected to each other. It consists of a data bus 140 and the like.

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer 111 called an amusement chip (IC (Integrated Circuit)) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and serves as a reference for an operating clock, a timer interrupt, and a random number generation circuit of the gaming microcomputer 111. It has an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 or the like that generates a clock. A predetermined level of direct current voltage such as DC (Direct Current) 32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is supplied to the game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100. And made operational.

The power supply device 400 includes an AC (Alternating Current) -DC converter that generates a DC voltage of DC32V from an AC power supply of 24V, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V and DC5V from a voltage of DC32V, and the like. A normal power supply unit 410 having a power supply unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the RAM (Random Access Memory) inside the game microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure in the game control device 100. It is provided with a control signal generation unit 430 and the like that generate and output control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal for notifying the occurrence and recovery of.

In the first embodiment, the power supply unit 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are on a separate board or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, , May be configured to be provided on the main board. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the first embodiment. By providing the generation unit 430, it is possible to exclude it from the target of replacement and reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or even after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (Read Only Memory) 111B, and a RAM 111C that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C is a work area of the CPU 111A and a storage area of various signals and random numbers during game control. It is used as. As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable) may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start storage to determine the variation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a table for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), which is a fluctuation pattern after the reach state, and fluctuations before the reach state. A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a pattern (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes an advantageous gaming state (special gaming state) for the player when the special result mode is adopted, a part of the plurality of display results has not yet been derived and displayed. Derived A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the conditions for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derivation display. Refers to a display mode that does not exist. Further, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas of the display device. When the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle after display and the result mode is displayed, the left and right variable display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example). The state in which the variable display is stopped due to the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition of the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display regions is satisfied (for example, the same). The state in which the identification information is used, except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variable-displayed from this reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expected value is different), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), and so on. Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of "no reach" <"normal reach" <"special 1 reach" <"special 2 reach" <"special 3 reach" <"premier reach". Further, this reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variable display game. That is, it may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived (when it is out of order) in the special figure variable display game. Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for the solenoid or the display device to output the game machine 10. Take control of the whole. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a jackpot random number for determining a hit in a special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining a jackpot symbol, and a variation pattern in a special figure variation display game (various types). Random number generation circuit for generating variation pattern random numbers for determining (including the execution time of the variation display game in reach and variation display without reach), hit random numbers for determining the hit of the clock variation display game, etc. And a clock generator that generates a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 ms (ms)) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. I have.

Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one of the variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (hit (big hit or small hit) or miss) of the special figure fluctuation display game and the probability state (normal probability state or high probability) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state. A variable pattern table is selected from a plurality of variable pattern tables based on the state), the operating state (time saving operating state) of the normal variable winning device 37 as the current gaming state, the number of start memories, and the like. To get. Here, the CPU 111A serves as a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when the special figure variation display game is executed.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the payout control device 200. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit, and controls for paying out the lending ball.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the game machine 10, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, and a starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37. , The high level is 11V and the low level is 7V, which is connected to the gate switch 34a in the start gate 34, the winning opening switch 35a, and the large winning opening switch 38a of the special variable winning device 38. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided in which a negative logic signal is input and converted into a 0V-5V positive logic signal. Since the input range of the proximity I / F 121 is 7V-11V, the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is illegally shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is cut and floats. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as the above and output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. When the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 38a and the abnormality of the sensor or the switch are detected among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121. The abnormality detection signal 1 output to is input to the second input port 123. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal 2 output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, in the third input port 124, a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the game machine 10 or a glass frame opening detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 is detected. The detection signal of the switch 63 and the detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the game machine 10 are also input. A vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine so that the detection signal is input to the third input port 124.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to the test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

The data held by the second input port 123 asserts the enable signal CE (Chip Enable) 2 (changes to an effective level) by decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 by the gaming microcomputer 111. By doing so, it can be read. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, in the input unit 120, a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detecting the radio wave) and a payout busy signal (payout control device). Signal indicating whether or not the 200 can accept commands), payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating payout abnormality), shoot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (it is full)), and a touch switch signal (for the input of the touch switch provided on the operation unit 24). A first input port 122 is provided which takes in the original signal) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these inputs. It has a function to remove noise from the signal. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET whose noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test firing test device. It is configured to do. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to the first to third input ports 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the game microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent the system from malfunctioning, but the input unit 120 is set immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from each port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged in a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that the one-way communication is such that a signal cannot be input to the game control device 100 from the side of the effect control device 300.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of the accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like are transmitted via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch such as a start port switch that does not need to be processed, which is output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the gaming machine plays a game. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the state cannot be controlled. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not go through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by this chip enable signal CE is supplied to the test firing test device. There is.

Further, the output unit 130 includes a large winning opening solenoid 38b that is connected to the data bus 140 and opens the opening / closing door 38c of the special variable winning device 38, and a universal solenoid 37c that opens the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37. A second output port 134 for outputting open / close data is provided. Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in a game store, and information about the game machine 10. Can be supplied to an external device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the open / close data signals of the large winning port solenoid 38b and the peripheral electric solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, generates a solenoid drive signal, and outputs the first driver (drive circuit) 138a. , The current of the batch display device 50 output from the second driver 138b and the fourth output port 136 that output the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 135. The third driver 138c that outputs the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the lead-in side, and the fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to the external device such as the management device to the external information terminal board 71. Is provided.

To the first driver 138a, DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Further, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a current is passed through the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and a current is drawn from the cathode terminal via the digit wire by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in, and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to an external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be capable of bilateral communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can send and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since the transmission / reception of such data is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the first to third input ports 122, 123, 124 are used. Not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the effect control device of the first embodiment.
The effect control device 300 displays images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 made of an amusement chip (IC) and the main control microcomputer 311 like the game microcomputer 111. It is equipped with a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for this purpose, and a sound source LSI 314 that controls sound output in order to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

The main control microcomputer 311 has a PROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read-only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and can hold stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. A FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM) 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timing means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the effect content, instructs the VDP 312 about the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 of the playback sound, lights the decorative lamp, and the motor. And the drive control of the solenoid, the management of the production time, etc. are executed.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 includes an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (Video RAM) used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing. STS is input. It should be noted that the VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM. The wait signal for this purpose, such as WAIT, is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) method. Video data, a horizontal sync signal HSYNC, and a vertical sync signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address bus / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and is generated by the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. An effect control command signal (effect command) such as a decorative special figure hold number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via this command I / F331. ). Since the gaming microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. There is.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 and a glass frame 15 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect provided on a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 and a game board 30 (including a center case 40) for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, a frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided. A panel effect movable body control circuit 334 for driving and controlling a device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address bus / data bus 340. Even if the glass frame 15 is provided with a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect), and is provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. good.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect switch 25a and a decision button switch 25b of the option setting unit 25 provided on the glass frame 15, an effect switch 47 that detects the initial position of the motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. The function of detecting the on / off state of (effect motor switch) and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 are detected and the main control microcomputer A switch input circuit 336 for inputting a detection signal to 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above configuration and the electronic components controlled by the effect control device 300. DC32V, display device 41 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motor and LED, DC5V for power supply voltage of command I / F331, DC15V for driving motor, LED and speaker It is configured to do. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, the DC- is used to generate DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. Further, it is supplied to the VDP 312 (VDP RESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal), and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling lamps, motors, etc., in the form of being output from the main control microcomputer 311. And put these in the reset state. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

Next, the game control performed in these control circuits will be described.
In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, a random value for hit determination in the normal figure is extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal figure start gate 34, and the ROM 111B Compared with the judgment value stored in, the process of judging the hit / miss of the normal figure fluctuation display game is performed. Then, a process is performed in which the identification symbol (identification information) is variablely displayed for a predetermined time on the normal symbol display unit 55, and then the normal symbol variation display game to be stopped and displayed is displayed. When the result of this normal figure fluctuation display game is a hit, a special result mode corresponding to each of the first hit stop symbol to the third hit stop symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display unit 55, and the normal electric solenoid 37c is displayed. Is operated, and the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 is controlled to be opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). If the result of the normal map variation display game is out of sync, the normal map symbol display unit 55 is controlled to display the result mode of the out of alignment.

Further, the start winning prize (starting memory) is memorized based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36, and based on this starting memory, the first special figure variation display game The random value for big hit determination is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and the process of determining the hit / miss of the first special figure variation display game is performed. Further, the starting memory is memorized based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variable winning device 37, and based on this starting memory, the jackpot determination of the second special figure variation display game is performed. The random value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and the process of determining the hit / miss of the second special figure variation display game is performed.

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination results of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game to the effect control device 300. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variablely displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, a process of displaying the special symbol variation display game to be stopped and displayed is performed. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a game control means for controlling the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 into the starting winning area (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37). ..

Further, the effect control device 300 performs a process of displaying the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game on the display device 41 based on the control signal from the game control device 100. Further, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling light emission of various LEDs based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays a special result mode or a small hit result mode on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 or the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54. Is displayed, and a process of generating a special game state or a small hit game state (that is, a process of executing a special game or a small hit game) is performed. In the process of generating the special gaming state or the small hit gaming state, the CPU 111A opens the opening / closing door 38c of the special variable winning device 38 by, for example, the large winning opening solenoid 38b, and allows the game ball to flow into the large winning opening. The control is performed. Then, until either a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins in the large winning opening, or a predetermined opening time elapses from the opening of the large winning opening, the large winning opening is satisfied. One round is set to open, and control (cycle game) is performed in which this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening / closing control means for controlling the opening / closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order, the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 are controlled to display the result mode of the deviation.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this high probability state, the probability of a hit result in the special figure fluctuation display game is higher than that in the normal probability state. Further, regardless of the high probability state based on the result mode of either the first special figure fluctuation display game or the second special figure fluctuation display game, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure Both variable display games are in a high probability state.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific game state, high probability state in the normal figure) as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this time-saving state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal figure probability) should be a high probability (normal figure high probability state) higher than 0, which is the normal probability (normal figure low probability state). Is possible. As a result, the opening time of the normal variable winning device 37 per unit time is controlled to be longer than that in the case where the normal variable winning device 37 is in the low probability state of the normal figure. Here, in the normal variable winning device 37 in the present embodiment, the normal figure probability is set to "0" so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal gaming state.

Further, in the time saving state, the execution time of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal map fluctuation time) is, for example, 500 msec, and the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is, for example, 600 msec. When the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 500 msec x 1 time) of the first hit stop symbol, Opening time (for example, 1700 ms x 2 times) of the second hit stop symbol and opening time (for example, 1700 ms x 2 times), opening time (for example, 1700 ms x 2 times) of the third hit stop symbol 3 times), it is possible to set.

It should be noted that the execution time, the normal figure stop time, the normal electric opening number of times, and the normal electric opening time of the normal figure fluctuation display game are appropriately set so as to control the normal fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 to be in the short-time operation state. For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the execution time (normal map fluctuation time) of the above-mentioned normal map fluctuation display game to be a second variable display time shorter than the first variable display time. (For example, 10000 msec is 1000 msec). Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map fluctuation display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 msec). 704msec). Further, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) is set to the normal state (normal figure low probability state). It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer than the first opening time (for example, 100 msec is 1352 msec). Further, in the time-saving state, the number of times the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened (the number of times the normal electric power is opened) is larger than the number of times the first opening (for example, twice) for the result of one hit of the normal fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the number of times (for example, 4 times) to the second opening number. Further, in the time saving state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal figure probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal figure low probability state, for example, 1/251) in the normal operating state. It can be a probability (a high probability state in the normal map, for example, 250/251).

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the normal fluctuation time, the normal stop time, the number of times the normal power is opened, the normal power opening time, and the normal power probability. Try to extend the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set multiple types of time saving states that change different things. Further, in the case of a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently, both can be generated at the same time, or only one can be generated.

Next, the configuration of the batch display device will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of the batch display device of the first embodiment. The batch display device 50 includes 32 LEDs from LED_00 to LED_31. The batch display device 50 displays various states depending on the lighting mode of LEDs_00 to LED_31.

By allocating various status display functions from LED_00 to LED_31, the batch display device 50 has a round display unit 51, a special figure 1 hold display unit 52, a special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, and a special figure 2 symbol display unit 54. It is provided with a normal symbol symbol display unit 55, a normal figure hold display unit 56, and a status display unit 57. The round display unit 51 displays the number of rounds in the special figure game according to the lighting mode of the four LEDs from LED_00 to LED_03. The special figure 1 hold display unit 52 displays the number of holds in the special figure 1 game according to the lighting mode of the two LEDs of LED_04 and LED_05. The special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 displays the symbols in the special figure 1 game according to the lighting mode of the eight LEDs from LED_06 to LED_13. The special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 displays the symbol in the special figure 2 game according to the lighting mode of the eight LEDs from the LED_14 to the LED_21. The normal symbol display unit 55 displays a symbol in the normal symbol game according to the lighting mode of the four LEDs from LED_24 to LED_27. The normal figure hold display unit 56 displays the number of hold in the normal figure game according to the lighting mode of the two LEDs, LED_28 and LED_29. The state display unit 57 displays the gaming state in the special figure game according to the lighting mode of the two LEDs, LED_30 and LED_31. The special figure 2 hold display unit 58 displays the number of holds in the special figure 2 game according to the lighting mode of the two LEDs of LED_22 and LED_23.

Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 10 performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 ms).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. FIG. 6 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the main process of the first embodiment, and FIG. 7 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the main process of the first embodiment. The main process is a process executed by the CPU 111A.

The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, first, the process of disabling interrupts (step S1) is performed, and then the start address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when an interrupt occurs is used. The stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of the first embodiment, the range of the address of the RAM 111C is 0000h to 01FFh, and the upper level is 00h or 01h. In step S4, 00h, which is on the head side of the address range of the RAM 111C, is set.

Next, the firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step S5). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing stop signal, and the firing of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S6), and a process of setting the power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a slave control means (for example, a payout control device 200 or an effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to an instruction from the game control device 100 that is the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for the program to start normally is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first, and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can prevent the command from being missed. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control device (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It serves as a waiting means for setting the waiting time.

Further, the timekeeping of the power-on delay timer is performed by using a storage area (RAM area or register, etc. that is not subject to the validity determination) that is not subject to the validity determination (checksum calculation) of the data held in the RAM area. As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of a RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, so that it is possible to prevent the control at the time of turning on the power from becoming complicated.

An initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and the RAM initialization switch 112 can be operated by reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time. It can be detected reliably. That is, if the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the RAM initialization switch 112 can be operated after the standby time has elapsed, or the RAM initialization switch can be operated from the power-on to the standby time. It is necessary to continue to operate 112. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by performing the operation immediately after turning on the power without performing such annoying operations, and the initialization operation performed at the time of turning on the power. Can be prevented from being unacceptable.

Next, after performing a process of setting a power-on delay timer (for example, about 3 seconds) (step S7), a process of timing the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12). To do. First, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S8), and whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on or not is set. A determination is made (step S9).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is not continuously turned on for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power of the gaming machine 10 is waited to be cut off. .. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. be able to.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the start of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM 111C is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained. Therefore, backup processing is performed when a power failure occurs here. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM 111C, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated to "-1" (step S11), and the timer value is "0". (Step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks for the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). Further, when the value of the timer is "0" (step S12; Y), that is, when the waiting time ends, access permission of RWM (Read Write Memory) such as RAM111C or EEPROM that can be read / written is granted (step). S13), off-data is output to all output ports (set to a state where there is no output) (step S14).

Next, a serial port (a port previously mounted on the gaming microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in the first embodiment) is set (step S15). It is determined from the state of the first input port 122 read earlier whether or not the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned on (step S16).

When the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (step S16; N), it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step). S17) If it is normal (step S17; Y), it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S18). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S18; Y), a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S19), and the calculated checksum and the power are turned off. It is determined whether or not the checksums of the above match (step S20). When the checksums match (step S20; Y), the process proceeds to step S21 (FIG. 7), and processing is performed when the checksum is normally restored from the power failure.

Further, when it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (step S16; Y), or when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S17; N or step S18; N). ), If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step S20; N), the process proceeds to step S26 (FIG. 7) to perform initialization processing. That is, the RAM initialization switch 112 serves as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make a means of conversion.

In step S21 (FIG. 7), the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S21). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. It is considered to be indefinite. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area that stores the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the state of the touch switch signal is set to an indefinite state indicating that the state has not been determined. After that, the area in the RWM for storing the game state is examined to determine whether or not the special figure is in the high probability state (the probability state of the special figure variation display game is the high probability state) (step S22). Here, if the special figure is not in the high probability (step S22; N), steps S23 and S24 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S25. Further, when the special figure is in high probability (step S22; Y), the on information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S23), for example, the high probability notification LED (error display) provided in the batch display device 50. The on (lighting) data of the device) is saved in the segment area (step S24). Then, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game processing described later is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S25), and step S31. Proceed to. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S25, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, and a screen designation command (a command on the customer waiting demo screen if waiting for a customer, a command on the customer waiting demo screen, Otherwise, send multiple commands such as the recovery screen command). Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, information on the number of times of production and information on the number of times of high probability are transmitted.

On the other hand, when the transition from steps S16, S17, S18, and S20 to step S26, the RAM access prohibited area is set to the access permission (step S26), and all the areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal status monitoring area are set. The RAM area is cleared to zero (step S27), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step S28). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S29). The area to be initialized here is a customer waiting demo area and an area related to the setting of the production mode. Then, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S31. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S30, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, and a RAM initialization command (a customer waiting demo screen is displayed and a predetermined value is specified. A plurality of commands such as time (for example, a command for notifying RAM initialization by light and sound) are transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, information on the number of times of production and information on the number of times of high probability are transmitted.

In step S31, a process of activating a CTC circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit)) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator includes a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 msec) with respect to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal, and a timer interrupt signal. It includes a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step S31, a process for starting and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S32). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the extracted random number bits (arrangement before the upper bit transposition) by exchanging them in a predetermined order and storing them as different bit arrangements (arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that determines. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of turning on the power are extracted, and the corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of the first embodiment, the winning symbol of the special figure is determined. RWM as the initial value (start value) of the random number to be performed (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number), random number to determine the hit of the normal figure (hit random number), random number to determine the hit symbol of the normal map (win symbol random number)) After saving in the predetermined area of (step S33), the interrupt is permitted (step S34). In the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the first embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial random numbers. ), It is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the initial value random number update process (step S35) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. Although not particularly limited, in the first embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number use the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. It is configured to generate. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the operating clock of the CPU, and the jackpot symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the winning random number, and the winning symbol random number are the program's. It is a "slow counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing which is a processing unit. In addition, in the case of big hit symbol random numbers, small hit symbol random numbers, hit random numbers, and hit symbol random numbers, the so-called "initial value change method" is used to change the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number makes a round. "Is adopted. It should be noted that each of the above random numbers may be a counter-type update by "+1" or "-1", or may be a random-type update in which all the values in the range appear separately without duplication until one round. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process in step S35, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S36), and the power failure monitoring is performed. It is determined whether the signal is on (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step S35). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update process and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop process) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step S35) (step S34), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is executed. It is possible to avoid the interrupt processing being overwhelmed by waiting for the initial value random number update processing.

In the initial value random number update process in step S35, there is a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. If such a method is adopted, both of them are used. In order to avoid executing the initial value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to cancel the interrupt. When the initial value random number update process is not performed in the timer interrupt process as in the embodiment and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. This has the advantage of simplifying the main process.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is not continuously turned on for the number of checks (step S38; N), the process returns to the determination of whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the process of temporarily disabling interrupts (step S39) is complete. The process of outputting off-data to the output port (step S40) is performed.

After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S41), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S42). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S43) for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off and a process (step S44) for saving the calculated checksum in the checksum area, access to the RAM is prohibited. After performing the process (step S45), it waits for the power of the gaming machine to be cut off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be determined at the time of re-input.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game and the subordinate control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300) that perform various controls according to the instructions from the main control means. Etc.), and the main control means sets a predetermined standby time for delaying the start of the main control means and waiting for the start of the slave control device at the time of turning on the power (game control). The device 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time are provided.

Further, a power supply device 400 for supplying electric power to various devices is provided, the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) is provided. , It is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period.

Further, in the main control means (game control device 100), the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) capable of being operated from the outside, and the initialization operation unit are operated. Based on this, an initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111C is provided, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is configured to allow access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.
[Checksum calculation process]
FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the checksum calculation process of the first embodiment. This checksum calculation process is the checksum calculation process (steps S19, S43) in the above-mentioned main process. In this checksum calculation process, first, the start address of the RAM is set as the start value of the calculated address (step S101), and the number of repetitions is set (step S102). Here, the number of repetitions is the number of bytes of the RAM used. Next, "0" is set as the calculated value (step S103).

After that, the value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is used as a new calculated value (step S104), the calculated address is updated by "+1" (step S105), and the number of repetitions is updated by "-1" (step S106). ), It is determined whether or not the checksum calculation is completed (step S107). If the calculation is not completed (step S107; N), the process returns to step S104 and the above process is repeated. When the calculation is completed (step S107; Y), the checksum calculation process is completed.

[Initial value random number update process]
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the initial value random number update process of the first embodiment. This initial value random number update process is the initial value random number update process (step S35) in the above-mentioned main process. In this initial value random number update process, first, the big hit symbol initial value random number is updated by "+1" (step S111), the small hit symbol initial value random number is updated by "+1" (step S112), and the hit initial value random number is "+1". (Step S113), and the winning symbol initial value random number is updated by "+1" (step S114), and the initial value random number update process is completed. Here, the "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special figure, and the "small hit symbol initial value random number" is the random number that determines the small hit stop symbol of the special symbol. It is a random number that is the initial value of. The "winning initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the hit of the normal figure fluctuation game, and the "winning symbol initial value random number" is the initial value of the random number that determines the winning symbol of the normal figure fluctuation game. It is a random number that becomes. It should be noted that the small hit symbol random number does not exist in the model without the small hit, and the hit symbol initial value random number may not exist depending on the model. In this way, the randomness of the random number can be increased by continuously incrementing the initial value random number as long as time allows in the main process.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing in the above-mentioned main processing will be described. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing according to the first embodiment. This timer interrupt process is an interrupt process that occurs between the time when the interrupt is enabled and the time when the interrupt is disabled (steps S34 to S39) in the above-mentioned main process. The timer interrupt process is a process executed by the CPU 111A.

The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, first, the register bank 1 is specified (step S121). By switching to the register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, the D register) (step S122). In step S122, the same processing as in step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register banks are different. Next, input from various sensors and switches, signal acquisition, that is, input processing (step S123) for reading the state of each input port is performed. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, the output process (step S124) for controlling the drive of the actuator such as the solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 38b, normal electric solenoid 37c) is performed. When the firing stop signal is output in step S5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, the signal is not processed. Further, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating the state of launch permission seen from the game control device 100, and a second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the state of launch permission seen from the payout control device 200. Is also generated in the payout control device 200 and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball is configured to be ready to launch.

Next, the payout command transmission process (step S125), the random number update process 1 (step S126), and the random number update process 2 (step S127) for outputting the commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 are performed. After that, monitoring of whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a of the normal figure, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 38a, and monitoring of errors ( The winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S128) for performing the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is performed (whether the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 are opened, etc.) is performed. Further, the special figure game process (step S129) for processing the special figure variation display game and the normal figure game process (step S130) for performing the process related to the normal map variation display game are performed.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step S131), which is provided in the game machine 10 and drives a segment LED for displaying a special figure variation display game and various information related to the game so as to display desired contents, a magnetic sensor 61. Magnet fraud monitoring process (step S132) that checks the detection signal from the sensor and determines whether there is an abnormality, and panel radio error that checks the detection signal from the panel radio sensor 62 and determines whether there is an abnormality. The monitoring process (step S133) is performed. Then, an external information editing process (step S134) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer is performed, and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

Here, in the first embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting interrupt) and the process of restoring the register bank designation (that is, the process of designating register bank 0) are interrupts. It is automatically performed at the time of return (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Depending on the CPU used, there is also a gaming machine that needs to be instructed to execute a process of restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process of restoring the register bank designation.

[Input processing]
Next, the details of the input process (step S123) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the input process of the first embodiment.

In this input process, first, the state of the detection signal of the switch captured in the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 is read (step S141). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of that bit is cleared (step S142), and the state of the read input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step). S143). Next, the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 is prepared (step S144), the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (step S145), and the unused bit data is prepared (step S145). S146). Unused bit data and inverted bit data are prepared for each input port. Next, the bit data to be inverted is prepared (step S147), and the switch reading process (step S148) is performed. Here, in the first embodiment, "preparation" means setting a value in a register, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a value may be set in an RWM or other memory.

Next, the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 is prepared (step S149), the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step S150), and the unused bit data is prepared (step S150). Step S151), the bit data to be inverted is prepared (step S152). Then, the switch reading process (step S153) is performed, and the input process is completed.

As the switches to be monitored by the first input port 122, as shown in FIG. 3, a glass frame open detection switch 63, a main body frame open detection switch 64, a RAM initialization switch 112 (handled as unused in this process), and the like. There are a power failure monitoring signal (which is not used in this process), a payout abnormality status signal, a shoot ball out switch signal, an overflow switch signal, and a touch switch generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400. The switches to be monitored by the second input port 123 include a start port 1 switch 36a (“start port 1 winning signal”) and a start port 2 switch 37a (“start port 2 winning signal” and “ordinary electric accessory 1 due to pattern branching”. Also output as "winning signal 1"), winning opening switch 35a ("ordinary winning opening winning signal"), large winning opening switch 38a ("special electric accessory 1 winning signal") and gate switch 34a (related to "ordinary symbol 1") There is a gate pass signal 1 "). The switch to be monitored by the third input port 124 includes a panel radio wave sensor 62, a switch abnormality detection signal, a magnetic sensor 61, a frame radio wave invalid signal, and a payout busy signal.

[Switch read process]
Next, the details of the switch reading process (steps S148, S153) in the above-mentioned input process will be described. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the switch reading process of the first embodiment. In this switch reading process, first, the state of the signal captured in the target input port is read (step S161). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of that bit is cleared (step S162), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S163), and then the port input state 1 of the target switch control area is reached. Save (store) in (step S164). After that, it waits for the delay time (about 100 μs) until the second reading to elapse (step S165).

When the delay time (about 100 μs) has elapsed, the state of the signal captured in the target input port is read a second time (step S166). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of that bit is cleared (step S167), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S168), and then the port input state 2 of the target switch control area is reached. Save (store) in (step S169). After that, a definite bit pattern is created in which the bits having the same state are 1 and the bits having different states are 0 in the first and second readings (step S170), and the logical product of the definite bit pattern and the port input state 2 is taken, and this time. It is a fixed bit (step S171).

Next, an undetermined bit pattern is created in which the bits having the same state as 0 and the bits having different states as 1 are created in the first and second reads (step S172), and the logic between the undetermined bit pattern and the confirmed state at the time of the previous interrupt. The product is taken and used as the last holding bit (step S173). As a result, it is possible to obtain a signal state in which noise due to chattering of the switch or the like is removed. Then, the fixed bit of this time and the holding bit of the previous time are combined and saved as the fixed state this time (step S174), the exclusive OR is taken between the fixed state of the previous time and the fixed state of this time, and the save is saved as the rising edge (step S175). The switch reading process ends.

When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch reads the switch once for each interrupt process and compares it with the result of the previous read to change the signal. There is a method to judge whether or not it has been done, but if it is done so, if the state of the switch read by the previous interrupt is lost by the next interrupt processing, the correct judgment may not be made. On the other hand, as in the first embodiment, it is possible to avoid the above-mentioned problems by performing the switch read processing twice in one interrupt processing with a predetermined time difference. Become.

[Output processing]
Next, the details of the output process (step S124) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the output process of the first embodiment. In this output process, first, off-data is output (reset) to the third output port 135 (see FIG. 3) that outputs the segment data of the batch display device 50 (step S181). Next, the data to be output to the second output port 134 that outputs the data of the general electric solenoid 37c and the large winning opening solenoid 38b is combined and output (step S182).

Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the batch display device 50 is updated by "+1" in the range of "0" to "3" (step S183), and the LED digit corresponding to the value of the digit counter is digitized. The line output data is acquired (step S184). Here, as an example of dynamically lighting the LED_31 from the LED_00 of the batch display device 50, a round display, a special figure 1 hold display, a special figure 1 symbol display, a special figure 2 symbol display, a normal symbol display, a normal figure hold display, and There is a state display (game state display such as time saving state and high probability state).

Next, the acquired data and the external information data are combined (step S185), and the combined data is output to the fourth output port 136 for digit output and the fifth output port 137 for external information output (step S186). The external information synthesized in step S185 is "door / frame opening" and "security signal".

After that, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S187), and the loaded data is output to the third output port 135 for segment output (step S188).

Subsequently, various output data of external information to be output to the external information terminal board 71 are loaded and synthesized (step S189). The external information synthesized here includes "big hit signal 1", "big hit signal 2", "big hit signal 3", "big hit signal 4", "design fixed number of times signal", "starting port signal", and "main prize ball". "Signal" etc. Next, the combined data and the output data of the launch permission are combined (step S190), and the combined data is output to the fifth output port 137 for external information output and the launch permission signal output (step S191).

Next, the data to be output to the test signal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test signal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (Step S192). After that, the data to be output to the test signal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test signal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step S193).

Next, the data to be output to the test signal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test signal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (Step S194). Further, the data to be output to the test signal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( Step S195). Then, the data to be output to the test signal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test signal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step S196), and the output process is terminated.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (step S125) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the payout command transmission process of the first embodiment. In this figure, the left column is the process of updating (increasing) the number of times the main prize ball signal is output, and the right column is the process of transmitting the payout command.

In the payout command transmission process, first, among the plurality of prize number counter areas provided for each prize ball number (for example, 3 prize balls, 10 prize balls, 14 prize balls), each of them is checked. , It is determined whether or not there is a count number other than "0" in the prize number counter area 2 stored up to 255 prizes (step S201). Then, when there is no count number (step S201; N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S202), and whether or not the check of the count number of all the winning number counter areas is completed. Is determined (step S203).

If it is determined in step S201 that there is a count number (step S201; Y), the count number of the target winning number counter area is subtracted (updated to "-1") (step S204), and the winning number counter area 2 Acquire the number of payouts corresponding to the address (step S205). Next, the value of the remaining number of prize balls area and the number of payouts are added (step S206), the addition result is saved in the remaining number of prize balls area (step S207), and 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S208). It is determined whether the subtraction result is "0" or more (step S209). If the subtraction result is determined to be "0" or more (step S209; Y) in step S209, the number of main prize ball signal outputs is updated by "+1" (step S210), and the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining number area. (Step S211). Here, as the prize ball signal (main prize ball signal), one pulse is output from the main board (game control device 100) for every 10 payout schedules, and 10 pieces are paid out from the payout board (payout control device 200). One pulse is output for each.

Next, in the determination of step S203, it is determined that all the checks have been completed (step S203; Y), or in the determination of step S209, it is determined that the subtraction result is not "0" or more (step S209; N). In this case, if the value of the payout command transmission timer is not "0", the value of the payout command transmission timer is updated by "-1" (step S212). If this payout command transmission process is the first timer interrupt process, the value of the payout command transmission timer is "0" because the initial value set in the final step S221 of this payout command transmission process is not set. Therefore, the subtraction will not be performed. In this way, the payout command is not transmitted for each timer interrupt, but is transmitted after a predetermined time has elapsed. Further, the transmission of the payout command is also a condition that the payout control board side is in a state where the prize ball can be paid out.

Next, when it is determined whether or not the value of the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S213), and when it is determined that the value of the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S213; Y), it is determined. It is determined whether or not the payout busy signal is busy (step S214). Whether or not the payout busy signal is busy is determined not by reference to the port status but by reference to the payout busy signal flag. Here, the conditions for the payout busy signal to be on (busy) are "payout operation", "ball lending operation", "shoot ball out error", "overflow error", and "frame radio fraud occurrence". "Medium", "Abnormal payout ball detection switch (switch to monitor paid out balls)", "Insufficient payout error", "Excessive payout error", "Award to be paid out in the memory of the payout control board" When there is a count of the number of balls (the number of unpaid prize balls = the remaining number of acquired game balls) (= when it is not 0) "and the like.

Next, when the payout busy signal is not busy (step S214; N), it is determined whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S215), and if there is no count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S215). N), the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S216), and it is determined whether or not the check of all areas is completed (step S217). If the check of all areas is not completed (step S217; N), the process returns to step S215.

In step S215, when there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S215; Y), the target winning number counter is updated by "-1" (step S218), and the number of payouts corresponding to the address of the winning number counter area 1 The command is acquired (step S219), and the acquired command is written to the payout serial transmission buffer (step S220). Then, the initial value (for example, 200 ms) is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S221).

When it is determined in step S213 that the value of the payout command transmission timer is not "0" (step S213; N), and when it is determined in step S214 that the payout busy signal is busy (step S214; Y). , When it is determined in step S217 that the check of all areas is completed (step S217; Y), or when the process of step S221 is completed, this payout command transmission process is terminated.

[Random number update process 1]
Next, the random number update process 1 (step S126) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) will be described. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the random number update process 1 of the first embodiment. This random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number, which are the targets of the initial value random number update process.

In the random number update process 1, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit symbol random number of the normal figure is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S231). When the big hit symbol random number of the normal figure is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S231; N), it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S234). If the big hit symbol random number of the normal figure is waiting for the initial value setting (step S231; Y), the big hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S232), and the next big hit symbol random number of the loaded normal figure is loaded. The initial value of is set in the register (start value setting register) holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number region) (step S233). After that, it is determined whether or not the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S234).

When the small hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S234; N), it is determined whether the hit random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S237). When the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S234; Y), the small hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S235), and the next initial value of the loaded small hit symbol random number is loaded. Is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S236). After that, it is determined whether or not the hit random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S237).

When the hit random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S237; N), it is determined whether or not the hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S240). When the hit random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S237; Y), the hit initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S238), and the random number counter corresponding to the next initial value of the loaded hit random number (step S238). It is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the random number area) (step S239). After that, it is determined whether or not the winning symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S240).

If the winning symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S240; N), the random number update process 1 is terminated. When the hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S240; Y), the hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S241), and the next initial value of the loaded hit symbol random number is corresponded to. It is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the random number counter (random number area) (step S242), and the random number update process 1 is terminated.

[Random number update process 2]
Next, the random number update process 2 (step S127) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) will be described. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the random number update process 2 of the first embodiment. The random number update process 2 is a process of updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, there are 1-byte random numbers (variable pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2-byte random numbers (variable pattern random numbers 1) as variable pattern random numbers, and the random number update process 2 is both. Is the update target, and the update target is switched and processed each time an interrupt occurs. Moreover, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed at different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 (random number for determining the reach variation mode) by the random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. It is configured to be.

In this random number update process 2, first, a random number update scan counter for sequentially specifying which of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be the target of the current update process is set from "0" to "3". Update within the range (step S251). Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step S252). Then, the upper limit determination value of the random number is acquired from the table referred to based on the calculated address (step S253). The table referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has made a round.

Subsequently, for example, a random counter (hereinafter referred to as an M1 counter) used for refreshing the DRAM provided in the Z80 series microcomputer used as the gaming microcomputer 111 in the first embodiment. The value of the counter to which the value is set is loaded (step S254). Randomness can be given to random numbers by using the value of the M1 counter. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is acquired, and the value of the M1 counter is masked (step S255). The mask value has a different number of bits depending on the random number to be updated, for example, when updating the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter and the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 are used. Is set to the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter when updating. This is because the upper limit differs depending on the type of random number. As the mask value, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated when the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated, and the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated when the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated. Although 4 bits are illustrated, the numerical value is an example and is not limited to this.

Next, it is determined whether or not the random number region (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S256). When the random number region is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S256; Y), the value remaining by masking the upper 1 byte as the addition value with the mask value of the M1 counter (hereinafter, this is masked). The mask update value is set by adding "1" to the value obtained), the lower 1 byte is set to "0" (step S257), and the process proceeds to step S259. When the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S256; N), the upper 1 byte is set to "0" and the lower 1 byte is set to the above mask update value as the addition value (step S258). ), The process proceeds to step S259. The reason for adding "1" to the masked value is to avoid that the masked value may become "0", and if "0" is added later, it does not change from the value before addition. be.

Then, it is determined whether or not the random number to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step S259), and if it is a 2-byte random number (step S259; Y), the value (2 bytes) of the random number area to be updated is set (2 bytes). Step S260) and step S262. If the random number to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step S259; N), "0" is set as the upper 1 byte of the random number value, and the value of the random number area to be updated (1 byte) is set as the lower 1 byte of the random number value. Is set (step S261), and the process proceeds to step S262.

In step S262, a value obtained by adding the added value determined in step S257 or S258 to the random number value is used as a new random number value, and it is determined whether or not the new random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value acquired in step S253. (Step S263). Then, when the new random number value is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step S263; N), the new random number value is saved in the random number area lower than the 1-byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step S265). If the new random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value (step S263; Y), the value obtained by subtracting the upper limit determination value from the new random number value is used as the new random number value again (step S264), and this value is 1 byte. It is saved in the random number area lower than the random number or the 2-byte random number (step S265).

Next, it is determined whether or not the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (step S266), and if it is not a 2-byte random number (step S266; N), the random number update process 2 is terminated. Further, in the case of a 2-byte random number (step S266; Y), a new random number value (the value when a new random number value is calculated again) is saved in a random number area higher than the 2-byte random number (step S267). , The random number update process 2 is terminated.

In this way, the CPU 111A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. Therefore, the CPU 111A determines the variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of the game ball into the start area of the start winning opening 36 and the normal variation winning device 37. Random number update means for updating random numbers.

[Winning opening switch / status monitoring process]
Next, the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S128) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) will be described. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the winning opening switch / state monitoring process of the first embodiment. In this winning port switch / status monitoring process, first, the winning opening monitoring table (for example, the port to which the detection signal from the count switch is input) corresponding to the winning opening switch 38a in the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is input. Data indicating the number of the signal, the bit position in the port of the signal, and the like are stored) (step S271). Next, the fraud & prize monitoring process (step S272) is executed to monitor whether there is any fraud (illegal winning) that wins the grand prize even though the grand prize opening is not open, and to detect a normal winning. ..

After that, the winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other large winning opening switch 38a in the large winning opening (special variable winning opening device 38) is prepared (step S273), and it is monitored for illegal winning and a normal winning is obtained. The fraud & winning monitoring process (step S274) to be detected is executed. Then, a winning opening monitoring table for the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in the Fuden is prepared (step S275), and fraudulent & winning monitoring processing (step S275) is performed to monitor whether or not there is an illegal winning and to detect a normal winning. Step S276) is executed.

Next, the winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switch (here, the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) that does not require fraud monitoring processing is prepared (step S277), and the winning number is updated. The number counter update process (step S278) is performed.

Next, the value of the status scan counter for sequentially specifying which of the plurality of switches and signals for which the error status of the gaming machine 10 should be monitored is to be monitored this time is "0". To update within the range of "3" (step S279). After that, depending on the value of the status scan counter, any of the switch error 1 error output due to the occurrence of the switch connector disconnection, the shoot ball out error from the payout control device 200, the overflow error from the overflow switch, and the payout error error. The game machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the monitoring of errors based on the crab is prepared (step S280). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S281) for determining whether or not an error has occurred is performed.

Next, a gaming machine status monitoring table 2 is prepared for setting the monitoring of errors based on any of the glass frame opening, the main body frame opening, the frame radio wave fraud, and the touch switch according to the value of the status scan counter. (Step S282). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S283) for determining whether or not an error has occurred is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step S284), and if the value of the status scan counter is not "0" (step S284; N), the winning opening switch / status monitoring End the process. In this case, there is no monitoring target for the gaming machine status in the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. When the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step S284; Y), the gaming machine state based on the switch error 2 error output due to the occurrence of the switch connector disconnection or the like according to the value of the status scan counter. The gaming machine status monitoring table 3 for setting the monitoring of the above is prepared (step S285). Then, the gaming machine status check process (step S286) for determining whether or not an error has occurred is performed, the payout busy signal check process (step S287) is performed, and the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is terminated. The payout busy signal check process is not performed every time, but is executed once every four times, and the remaining three times are passed, so that the monitoring is performed in a 16 ms cycle.

[Illegal & winning monitoring process]
Next, fraud & winning monitoring processing (steps S272, S274, S276) in the winning opening switch / status monitoring processing (see FIG. 17) will be described. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a flowchart of fraud & winning monitoring processing of the first embodiment. In addition, in each winning opening monitoring table prepared by the winning opening switch / error monitoring process, "data for determining whether or not there is an input (monitoring switch bit)", "lower address of fraudulent monitoring information", and "illegal winning""Lower address of several areas", "Illegal winning error notification command", "Illegal winning number upper limit (number of fraud occurrence judgments)", "Winning slot switch table address" and "Notification timer update information (permission / update)" It is assumed that the information is defined.

This fraudulent & winning monitoring process is a process performed on the large winning opening switch 38a of the special variable winning device 38 and the starting port 2 switch 37a of the normal variable winning device 37. For the large prize opening (special variable prize device 38) and Fuden (ordinary variable prize device 37), it is easy to fraudulently open the opening / closing member to insert the game ball and pay out the prize ball. Besides, it monitors fraud.

In this fraud & winning monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning slot switch for which the gaming machine status is monitored is checked (step S291), and it is determined whether or not the fraud monitoring period is in progress (step S292). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than the special gaming state in which the special variable winning device 38 is opened when the winning opening switch to be monitored for the gaming machine state is the large winning opening switch 38a. Further, when the winning opening switch to be monitored for the gaming machine state is the starting opening 2 switch 37a, it is a period other than the state in which the opening control of the normal variable winning device 37 is executed based on the hit of the normal drawing.

Then, in the case of the fraud monitoring period (step S292; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input in the target winning opening switch (step S293). When there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step S293; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S302). If there is an input to the target winning slot switch (step S293; Y), the number of target fraudulent winnings is updated by "+1" (step S294), and the number of fraudulent winnings after addition is the number of fraud occurrence determinations to be monitored (step S293). For example, it is determined whether or not the number is 5 or more (step S295).

The number of judgments is set to 5, for example, when the large winning opening in the open state is converted to the closed state, the game ball is caught in the door member of the large winning opening, and the game ball is the valid period of the count switch. This is to prevent it from being immediately judged to be fraudulent when a prize is won after passing the mark or when noise is added to the signal. As a result, it is possible to prevent the judgment as fraudulent easily even when it is not necessarily fraudulent.

Then, when the number is not more than the determined number (step S295; N), the winning monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S300). If the number is equal to or greater than the number of determinations (step S295; Y), the number of illegal winnings is limited to the number of illegal winning determinations (step S296), and the initial value is saved in the target illegal winning notification timer area (step S297). Next, the target fraud occurrence command is prepared (step S298), the fraudulent winning occurrence flag is prepared as the fraud flag (step S299), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S310). ).

On the other hand, when it is not the fraud monitoring period (step S292; N), the winning monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S300), and the winning number counter update process (step S301) for setting the winning ball is performed. Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S302), and whether or not the notification timer update permission is permitted is determined (step S303). Then, when the update of the notification timer is not permitted (step S303; N), this fraudulent & winning monitoring process ends. As information for which the update of the notification timer is not permitted, there is a large winning opening switch 38a. This is due to the fact that one big winning opening is monitored with two switches. If the timer is updated by monitoring both switches, the timer will be updated at double speed, and as a result, the invalid timer will time up in half of the specified time. In order to avoid such timer update, the update at the timing of the big winning opening switch that performs the monitoring process first is prohibited. Further, when the notification timer is permitted to be updated (step S303; Y) such as the large winning opening switch and the starting opening 2 switch 37a of the normal variable winning apparatus 37 that are to be monitored later, the target notification timer is set to "0". If not, "-1" is updated (step S304). The minimum value of the notification timer is set to "0".

The update of the notification timer is permitted when the winning slot switch to be monitored for the gaming machine status is one of the winning slot switches 38a, and when the winning slot switch to be monitored for the gaming machine status is the other winning slot switch 38a. Is not allowed. As a result, regarding the fraudulent notification of the special variable winning device 38, the notification timer is updated twice as often, and it is prevented that the time is up in half of the specified time (for example, 60,000 ms). When the winning opening switch to be monitored for the game machine status is the large winning opening switch 38a or the starting opening 2 switch 37a, updating of the notification timer is always permitted.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the notification timer is "0" (step S305), and if the value is not "0" (step S305; N), that is, if the time is not up, fraud & winning monitoring End the process. Further, when the value is "0" (step S305; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time has already been up, the target illegal release command is prepared (step S306), and the illegal prize release flag is prepared as the illegal flag. Is prepared (step S307). Then, the CPU 111A determines whether or not it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes "0" (step S308).

When the value of the notification timer becomes "0" (step S308; Y), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes "0" in the current fraud & winning monitoring process, the number of target illegal winnings is set. It is cleared (step S309), and the prepared invalid flag is compared with the value of the target invalid flag area (step S310). If it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes "0" (step S308; N), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes "0" in the fraud & winning monitoring process before the previous time, the prepared fraud flag Is compared with the value of the target invalid flag area (step S310).

Then, when the prepared fraud flag and the value of the target fraud flag area match (step S310; Y), the fraud & winning monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared invalid flag and the value of the target invalid flag area do not match (step S310; N), the prepared invalid flag is saved in the target invalid flag area (step S311), and the effect command setting process is performed (step S311). Step S312), the fraud & winning monitoring process is terminated. By the above processing, the fraud notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 due to the occurrence of fraud, and the fraudulent winning fraud release command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 due to the cancellation of the fraud, and the start and end of the fraud notification are set. Will be done.

[Winning number counter update process]
Next, the winning number counter update processing (steps S278, S301) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / status monitoring processing and fraud & winning monitoring processing will be described. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the winning number counter update process of the first embodiment. In addition, in the winning table of the winning opening monitoring table prepared by the winning opening switch / status monitoring process, the information of the "repetition count" and the "data for determining whether or not there is an input" defined for each switch are obtained. (Monitoring switch bit) ”,“ lower address of the winning number counter area 1 ”and“ lower address of the winning number counter area 2 ”are defined.

In this winning number counter update process, first, the number of winning opening switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning opening monitoring table (step S321), and whether or not there is an input (correctly, a change in input) to the target winning opening switch. (Step S322).

If there is no input (step S322; N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S331). If there is an input (step S322; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step S323), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step S324), and it is determined whether or not the overflow occurs. (Step S325). Then, when no overflow has occurred (step S325; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1 (step S326). As a result, the winning number counter for the winning ball (sending the payout command) is updated. The counter size at this time is 2 bytes, and is updated in the range of "0" to "65535". Further, when an overflow occurs (step S325; Y), the process of step S326 is passed.

Next, the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S327), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step S328), and it is determined whether or not the overflow occurs (step S329). If no overflow has occurred (step S329; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step S330). As a result, the winning number counter for the main prize ball signal is updated. The counter size at this time is 1 byte, and is updated in the range of "0" to "255". Further, when an overflow occurs (step S329; Y), the process of step S330 is passed.

When the table address is updated to the address of the next record in step S331, it is determined whether or not the monitoring of all switches has been completed (step S332). When the monitoring of all the switches is not completed (step S332; N), the process returns to the process of determining whether or not the target winning opening switch has an input (step S322). When the monitoring of all the switches is completed (step S332; Y), the winning number counter update process is terminated. By the above processing, the prize ball according to the prize is set.

[Game machine status check process]
Next, the gaming machine state check process (step S286) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process will be described. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the gaming machine state check process of the first embodiment. In addition, in each game machine state monitoring table prepared by the winning port switch / state monitoring process, "lower address of the start address of the state monitoring area" and "port of the switch control area in which the target signal information is stored". "Lower address of input state area", "Mask data to extract only the bit of the target signal", "Signal on judgment data", "Status off command (meaning of command to end error notification in the case of error system)", Information of "status on command (meaning of command to start error notification in the case of error system)", "status off monitoring timer comparison value", and "status on monitoring timer comparison value" is defined, respectively.

In this gaming machine status check process, first, a status monitoring table corresponding to the status scan counter is acquired (step S341), and whether or not the signal to be monitored is on, that is, whether or not it is in a state indicating an error. Determination (step S342). When the signal to be monitored is not on, it means a normal state where there is no error for the error system, and it means a state where the touch switch is not touched. Further, when the signal to be monitored is on, it means an error (abnormal, invalid) state for an error system, and means a touched state for a touch switch.

In step S342, when the signal is not on (step S342; N), the state off flag is prepared as the state flag (step S343), and the target state off command is acquired and prepared (step S344). After that, the target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S345), and the value in the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S349).

On the other hand, when the signal is on (step S342; Y), the state on flag is prepared as the state flag (step S346), and the target state on command is acquired and prepared (step S347). After that, the target state-on monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S348), and the value in the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S349).

When the value of the target signal control area and the current signal state match (step S349; Y), that is, when the signal state has not changed, the target state monitoring timer is updated by "+1" (step S352). ), It is determined whether or not the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S353). Further, when the value of the target signal control area and the state of the current signal do not match (step S349; N), that is, when the state of the signal changes, the state of the current signal is saved in the target signal control area. (Step S350). Then, the target status monitoring timer is cleared (step S351), the target status monitoring timer is updated by "+1" (step S352), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target status monitoring timer is equal to or higher than the monitoring timer comparison value. (Step S353).

When the value of the target status monitoring timer has not reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S353; N), this gaming machine status check process is terminated. When the value of the target status monitoring timer becomes equal to or higher than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S353; Y), the status monitoring timer is updated to "-1" and kept at the value of "comparison value -1" (step S354). ), The prepared state flag is compared with the value of the target state flag area (step S355).

Then, when the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area match (step S355; Y), this gaming machine state check process is terminated. If the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area do not match (step S355; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step S356), and the state prepared above is turned off. The effect command setting process for transmitting either the command or the status on command is performed (step S357), and the gaming machine status check process is terminated.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
Next, the payout busy signal check process (step S287) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process will be described. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the payout busy signal check process of the first embodiment.

In this payout busy signal check process, first, it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal is on (step S361), and if the payout busy signal is not on (step S361; N), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S361). Step S362), the off confirmation monitoring timer comparison value is set (step S363). For example, 32 ms is set as the off-determination monitoring timer comparison value set here.

In step S361, when the payout busy signal is on (step S361; Y), the busy state flag is prepared as the state flag (step S364), and the on confirmation monitoring timer comparison value is set (step S365). For example, 32 ms is set as the on-determination monitoring timer comparison value set here.

Next, the value in the busy signal state region is compared with the state of the current signal (step S366). When the value in the busy signal state region and the state of the current signal match (step S366; Y), that is, when the signal state has not changed, the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by "+1" (step S369). It is determined whether or not the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the timer comparison value (step S370). Further, when the value in the busy signal state region and the state of the current signal do not match (step S366; N), that is, when the state of the signal changes, the state of the current signal is saved in the busy signal state region (step S366; N). Step S367). Then, the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to zero (step S368), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by "+1" (step S369), and it is determined whether or not the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is equal to or higher than the timer comparison value (step S370). ).

If the value of the busy signal monitoring timer has not reached the timer comparison value (step S370; N), this payout busy signal check process is terminated. When the value of the busy signal monitoring timer becomes equal to or higher than the timer comparison value (step S370; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated to "-1" and kept at the value of "comparison value -1" (step S371). , The prepared state flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (step S372), and the payout busy signal check process is terminated.

[Special figure game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game processing (step S129) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. 22. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure game processing of the first embodiment.

In the special figure game process, the inputs of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are monitored, the entire process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set. In the special figure game process, first, the start port switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring the winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball is won in the start winning opening 36 forming the first starting winning opening and the normal variable winning device 37 forming the second starting winning opening, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted. The game result is preliminarily determined before the start of the special figure variation display game based on the prize.

Next, the large winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this large winning opening switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the detection of a game ball by the large winning opening switch 38a (large winning opening switch 1, large winning opening switch 2) provided in the special variable winning opening device 38 is performed.

Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step A3). The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4). If the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been timed up, refer to it for branching to the processing corresponding to the special figure game processing number. The special figure game sequence branch table is set in the register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game processing number (step A7).

If the special figure game processing number is "0" in step A7, the change start of the special figure change display game is monitored, the change start setting and effect setting of the special figure change display game, and the special figure change are in progress. Special figure for setting information necessary for processing, etc. Perform normal processing (step A8).

When the special figure game processing number is "1" in step A7, the special figure changing process for setting the stop display time of the special figure, setting the information necessary for performing the special figure display processing, and the like. (Step A9) is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of big hit, and the big winning opening of each big hit. The special figure display processing (step A10) for setting the fanfare time according to the opening pattern, setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, and the like is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "3", the opening time of the big winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening is set. Perform fanfare / interval processing (step A11).

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the big hit round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the remaining big winning opening. Performs the large winning opening opening processing (step A12), which performs processing such as setting information necessary for performing ball processing.

In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "5", if the jackpot round is not the final round, the information necessary for performing fanfare / interval processing is set, but if it is the final round. Performs the large winning opening residual ball processing (step A13) for setting the time for the remaining balls in the large winning opening to be discharged, setting the information necessary for performing the big hit end processing, and the like.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "6", the jackpot end process (step A14) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure normal processing is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "7", in order to set the opening time / opening pattern of the big winning opening when a small hit occurs, set the fanfare command, and perform the small hit middle processing. Perform the small hit fanfare process (step A15) to set the necessary information.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "8", the command setting of the small hit middle operation transition processing, the small hit end screen, the setting of the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing, etc. are performed. Perform the small hit medium processing (step A16).

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "9", the small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) for setting the information necessary for performing the small hit end processing is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "10", the small hit end process (step A18) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure normal processing is performed.

After that, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 (step A19), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A20) related to the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 is performed. Then, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 (step A21), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A22) related to the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 is performed, and the special symbol game process is performed. To finish. On the other hand, in step A4, if the value of the special figure game processing timer is not "0" (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A19, and subsequent processing is performed. Do it.

The small hit is a result mode without the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs (stop display of the big hit symbol) in the special figure fluctuation display game, and when the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and it is special as a special electric accessory. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 38 is set (the accessory continuous operating device is activated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case where the small hit lottery is won, for example. The "conditional device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on / off by software as described above, or a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on / off electrically. Further, "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of an electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term that has a meaning.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (step A1) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. 23. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the start port switch monitoring process of the first embodiment.

In the start port switch monitoring process, first, the start port 1 (start winning port 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and the hard random number acquisition process (step A102) is performed to determine whether the starting port 1 is awarded. It is determined whether or not (step A103).

If it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning in the starting port 1 (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109, and subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a prize in the starting port 1 (step A103; Y), it is determined whether or not the special time is being shortened (during normal electric support) (step A104). .. It should be noted that the determination in step A104 is to determine whether or not the gaming state is being supported by the electric power, and does not include the high or low of the probability state as the determination target.

If it is determined in step A104 that the special time reduction is not in progress (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107, and subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A104 that the special figure time is being shortened (step A104; Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and an effect command setting process (step A106) is performed. .. That is, in the time saving state, the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105) and the effect command setting process (step A106) is performed regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the starting port 1 (starting winning opening 36) is not won unless it is left-handed, and the normal variable winning device 37 is not won unless it is right-handed. Therefore, in the time-saving state, right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed, but when there is a prize in the starting port 1 during the time-saving state (that is, when left-handed during the time-saving state). Is configured to transmit a right-handed instruction notification command to the effect control device 300 and perform a notification (warning) instructing the effect to strike by the effect control device 300.

Next, after preparing a table for setting the information of the hold by the starting port 1 (starting winning opening 36) (step A107), the special drawing starting port switch common process (step A108) is performed.

Next, a winning monitoring table for the starting port 2 (ordinary variable winning device 37) is prepared (step A109), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed to determine whether or not there is a winning in the starting port 2. (Step A111).

If it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning in the starting port 2 (step A111; N), the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A111 that there is a prize for the starting port 2 (step A111; Y), the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 37) is operating, that is, the ordinary variable winning device 37. It is determined whether or not the device 37 is activated and the game ball is in an open state in which a prize can be won (step A112), and when it is determined that the normal electric accessory is operating (step A112; Y), step A114 Move to the processing of and perform the subsequent processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A112 that the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not a general electric fraud is occurring (step A113).

In the determination of whether or not a fraudulent occurrence is occurring, it is determined that fraudulent occurrence is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the ordinary variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5). In the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or fraud has occurred, and if there is a game ball that wins in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent prizes. Then, when the number of fraudulent winnings counted in this way is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of fraud occurrence determinations (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

When it is determined in step A113 that the electric power fraud is not occurring (step A113; N), after preparing a table for setting the information of the hold by the starting port 2 (ordinary variable winning device 37) (step A114), the special figure. The start port switch common process (step A115) is performed to end the start port switch monitoring process. If it is determined in step A113 that an illegal electric power is being generated (step A113; Y), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second start memory is prevented from being generated any more.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
Next, the details of the hard random number acquisition process (steps A102, A110) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the hard random number acquisition process of the first embodiment.

In the hard random number acquisition process, first, among the starting port 1 (starting winning opening 36) and the starting opening 2 (normal variable winning device 37), the non-winning information of the starting port to be monitored is set (step A121), and the start is started. It is determined whether or not there is an input in the start port switch to be monitored among the port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a (step A122). Then, when there is no input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. On the other hand, when there is an input in the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123), and it is determined whether or not the target random number latch register has latch data (step). A124).

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y), the jackpot random number extracted in the monitored hard random number latch register is loaded and prepared (step A125). Then, among the starting port 1 (starting winning opening 36) and the starting opening 2 (normal variable winning device 37), the winning information of the starting port to be monitored is set (step A126), and the hard random number acquisition process is completed. ..

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special start port switch common process (steps A108 and A115) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure start port switch common processing of the first embodiment.

The special figure start port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each of the inputs of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a.
In the special figure start port switch common process, first, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, information regarding the number of winnings to the start port switch to be monitored is sent to the external management device of the game machine 10. The start port signal output count, which is the number of outputs, is loaded (step A131), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step A132), and it is determined whether or not the output count overflows (step A133). When the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the start port signal output count area of the RWM (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step A133; Y), the process passes through step A134 and proceeds to the process of step A135. In the first embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the start port signal output frequency region. Then, when the loaded value is "255", when it is updated by "+1", the updated value becomes "0", and it is configured to determine that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure reservations (starting storage) of the update target corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored is less than the upper limit value (). Step A135). If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A135; N), the special figure start port switch common process is terminated. When the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (the number of special figure 1 hold or the number of special figure 2 hold) is updated by "+1" ( Step A136), the start opening winning flag to be monitored is saved (step A137). Subsequently, the address of the start port switch to be monitored and the random number storage area corresponding to the number of reserved special figures is calculated (step A138), and the big hit random number prepared in step A125 is saved in the big hit random number storage area of RWM (step A138). Step A139). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (step A140), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A141).

Next, it is determined whether or not the winning is in the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36) (step A142).
If it is determined in step A142 that the winning is not to the starting port 1 (step A142; N), the process proceeds to step A145.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A142 that the winning is to the starting port 1 (step A142; Y), the small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step A143), and the small hit symbol random number of RWM is extracted. Save to the storage area (step A144).

Next, the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (step A145), and the special figure reservation information determination process (step A146) is performed.

Next, the start port switch to be monitored and the decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure hold number are prepared (step A147), the effect command setting process (step A148) is performed, and the special figure start port switch common process is performed. finish.

Here, the RAM 111C of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the starting winning opening 36 and the starting winning area of the normal variable winning device 37, and the special figure variation display game. It is a starting prize storage means that stores up to a predetermined number as the starting memory that is the execution right of. Further, the start winning winning storage means (RAM111C) stores various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36) as the first starting memory up to a predetermined number, and starts. Various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the mouth 2 (ordinary variable winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination process (step A146) in the above-mentioned start port switch common process will be described with reference to FIG. 26. FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure reservation information determination process of the first embodiment.

The special figure hold information determination process is a look-ahead process in which the result-related information corresponding to the start memory is determined before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

In the special figure reservation information determination process, first, the start opening winning flag saved in step A137 is checked, and it is determined whether or not the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36) has won a prize (step A151).

If it is determined in step A151 that the winning is not a prize for the starting port 1 (step A151; N), the process proceeds to step A154, and subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A151 that the winning opening 1 has been won (step A151; Y), it is determined whether or not the special time reduction is in progress (step A152).

If it is determined in step A152 that the special figure time is being shortened (step A152; Y), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A152 that the special time reduction is not in progress (step A152; N), it is determined whether or not the jackpot is in the middle or the small hit is in progress (step A153).

If it is determined in step A153 that a big hit or a small hit is in progress (step A153; Y), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A153 that the jackpot is not in progress or the small hit is not occurring (step A153; N), it is determined whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot depending on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value. The jackpot determination process (step A154) is performed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the jackpot determination process is a jackpot (step A155). Then, when the determination result is a big hit (step A155; Y), the big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start port switch is set (step A156), and the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A140 is dealt with. The stop symbol information is acquired (step A157), the process proceeds to the process of step A164, and the subsequent processes are performed.

On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step A155; N), it is determined whether or not the starting port 1 (starting winning opening 36) has won a prize (step A158).
If it is determined in step A158 that the winning is not to the starting port 1 (step A158; N), the stop symbol information of the outlier is set (step A163), the process proceeds to the process of step A164, and thereafter. Perform the processing of.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A158 that the winning is to the starting port 1 (step A158; Y), whether or not the jackpot random value is a small hit depending on whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. The small hit determination process (step A159) for determining the above is performed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (step A160). Then, when the determination result is not a small hit (step A160; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step A163), the process proceeds to the process of step A164, and the subsequent processes are performed.

On the other hand, when the determination result is a small hit (step A160; Y), the small hit symbol random number check table is set (step A161), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A143 is input. It is acquired (step A162), the process proceeds to the process of step A164, and the subsequent processes are performed.

Then, a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A164), and the effect command setting process (step A165) is performed. Next, the special figure information setting process (step A166) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and the variation pattern setting process (step A167) for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed. To do.

After that, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A168), and the effect command setting process (step). Perform A169) and end the special figure reservation information determination process. The special figure information setting process in step A166 and the variation pattern setting process in step A167 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special map normal processing.

Through the above processing, a look-ahead symbol command containing the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target and a look-ahead fluctuation pattern command including information on the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. And transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, the judgment result (look-ahead result) of the result-related information (whether it is a big hit or not and the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is controlled to be produced before the start timing of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the corresponding start memory. It is possible to notify the device 300, and in particular, by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, the result-related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure variation display game. It becomes possible to notify.

That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start prize storage means (RAM 111C) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). Judgment) Makes a preliminary judgment means. It should be noted that the time to determine the random number value stored in advance corresponding to the start memory is not only at the start prize when the start memory occurs, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is played. good.

[Large winning opening switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the large winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the large winning opening switch monitoring process of the first embodiment.

In the large winning opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is being opened, that is, whether or not it is in a special gaming state (step A201). If the process during the opening of the large winning opening is in progress (step A201; Y), the process proceeds to the process of step A205, and the subsequent processes are performed. When the process during the opening of the large winning opening is not being performed (step A201; N), it is determined whether or not the processing for the remaining balls of the large winning opening is being performed (step A202).

If the processing of the remaining balls in the large winning opening is in progress (step A202; Y), the process proceeds to the process of step A205. When the processing of the remaining balls in the large winning opening is not in progress (step A202; N), it is determined whether or not the processing is in progress during the small hit (during the small hit game state) (step A203).

If the small hit process is in progress (step A203; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. When the small hit middle processing is not in progress (step A203; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (step A204).

If the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A204; N), the large winning opening switch monitoring processing is terminated. If the small hit residual sphere processing is in progress (step A204; Y), the process proceeds to step A205.

Since the value of the special figure game processing number does not shift until the special figure game processing timer reaches "0", the progress state of the game is checked by checking the value of the special figure game processing number. Can be checked. Therefore, the value of the special figure game processing number is checked to determine whether or not the large winning opening is being processed, the large winning opening remaining ball is being processed, the small hit is being processed, and the small hit remaining ball is being processed. I will do it.

Then, "0" is set in the winning counter for counting the number of winnings to the large winning opening added in the large winning opening switch monitoring process this time (step A205), and is there an input to the large winning opening switch 1? Is determined (step A206).

When there is no input to the large winning opening switch 1 (step A206; N), the process proceeds to the process of step A210, and the subsequent processes are performed. When there is an input to the big winning opening switch 1 (step A206; Y), the big winning opening count command is prepared (step A207), the effect command setting process (step A208) is performed, and the value of the winning counter is set to ". +1 ”update (step A209).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is an input in the large winning opening switch 2 (step A210), and if there is no input in the large winning opening switch 2 (step A210; N), the process proceeds to step A214. Subsequent processing is performed. When there is an input to the big winning opening switch 2 (step A210; Y), the big winning opening count command is prepared (step A211), the effect command setting process (step A212) is performed, and the value of the winning counter is set to "". +1 ”update (step A213).

Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter is "0" (step A214), and when the value of the winning counter is "0" (step A214; Y), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is performed. finish. When the value of the winning counter is not "0" (step A214; N), it is determined whether or not the large winning opening remaining ball processing is in progress (step A215), and when the large winning opening remaining ball processing is in progress (step A215). In step A215; Y), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated.

When the large winning opening remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A215; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (step A216), and when the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (step A216; In Y), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is completed.

When the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A216; N), the value of the winning counter (“1” or “2”) is added to the large winning opening count (step A217), and the large winning opening count is calculated. It is determined whether or not it is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (the number of game balls that can be won in one round (9)) (step A218).

If the number of winning openings is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A218; N), the winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. When the number of large winning openings is equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A218; Y), the number of large winning openings is kept at the upper limit (step A219), and the information in the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to zero (step A220). ), It is determined whether or not the small hit middle processing is in progress (step A221).

If the small hit process is not in progress (step A221; N), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. When the small hit middle processing is in progress (step A221; Y), the value of the end of the small hit opening operation is saved in the large winning opening control pointer area (step A222), and the large winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. As a result, the big prize opening will be closed and one round will end.

[Special figure normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure normal processing (step A8) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure normal processing of the first embodiment.

In the special figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 hold number (second start storage number) is “0” (step A301). When it is determined that the special figure 2 hold number is “0” (step A301; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 hold number (first start storage number) is “0” (step A306). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved special figures 1 is "0" (step A306; Y), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demo has been started (step A311), and the customer waiting demo has not been started. (Step A311; N) sets the customer waiting demo flag area in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A312).

Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A313), an effect command setting process (step A314) is performed, a special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A315) is performed, and the special figure normal process is completed. .. On the other hand, if the customer waiting demo has already started in step A311 (step A311; Y), the special figure normal processing transition setting process 1 (step A315) is performed to end the special figure normal processing.

Further, in step A301, when the special figure 2 hold number is not "0" (step A301; N), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A302) is performed, and the decorative special figure corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is performed. The hold number command is prepared (step A303), and the effect command setting process (step A304) is performed. Then, the special figure changing process transition setting process (step A305) of the special figure 2 is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated.

Further, in step A306, when the special figure 1 hold number is not "0" (step A306; N), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A307) is performed, and the decorative special figure corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is performed. The hold number command is prepared (step A308), and the effect command setting process (step A309) is performed. Then, the special figure changing process transition setting process (step A310) of the special figure 1 is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated.

In this way, by checking the special figure 2 hold number before the check of the special figure 1 hold number, if the special figure 2 hold number is not "0", the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A302). Will be executed. That is, the second special figure variation display game is executed in preference to the first special figure variation display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has a second start memory in the second start storage means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the second start memory is displayed as a variable display based on the first start memory. It is a priority control means that is executed with priority over the game.

[Special figure Normal processing Transition setting processing 1]
Next, the details of the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A315) in the above-mentioned special figure normal process will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 of the first embodiment.

In the special figure normal process transition setting process 1, first, "0", which is the process number related to the special figure normal process, is set as the process number (step A321), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step). A322).

Then, the information in the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A323), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A324), and the special figure normal processing transition setting process 1 is terminated. do.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A307) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment.

The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure variation display game. In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, first, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (step A331), and the first special figure 1 Figure The jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A332) for setting the missed information and the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 1 for determining whether or not the variable display game is a jackpot is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A333) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. The information setting process (step A334) is performed, and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display game is set, is prepared. (Step A335). After that, the variation pattern setting process (step A336) for setting the variation pattern, which is the variation mode in the first special figure variation display game, is performed, and the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the first special figure variation display game is performed. (Step A337) is performed to end the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A302) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described with reference to FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment.

The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure variation display game, and is the same process as the process in the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. 30 for the second start memory. It is done as.

In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (step A341), and the second special figure 2 Figure The jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A342) for setting the missed information and the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 2 for determining whether or not the variable display game is a jackpot is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. The information setting process (step A344) is performed, and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special figure fluctuation display game is set, is prepared. (Step A345). After that, the variation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting the variation pattern, which is the variation mode in the second special figure variation display game, is performed, and the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the second special figure variation display game is performed. (Step A347) is performed to end the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A332) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the jackpot flag 1 setting process of the first embodiment.

In the big hit flag 1 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag area (step A351), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step A352). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM, prepared (step A353), and the information of the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is stored. Clear "0" (step A354). It should be noted that the reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start storage in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1). After that, a jackpot determination process (step A355) for determining whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value is performed, and whether the determination result of the jackpot determination process is a jackpot. It is determined whether or not (step SA356).

When the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step A355) is a jackpot (step A356; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step A352 (step A357). ), The jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the judgment result of the big hit determination process (step A355) is not a big hit (step A356; N), whether or not the prepared big hit random number value is a small hit depending on whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. The small hit determination process (step A358) is performed to determine whether or not the determination result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (step SA359).

When the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A358) is a small hit (step A359; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag area where the loss information was saved in step A351. (Step A360), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A358) is not a small hit (step A359; N), the large hit flag 1 setting process is performed while saving the loss information in both the large hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag area. finish. As described above, in the first embodiment, the result of the first special figure variation display game is one of "big hit", "small hit", and "missing".

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the jackpot flag 2 setting process of the first embodiment.

In the jackpot flag 2 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area (step A371). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM, prepared (step A372), and the information of the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is stored. Clear "0" (step A373). It should be noted that the reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start storage in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). After that, a jackpot determination process (step A374) for determining whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value is performed, and whether the determination result of the jackpot determination process is a jackpot. It is determined whether or not (step SA375).

When the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step A374) is a jackpot (step A375; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step A371 (step A376). ), The jackpot flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step A374) is not a jackpot (step A375; N), the jackpot flag 2 setting process is terminated while saving the information about the jackpot flag 2. As described above, in the first embodiment, the result of the second special figure variation display game is either "big hit" or "missing".

[Big hit judgment process]
Next, the details of the jackpot determination process (steps A154, A355, A374) in the above-mentioned special figure hold information determination process, jackpot flag 1 setting process, and jackpot flag 2 setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the jackpot determination process of the first embodiment.

In the jackpot determination process, first, the lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step A381), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit.

When the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y), a deviation is set as the determination result (step A387), and the jackpot determination process is terminated. Specifically, when the jackpot determination process is the jackpot determination process (step A355) in the jackpot flag 1 setting process, the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y). Since it is a small hit or a miss, "other than a big hit (small hit or miss)" is set as a determination result (step A387). On the other hand, when the jackpot determination process is the jackpot determination process (step A374) in the jackpot flag 2 setting process, the case where the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y) is out of the question. Therefore, “other than big hit (missing)” is set as the determination result (step A387).

Further, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; N), it is determined whether or not the probability is high (the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is the high probability state) (step A383). ..

Then, in the case of high probability (step A383; Y), the upper limit determination value in high probability is set (step A384), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A384). Step A386). Further, in the case of not in the high probability state (step A383; N), the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set (step A385), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step). A386).

When the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y), a deviation is set as the determination result (step A387), and the jackpot determination process is terminated. Specifically, when the jackpot determination process is the jackpot determination process (step A355) in the jackpot flag 1 setting process, when the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y), it is small. Since it is a hit or a miss, "other than a big hit (small hit or a miss)" is set as a determination result (step A387). On the other hand, when the jackpot determination process is the jackpot determination process (step A374) in the jackpot flag 2 setting process, the case where the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y) is out of order. , "Other than big hit (missing)" is set as the determination result (step A387).

If the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; N), that is, if it is a jackpot, a jackpot is set as the determination result (step A388), and the jackpot determination process is terminated.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, the details of the small hit determination process (steps A159, A358) in the above-mentioned special figure hold information determination process and the big hit flag 1 setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the small hit determination process of the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 35, in the small hit determination process, first, a small hit lower limit determination value is set, and it is determined whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A391). The small hit determination is performed using the same random number (big hit random number) as the big hit determination. That is, a small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or higher than the small hit lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. If it is equal to or less than the determination value, it is determined to be a small hit. Of course, the range of the big hit judgment value and the range of the small hit judgment value are set so as not to be covered.

If the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A391; Y), that is, if it is a deviation, a deviation is set as the determination result (step A393), and the small hit determination process is terminated.

If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A391; N), the small hit upper limit judgment value is set, and whether or not the target big hit random number value is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value is determined. Determination (step A392).

If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A392; Y), that is, if it is a deviation, a deviation is set as the determination result (step A393), and the small hit determination process is terminated.

If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A392; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the determination result (step A394), and the small hit determination process is completed. do.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A333) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A401), and if it is a big hit (step A401; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (number of holds). Load the jackpot symbol random number from (for 1) (step A402). Next, the special figure 1 jackpot symbol table is set (step A403), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired, and the game is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A404). This process selects the type of special result.

After that, the special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A405), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the game is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A406). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step A407), the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the time reduction determination is made. It is saved in the data area (step A408), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A409). This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state and the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state. In the case of the first embodiment, the effect mode shifts with the hit as an opportunity, and the transition destination of the effect mode that shifts after the end of the hit changes according to the type of the hit symbol (type of the big hit symbol or the small hit). Further, in the case of a specific jackpot symbol (for example, 4R probability variation symbol) among the jackpots in the special figure 1, the dedicated effect mode in which the transition destination is determined is the probability variation depending on whether or not the game state is probabilistic. It is decided whether to switch to the production mode or to shift to the production mode in which it is difficult to distinguish whether the mode is probable or not. Then, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A401; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is a small hit (step A410), and when it is a small hit (step A410; Y), special figure 1 The small hit symbol random number is loaded from the small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (step A411). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (step A412), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and the save symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A413).

After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A414), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A415). Then, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

If the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A410; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A416), and the loss stop symbol pattern is set in the stop symbol pattern area. Save (step A417) and prepare a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step A418). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (step A419), and the effect command setting process (step A420) is performed. This decorative special figure command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A421), and the information in the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to "0" (step A422). , The information of the special figure 1 small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to "0" (step A423), and the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A431), and if it is a big hit (step A431; Y), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (step A431; Y). Load the jackpot symbol random number from (for 1 hold number) (step A432). Next, the special figure 2 jackpot symbol table is set (step A433), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired, and the game is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A434). This process selects the type of special result.

After that, the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A435), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the game is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A436). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step A437), the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the time reduction determination is made. It is saved in the data area (step A438), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A439). This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state and the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state. Further, in the case of the first embodiment, in the jackpot in the special figure 2, the effect mode of the transition destination is a dedicated effect mode in which the effect mode of the transition destination is confirmed to be probable regardless of any of the jackpot symbols. Then, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A442).

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A431; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A440), and the missed stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area. Then (step A441), a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A442). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (step A443), and the effect command setting process (step A444) is performed. This decorative special figure command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A445), and the information in the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to "0" (step A446). ), The special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

That is, the game control device 100 executes the first variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of the game ball at the starting port 1 (starting winning port 36), and the game control device 100 executes the first variable display game at the starting port 2 (normal variable winning device 37). It serves as a variable display game execution means for executing a second variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of the game ball. Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variable display game execution control means for controlling the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination means (game control device 100).

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure information setting process (steps A166, A334, A344) in the special figure hold information determination process, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, and the special figure 2 variation start process will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure information setting process of the first embodiment.

In the case of the first embodiment, the probability state (low / high probability, with / without time reduction) does not affect the distribution of fluctuations, and the effect mode managed by the game control device 100 affects the distribution of fluctuations. As the effect mode, one effect mode is set from a plurality of effect modes according to the probability state, the presence / absence of the time saving state, the progress status of the special figure variation display game, and the like.

In the special figure information setting process, first, the first half variation group selection pointer table is set (step A451), and the first half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A452).

Next, the first half variable group selection offset table is set (step A453), and the offset data corresponding to the target special figure hold number and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A454).

Next, the first half variable group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step A455), and the value obtained by the addition is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step A456). As a result, the variable distribution information 1 generated based on the type of stopped symbol, the number of holdings, and the effect mode is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area. The fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (variation mode before the start of reach), and is later used to select a fluctuation group. However, although it depends on the specifications of the model, the fluctuation time is shortened only in the case of out-of-order when the number of holdings is large. Therefore, in cases other than out-of-order, the number of holdings does not affect the distribution of fluctuations in the first half. The fluctuation group includes a plurality of fluctuation patterns, and when determining the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation group is first selected, and then one fluctuation pattern is selected from the fluctuation groups. ing.

Next, the latter half variation group selection pointer table is set (step A457), and the latter half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A458).

Next, the latter half variable group selection offset table is set (step A459), and the offset data corresponding to the target special figure hold number and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A460).

Next, the latter half variable group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step A461), the value obtained by the addition is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step A462), and the special figure information setting process is completed. As a result, the variable distribution information 2 generated based on the type of stopped symbol, the number of holdings, and the effect mode is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. The fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation (type of reach (including no reach)), and is later used to select a fluctuation group. However, the reach occurrence rate changes according to the number of holds only in the case of a loss (the reach occurrence rate decreases when the number of holds is large), so in cases other than the loss, the number of holds will be distributed to the latter half fluctuation as a result. Does not affect.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the above-mentioned special figure reservation information determination process, special figure 1 change start process, and change pattern setting process (steps A167, A336, A346) in special figure 2 change start will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the variation pattern setting process of the first embodiment.

The fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the reach state to the end of the special map fluctuation display game. It consists of a pattern, and the latter half fluctuation pattern is set first, and then the first half fluctuation pattern is set.

In the variation pattern setting process, first, the variation group address table is set (step A471), the address of the latter half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step A472), and the target variation pattern is obtained. The variation pattern random number 1 is loaded and prepared from the random number 1 storage area (for the holding number 1) (step A473). In the first embodiment, the structure of the latter half variable group table is different between the hit type and the missed type. Specifically, the size for hitting is 1 byte size, and the size for losing is 2 bytes. Since the rate of occurrence of hits is lower than the rate of occurrence of loss and even one byte is sufficient, the size of hits is one byte from the viewpoint of saving data capacity. Therefore, at the time of hitting, only the lower value of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 is used. In addition, the rate of occurrence of loss is higher than the rate of occurrence of hit, and since we want to make more diverse effects appear, the size for loss is 2 bytes.

Then, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order (step A474), and if it is out of order (step A474; Y), a 2-byte distribution process (step A475) is performed to take a step. The process shifts to A477 processing, and subsequent processing is performed. If it is not out of alignment (step A474; N), the distribution process (step A476) is performed, the process proceeds to the process of step A477, and the subsequent processes are performed.

Then, the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of distribution is acquired, prepared (step A477), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of hold 1). Prepare (step A478). Then, the distribution process (step A479) is performed, the latter half variable number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, and the latter half variable number area is saved (step A480). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

Next, the first half fluctuation group table is set (step A481), and the table selection pointer is calculated based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the second half fluctuation number (step A482). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step A483), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of hold 1) and prepared. (Step A484). After that, the distribution process (step A485) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, saved in the first half variation number area (step A486), and the variation pattern setting process is completed. By this process, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is an execution mode of the game, from among a plurality of variations.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation start information setting processing (steps A337 and A347) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the variation start information setting process of the first embodiment.

In the variation start information setting process, first, the information in the random number storage area of the target variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is cleared (step A491). Next, the first half fluctuation time value table is set (step A492), and the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (step A493). Further, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (step A494), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (step A495).

Then, the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value are added (step A496), and the added value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A497). After that, the variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (step A498), the variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared (step A499), and the effect command setting process is performed (step A500). ). Next, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the variable symbol discrimination flag is updated by "-1" (step A501), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variable symbol discrimination flag is set (step A502). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (step A503), the information of the vacant area after the shift is cleared (step A504), and the fluctuation start information setting process is completed.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination means for determining various random value values stored in the start storage means (RAM 111C). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of the identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Decorate special figure variable display Set detailed production contents in the game. Information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games includes a decorative special figure hold number command including information on the number of start memories (holding number), a decorative special figure command including information on a stop symbol, and a variation of the special figure fluctuation display game. A variation command including information on the pattern and a stop information command including information on extension of the stop time are mentioned, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decorative special figure command before the variable command, the processing by the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Process transition setting process during special figure change (Special figure 1)]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) (step A310) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) of the first embodiment.

In the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1), first, "1", which is the processing number related to the special figure changing process, is set as the processing number (step A511), and the process is performed in the special figure game processing number area. Save the number (step A512).

Then, the information in the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A513), and the signal relating to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A514). The signal relating to the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is a signal for turning on the signal during the fluctuation of the special symbol 1. After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A515), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53) is saved in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area. (For example, 100 ms) is saved (set) (step A516), and the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) is terminated.

[Process transition setting process during special figure change (Special figure 2)]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) (step A305) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described with reference to FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) of the first embodiment.

In the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2), first, "1", which is the processing number related to the special figure changing process, is set as the processing number (step A521), and the process is performed in the special figure game processing number area. Save the number (step A522).

Then, the information in the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A523), and the signal related to the start of fluctuation in special figure 2 (the signal during change in special symbol 2 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A524). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A525), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area. Is saved (set) (step A526), and the process transition setting process during special figure change (special figure 2) is terminated.

[Processing during special figure change]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure changing process of the first embodiment.

In the special figure changing process, first, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A601), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A602). In the case of the first embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is an out-of-order symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time, and when the stop symbol pattern is the jackpot symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time, and the stop symbol is set. When the pattern is a small hit symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time. In the case of the first embodiment, the stop symbol pattern is set to the same display time for the out-of-order symbol pattern, the big hit symbol pattern, and the small hit symbol pattern, but different display times may be set for each.

Next, the special map display process transition setting process (step A603) is performed to end the special map display process. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

[Processing during special figure display Transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the special figure display process transition setting process (step A603) in the above-mentioned special figure changing process will be described with reference to FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process transition setting process during the display of the special figure of the first embodiment.

In the special figure display process transition setting process, first, the process number “2” related to the special figure display process is set as the process number (step A611), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A611). Step A612).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the variation in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A613), and the signal relating to the end of the variation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A614). The signal relating to the end of the change in the special figure 1 is a signal for turning off the signal during the change in the special symbol 1. Further, the signal relating to the end of the change in the special figure 2 is a signal for turning off the signal during the change in the special symbol 2.

Then, the control timer initial value (for example, 256 ms) is saved in the symbol fixed number signal control timer area related to the number of times the special figure variation display game for output is executed in the external information terminal (step A615). After that, as the information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area ( Step A616), as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area. Then (step A617), the process transition setting process during display of the special figure is terminated.

[Processing during special figure display]
Next, the details of the special figure display process (step A10) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. FIG. 45 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the process during display of the special figure of the first embodiment. FIG. 46 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the process during display of the special figure of the first embodiment.

In the special figure display processing, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing is loaded (step A701), and the information in the small hit flag area of the RWM is cleared (step A701). Step A702).

Next, the jackpot flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the jackpot flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 variation start process are loaded. (Step A703), the information of the big hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 2 area of the RWM is cleared (step A704). Then, it is determined whether or not the loaded jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step A705), and if it is determined to be a jackpot (step A705; Y), the jackpot of the second special figure variation display game (special figure 2) is determined. The signal relating to the start of the jackpot) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A708), and the round number upper limit table is set (step A709). In addition, the signal regarding the start of the special figure 2 big hit includes a signal for turning on the signal during operation of the condition device, a signal for turning on the signal for operating the continuous operation device for the accessory, and a signal for turning on the signal for hitting the special symbol 2. include.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A705 that the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A705; N), it is determined whether or not the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (step A706), and the jackpot is determined. (Step A706; Y), the test signal relating to the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the first special figure variation display game is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A707), and the round. The number upper limit table is set (step A709). In addition, the signal regarding the start of the special figure 1 big hit includes a signal for turning on the signal during operation of the condition device, a signal for turning on the signal for operating the continuous operation device for the accessory, and a signal for turning on the signal for hitting the special symbol 1. include.

Next, after setting the round number upper limit value table (step A709), the round number upper limit value (“16” or “4” in the case of the first embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired. Save in the RWM round number upper limit area (step A710). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A711).

Next, the decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decorative special figure command area of the RWM, prepared (step A712), and the effect command setting process (step A713) is performed. After that, a probability information command related to information in which the probability of a hit result in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game is set to the normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A714), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step A715) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A716), and the effect command setting process (step) is prepared. Perform A717).

Next, the signal corresponding to the large winning opening opening information and the state of the probability of winning in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A718). In the case of the first embodiment, in step A718, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the state of the big winning opening opening information and the probability. In addition, each on / off is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the big hit 2 signal is turned on when it is a big hit with a ball (the big winning opening opening information is other than the big winning opening opening information 1), and the big hit without a big hit (so-called sudden big hit, etc. When the information is the big winning opening opening information 1), it is turned on if it is a big hit in the time saving state, and it is turned off otherwise. Further, the big hit 3 signal is turned on when it is a big hit with a ball, and turned off when it is a big hit without a ball.

After that, the big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 4700 ms, 7700 ms, or 300 ms) corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability of winning in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game is set. (Step A719), the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A720). Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A721). As a result, information on the probability state and time saving state of the special figure when a special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state is determined based on the information stored later.

Then, the information of the large winning opening illegal winning number area of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is cleared (step A722), and the large winning opening corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is cleared. The flag outside the fraudulent monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A723). After that, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 (step A724) is performed, and the special figure display processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step A706, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A706; N), it is determined whether or not the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (step A725).

When it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is a small hit (step A725; Y), the high probability fluctuation number update process (step A726) and the effect mode information check process related to the effect mode setting (step A727). ) Is performed to determine whether or not the special figure is in high probability (the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state) (step A728).

If it is determined in step A728 that the special figure is not in high probability (step A728; N), the decorative special figure command is loaded from the decorative special figure command area, prepared (step A729), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step A730) is performed. Next, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step A731), an effect command setting process (step A732) is performed, the process proceeds to the process of step A733, and subsequent processes are performed.

If it is determined in step A728 that the special figure is in high probability (step A728; Y), the process proceeds to step A733, and subsequent processes are performed. As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is a high probability state, the large winning opening is opened by the occurrence of a small hit, but the small hit is generated. In order not to make the player aware of the above, the screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed.

Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A733). After that, the small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process 1 (step A734) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A725; N), the high probability variation number update process (step A735) and the effect mode information check process (step) related to the setting of the effect mode. A736) is performed to set the switching preparation remaining rotation speed corresponding to the effect mode number (step A737), and it is determined whether or not the effect remaining rotation speed and the switching preparation remaining rotation speed match (step A738). The remaining rotation speed for switching preparation is a different value in all the production modes among the plurality of production modes (rotation speed: for example, mode A is 4 times, mode B is 3 times, mode C is 8 times, etc.). It may be the same value (rotation speed) in any one of the plurality of production modes, or the same value (rotation speed) in all the production modes among the plurality of production modes. ) May be.

If it is determined in step A738 that the remaining rotation speed for effect and the remaining rotation speed for switching preparation do not match (step A738; N), the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A741) is performed and the special figure is displayed. End the middle process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A738 that the effect remaining rotation speed and the switching preparation remaining rotation speed match (step A738; Y), an effect mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A739), and the effect command is set. After performing the process (step A740), the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A741) is performed, and the process during display of the special figure is terminated. The effect mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing the pre-reading effect from being performed several rotations before the effect mode is switched. By transmitting the effect mode switching preparation command to the effect control device 300, the effect is produced across modes. It is possible to prevent contradictions and the like from occurring.

[High probability fluctuation frequency update process]
Next, the details of the high probability fluctuation number update process (steps A726, A735) in the process during display of the special figure will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the high probability fluctuation number update process of the first embodiment.

In the high probability fluctuation number update process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure is in high probability (step A751), and if it is not in the special figure high probability (step A751; N), the high probability fluctuation number update process is performed. To finish.

When the special figure high probability is in progress (step A751; Y), the high probability fluctuation number for managing the number of executions of the special figure change display game in the high probability state is updated by "-1" (step A752), and is high. It is determined whether or not the number of probability fluctuations is "0" (step A753).

If the number of high-probability fluctuations is not "0" (step A753; N), the high-probability fluctuation number update process is terminated. When the number of high-probability fluctuations is "0" (step A753; Y), the information in the high-probability notification flag area is cleared (step A754), and the signal relating to the high-probability end is saved in the external information output data area (step A754). Step A755). The signal relating to the high probability end is a signal for turning off the big hit 2 signal.

Then, the signal relating to the end of the high probability & time reduction (high probability & no time reduction, or high probability & time reduction) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A756). The signals related to the end of high probability & time reduction are a signal for turning off the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a signal for turning off the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and a signal for turning off the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal. A signal to turn off the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal, and a signal to turn off the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal are included. Further, even in the high probability of the special figure, since only the probability state changes in the normal figure, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal are always turned off.

Then, the number without time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step A757), and the normal figure low probability flag is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area (step A758).
Then, the special figure low probability & no time reduction flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A759), and the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A760). The signal related to the left-handed instruction is a signal for turning off the launch position designation signal 1. Then, in order to turn off the right-handed display LED, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A761), and the high probability fluctuation number update process is completed.

[Production mode information check processing]
Next, the details of the effect mode information check process (steps A727, A736) in the process of displaying the special figure will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect mode information check process of the first embodiment.

In the effect mode information check process, first, it is determined whether or not the next mode transition information is a non-update code (step A771), and when the next mode transition information is a non-update code (step A771; Y), Ends the effect mode information check process. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of times the special figure variation display game is executed. For example, when the effect mode that continues until the next big hit is selected in a high probability state, etc. Is.

If the next mode transition information is not a non-update code (step A771; N), the remaining rotation speed of the effect, which is the number of times the special figure variation display game can be executed until the effect mode is changed, is updated by "-1" (step A772). ), It is determined whether or not the remaining rotation speed of the effect is "0" (step A773). The process of step A772 is a counting means for counting the number of executions of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game.

If the remaining rotation speed of the effect is not "0" (step A773; N), the effect mode information check process is terminated. When the effect remaining rotation speed is "0" (step A773; Y), that is, when the effect mode is changed from the next special figure variation display game, the effect mode information address table is set (step A774). Acquire the address of the table corresponding to the next mode transition information (step A775).

The effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area (step A776), and the effect remaining rotation speed of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the effect remaining rotation speed area (step A777). The effect mode to be transferred (the effect mode of the transfer destination) can be known from the next mode transition information already saved before step A776. The next mode transition information regarding the next effect mode of the effect mode to be shifted is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A778). The process of step A776 is an effect mode execution control means that controls the execution of one of a plurality of effect modes (game modes) according to the counting result by the counting means (step A772). (Game mode execution control means).

A probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number acquired in step A776 is prepared (step A779), and it is determined whether or not the prepared probability information command matches the value in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A780). When the prepared probability information command matches the value in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery, that is, when the probability state does not change (step A780; Y), the effect mode is performed without transmitting the command to the effect control device 300. The information check process ends. If the prepared probability information command does not match the value in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A780; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A781), and the effect command is set. The process (step A782) is performed.

Then, the effect rotation speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation speed acquired in step A777 is prepared (step A783), and the effect command setting process (step A784) is performed. Then, a high probability fluctuation number command corresponding to the high probability fluctuation number is prepared (step A785), an effect command setting process (step A786) is performed, and it is determined whether or not the new effect mode is a left-handed mode. (Step A787).

If the new effect mode is not a left-handed mode (step A787; N), the effect mode information check process ends. When the new effect mode is a left-handed mode (step A787; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A788), an effect command setting process (step A789) is performed, and an effect mode information check is performed. End the process.

[Fanfare / Interval processing Transition setting processing 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 (step A724) in the above-mentioned special figure display processing will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fanfare / in-interval processing transition setting processing of the first embodiment.

In the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1, first, the processing number “3” related to the fanfare / interval processing is set as the processing number (step A791), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A792).

Next, the signal relating to the start of the big hit (special game state) is saved in the external information output data area (step A793). The signal relating to the start of the big hit includes, for example, a signal for turning on one big hit signal (output by big hit + small hit) and a signal for turning on four big hit signals (output by big hit).

Next, the signal relating to the end of high probability & time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step A794). The signals related to the end of high probability & time reduction are, for example, a signal for turning off the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a signal for turning off the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and a signal for turning off the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal. A signal to turn off the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal, and a signal to turn off the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal are included.

After that, the information of the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step A795), the number without time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step A796), and the normal game mode flag is used. Save the low probability flag in the area (step A797).

Then, the information in the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A798), and the information in the high probability notification flag area is cleared in order to turn off the game state display LED related to the display of the high probability state (step A799). Figure Save the special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the game mode flag area (step A800). Next, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery, which saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A801), and the special figure change that can be executed in the high probability state. Clear the information in the high-probability fluctuation frequency region that manages the number of display games (step A802). As a result, the high probability state and the time saving state are terminated, and the normal probability state and the normal state are reached.

After that, the number of the effect mode 1 is saved in the effect mode number area (step A803), and since the game control device 100 manages the effect mode, the information of the effect remaining rotation speed area is cleared (step A804). , Save the non-updated code in the next mode transition information area (step A805). Then, in order to save the signal related to the right-handed instruction (launch position designation signal 1 is turned on) in the test signal output data area (step A806) and turn on the display LED during right-handed hitting, right-handed hitting in the game state display number 2 area. The number in the state is saved (step A807), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 is terminated. As a result, the information on the effect mode is temporarily cleared when the special gaming state occurs.

[Small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing 1]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare process transition setting process 1 (step A734) in the above-mentioned special figure display process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process transition setting process 1 during small hit fanfare according to the first embodiment.

In the small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process 1, first, "7", which is the process number related to the small hit fanfare process, is set as the process number (step A811), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area. (Step A812). Then, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 300 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A813), and the signal relating to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step A814). The signal relating to the start of a small hit is, for example, a signal that turns on one large hit signal (outputs as a large hit + a small hit).

Then, the signal relating to the start of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step A815). The signal relating to the start of the small hit is, for example, a signal for turning on the special symbol 1 small hit signal.

Then, the information of the large winning opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step A816), and the flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraudulent monitoring period flag area (step A817). Then, the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A818). The signal relating to the right-handed instruction is, for example, a signal for turning on the launch position designation signal 1.

Then, in order to turn on the right-handed display LED, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A819), and the small hit fanfare processing transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing (step A11) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a flowchart of fanfare / interval processing according to the first embodiment.

In the fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special game state is updated by "+1" (step A901), a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special game state is prepared (step A902), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step A903) is performed.

After that, the large winning opening operation determination table is set (step A904), the opening switching determination value corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is acquired (step A905), and the number of rounds in the special gaming state is the acquired open switching determination. It is determined whether or not it is larger than the value (step A906).

When the number of rounds is larger than the opening switching determination value (step A906; Y), the opening time of the large winning opening for short opening (0.2s in the case of the first embodiment) is set to the special figure game processing timer area. Save (step A907), perform the process transition setting process (step A909) during opening of the large winning opening in order to open the large winning opening, and end the fanfare / interval processing.

Further, when the number of rounds is not larger than the opening switching determination value (step A906; N), the opening time of the large winning opening for long opening (29s in the case of the first embodiment) is set as the special figure game processing timer area. Save to (step A908), perform the process transition setting process (step A909) during the opening of the large winning opening in order to open the large winning opening, and end the fanfare / interval processing.

Here, in the first embodiment, as the big hit pattern, (1) 4R, big winning opening opening information 1 (all short opening), (2) 16R, big winning opening opening information 2 (all long opening), ( 3) 16R, large winning opening opening information 3 (1 to 4R is long opening, 5 to 16R is short opening), (4) 4R, large winning opening opening information 4 (all long opening), (5) 16R, big winning Mouth opening information 5 (all long open), (6) 16R, big winning opening opening information 6 (1-8R is long opening, 9-16R is short opening), (7) 16R, big winning opening opening information 7 (1) ~ 4R is set to long opening, and 5 to 16R is set to short opening).

Therefore, in the large winning opening operation determination table, the large winning opening opening information 1 data and the opening switching determination value "0" are displayed, and the large winning opening opening information 2 data and the opening switching determination value "16" are included in the large winning opening opening. The opening information 3 data and the opening switching judgment value "4" are the big winning opening opening information 4 data and the opening switching judgment value "4", and the big winning opening opening information 5 data and the opening switching judgment value "16". , The large winning opening opening information 6 data and the opening switching determination value "8" are stored in association with the large winning opening opening information 7 data and the opening switching determination value "4". Then, while the number of rounds is equal to or less than the open switching determination value, a long opening operation is performed, and when the number of rounds exceeds the opening switching determination value, a short opening operation is performed.

[Processing while the large winning opening is open Transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the process transition setting process (step A909) during the large winning opening opening process in the above-mentioned fanfare / interval process will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process transition setting process during the opening of the large winning opening of the first embodiment.

In the process transition setting process during the opening of the large winning opening, first, "4", which is the processing number related to the processing during the opening of the large winning opening, is set as the processing number (step A911), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A912). After that, the signal relating to the opening start of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A913). The signal relating to the start of opening the large winning opening is, for example, a signal for turning on the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1.

Next, the information in the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings in the large winning opening is cleared (step A914). Then, the on-data of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A915), and the processing transition setting process during the opening of the large winning opening is completed.

[Processing while opening the big prize opening]
Next, the details of the process during opening of the large winning opening (step A12) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the processing during opening of the large winning opening of the first embodiment.

In the process of opening the large winning opening, first, whether or not the current round is the final round is compared with the current number of rounds in the running special gaming state and the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit value area of RWM. Is determined (step A1001).

In the case of the final round (step A1001; Y), the remaining ball processing time for the final (for example, 1.9s) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1008), and the ending command is prepared (step). A1009), the process proceeds to the process of step A1010, and the subsequent processes are performed.

If it is not the final round (step A1001; N), the large winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1002), the opening switching determination value corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is acquired (step A1003), and the number of rounds is It is determined whether or not the open switching determination value is exceeded (A1004).

When the number of rounds exceeds the open switching determination value (step A1004; Y), the remaining ball processing time for short closing (for example, 1.4s) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1005). , The interval command is prepared (step A1007), the process proceeds to the process of step A1010, and the subsequent processes are performed.

When the number of rounds does not exceed the open switching determination value (step A1004; N), the remaining ball processing time for long closing (for example, 1.9 s) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1006). , The interval command is prepared (step A1007), the process proceeds to the process of step A1010, and the subsequent processes are performed.

After that, the effect command setting process (step A1010) is performed, the large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting process (step A1011) is performed, and the large winning opening opening processing is completed.
[Large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the large winning opening residual ball processing transition setting processing (step A1011) in the above-mentioned large winning opening opening processing will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the large winning opening residual ball processing transition setting processing of the first embodiment.

In the large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing, first, "5", which is the processing number related to the large winning opening remaining ball processing, is set as the processing number (step A1021), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A1022). Then, the off-data of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1023), and the large winning opening residual ball processing transition setting process is completed.

[Treatment of remaining balls in the large winning opening]
Next, the details of the large winning opening residual ball processing (step A13) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the large winning opening residual ball processing of the first embodiment.

In the large winning opening remaining ball processing, first, whether or not the current round is the final round by comparing the current number of rounds in the running special game state with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit value area of the RWM. Is determined (step A1101).

In the case of the final round (step A1101; Y), the flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag evacuation area (step A1111), the loaded flag, the big winning opening opening information, and the ending time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step A1111). For example, 1.9s) is set (step A1112). Then, the ending time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1113), the jackpot end processing transition setting processing (step A1114) is performed, and the jackpot remaining ball processing is completed.

If it is not the final round (step A1101; N), the large winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1102), and the opening switching determination value corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is acquired (step A1103). Then, a normal interval time (for example, 0.1 s) is set (step A1104), it is determined whether or not the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (step A1105), and the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value. In the case (step A1105; Y), the process proceeds to the process of step A1109, and the subsequent processes are performed.

When the number of rounds is not larger than the opening switching value (step A1105; N), it is determined whether or not the large winning opening opening information is the value of the rank down effect system (step A1106), and the large winning opening opening information is displayed. If the value is not the value of the rank-down effect system (step A1106; N), the process proceeds to the process of step A1109, and the subsequent processes are performed.

When the large winning opening opening information is the value of the rank-down effect system (step A1106; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (for example, 2R, 4R, 8R) (step A1106; Y). In step A1107), if the number of rounds is not the value of the special effect round (step A1107; N), the process proceeds to step A1109, and subsequent processes are performed.

When the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (step A1107; Y), an interval time (for example, 3.6 s) for the rank-down effect is set (step A1108), and the process proceeds to step A1109. , Perform the subsequent processing.

Then, the interval time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1109), the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2 (step A1110) is performed, and the large winning opening remaining ball processing is completed.

[Fanfare / Interval processing Transition setting processing 2]
Next, the details of the fanfare / inter-interval processing transition setting processing 2 (step A1110) in the above-mentioned large winning opening residual ball processing will be described with reference to FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2 of the first embodiment.

In the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2, first, the processing number “3” related to the fanfare / interval processing is set as the processing number (step A1121), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A1122). Then, the signal relating to the end of opening of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1123). The signal relating to the end of opening the large winning opening is, for example, a signal for turning off the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1.

Then, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2 is terminated.
[Big hit end processing Transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot end processing transition setting processing (step A1114) in the above-mentioned jackpot remaining ball processing will be described with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the jackpot end processing transition setting processing of the first embodiment.

In the jackpot end processing transition setting process, first, the process number “6” related to the jackpot end process is set as the process number (step A1131), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1132).

Then, the signal relating to the end of opening of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1133). The signal relating to the end of opening the large winning opening is, for example, a signal for turning off the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1.

Next, the information in the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings in the large winning opening is cleared (step A1134), and the information in the round number area for storing the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step A1135). .. Then, the information of the round number upper limit value area for storing the upper limit value of the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step A1136), and the information of the round number upper limit value information area for storing the flag for determining the upper limit value of the round number is stored. Clear (step A1137). Then, the information in the large winning opening opening information area for storing the flag for determining the opening information of the large winning opening is cleared (step A1138), and the big hit end transition setting process is terminated.

[Big hit end processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot end processing (step A14) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the jackpot end processing of the first embodiment.

In this jackpot end process, first, it is determined whether or not the time reduction determination data is the time reduction operation data (step A1201). If it is not the time saving operation data (step A1201; N), the big hit end setting process 1 (step A1202) is performed, and if it is the time saving operation data (step A1201; Y), the big hit end setting process 2 (step A1203) is performed. ..

Then, the effect mode information address table is set (step A1204), and the address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information set at the start of fluctuation (at the time of setting the stop symbol) is acquired (step A1205).

Next, as a process of saving the information necessary for managing the effect mode in the game control device 100, first, the effect mode number of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area. (Step A1206). Further, the remaining effect rotation speed of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired, saved in the effect remaining rotation speed area (step A1207), and the next mode of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state. The transition information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A1208).

After that, the probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A1209), the command is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1210), and the effect command setting process (step A1211) is performed.

As the probability information command, there are a plurality of commands including information on the production mode in either "high probability / with time reduction" or "high probability / without time reduction". In the case of the first embodiment, since the probability change state (so-called ST state) is always reached when the big hit is completed, the probability information commands are "high probability / time saving / effect mode A" and "high probability / time reduction / effect". There are "Mode B", "High probability / No time reduction / Direction mode C", and "High probability / No time reduction / Production mode A", which are not used in this process, but in addition, "Low probability / No time reduction / Production mode A" , "Low probability, no time reduction, production mode B", "Low probability, no time reduction, production mode C".

Next, the effect rotation speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation speed is prepared (step A1212), and the effect command setting process (step A1213) is performed.
Next, a high probability fluctuation number command corresponding to the high probability fluctuation number is prepared (step A1214), an effect command setting process (step A1215) is performed, and it is determined whether or not a time saving state occurs after the big hit ends (step). A1216).

When the time saving state occurs after the big hit ends (step A1216; Y), the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step A1219) is performed, and the big hit end process ends.
If the time saving state does not occur after the big hit ends (step A1216; N), the left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A1217), the effect command setting process (step A1218) is performed, and then the special figure normal process shifts. The setting process 2 (step A1219) is performed to end the jackpot end process.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
Next, the details of the big hit end setting process 1 (step A1202) in the above-mentioned big hit end process will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the jackpot end setting process 1 of the first embodiment.

In the jackpot end setting process 1, first, a signal relating to no time saving state is saved in the external information output data area (step A1221). The signal regarding no time saving state is, for example, a signal for turning off the jackpot 2 signal.

Next, the signal relating to the start of the high probability state and no time saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1222). The signals related to the start of the high-probability state and the time-saving state are, for example, a signal for turning on the special symbol 1 high-probability state signal, a signal for turning on the special symbol 2 high-probability state signal, and a special symbol 1 fluctuation time. It includes a signal for turning off the shortened state signal, a signal for turning off the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal, and a signal for turning off the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal.

Next, the number without the time saving state is saved in the game state display number area (step A1223), the normal figure low probability flag is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area (step A1224), and the special figure game mode flag area is saved. Save the special figure high probability & no time reduction flag (step A1225). After that, the initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high probability fluctuation frequency region (step A1226), and the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data region (step A1227). The signal related to the left-handed instruction is, for example, a signal for turning off the launch position designation signal 1.

Next, in order to turn off the right-handed display LED, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A1228), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is terminated.
[Big hit end setting process 2]
Next, the details of the big hit end setting process 2 (step A1203) in the above-mentioned big hit end process will be described with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the jackpot end setting process 2 of the first embodiment.

In the jackpot end setting process 2, first, the signal relating to the start of the time saving state is saved in the external information output data area (step A1231). The signal relating to the start of the time saving state is, for example, a signal for turning on the jackpot 2 signal. Since the signal regarding the start of the time saving state is output from the big hit, it is saved in the external information output data area in a continuous form.

Next, the signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1232). The signals related to the start of the high-probability state and the time-saving state are, for example, a signal for turning on the special symbol 1 high-probability state signal, a signal for turning on the special symbol 2 high-probability state signal, and a special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal. Includes a signal to turn on, a signal to turn on the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal, and a signal to turn on the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal.

Next, the number with the time saving state is saved in the game state display number area (step A1233), the normal figure high probability flag is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area (step A1234), and the special figure game mode flag area is saved. Save the special figure high probability & time saving flag (step A1235). After that, the initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high probability fluctuation frequency region (step A1236), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is terminated. In the case of the first embodiment, the right-handed mode is set during the time saving state, but since the right-handed mode is set from the big hit, the big hit end setting process 2 does not make the right-handed setting.

[Special figure normal processing transition setting processing 2]
Next, the details of the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step A1219) in the above-mentioned jackpot end process will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 of the first embodiment.

In the special figure normal process transition setting process 2, first, "0", which is the process number related to the special figure normal process, is set as the process number (step A1241), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step). A1242).

After that, the signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step A1243). The signal relating to the end of the jackpot includes, for example, a signal for turning off the jackpot 1 signal, a signal for turning off the jackpot 3 signal, and a signal for turning off the jackpot 4 signal.

Next, the signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1244). The signals related to the end of the jackpot are a signal for turning off the signal during operation of the condition device, a signal for turning off the signal for operating the continuous operation device for the accessory, a signal for turning off the signal per special symbol 1, and a signal per special symbol 2. Includes a signal that turns the signal off.

Subsequently, the information in the time reduction determination flag area is cleared (step A1245), the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot is cleared (step A1246), and the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared. (Step A1247). Then, the information in the special figure game mode flag evacuation area is cleared (step A1248), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1249), and the special figure normal processing transition setting process 2 is performed. To finish.

[Small hit fanfare processing]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare middle process (step A15) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the small hit fanfare processing during the first embodiment.

In the small hit fanfare middle process, the small hit middle process transition setting process (step A1301) is performed, and the small hit fanfare middle process is terminated.
[Small hit medium processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the small hit medium processing transition setting processing (step A1301) in the small hit medium processing described above will be described with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the small hit medium processing transition setting processing of the first embodiment.

In the small hit middle processing transition setting processing, first, "8", which is the processing number related to the small hit middle processing, is set as the processing number (step A1311), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1312). ).

Then, the small hit opening time (for example, 0.2 s) is set in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1313), and the signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1314). The signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is, for example, a signal for turning on the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1.

Then, the on-data of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1315), and the information in the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings in the large winning opening is stored. Clear (step A1316).

Then, the small hit operation initial value (for example, “0”) is saved in the small hit medium control pointer area (step A1317), and the small hit medium processing transition setting process is terminated.
[Small hit processing]
Next, the details of the small hit medium processing (step A16) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 64. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the small hit medium processing of the first embodiment.

In the small hit medium processing, first, the small hit medium control pointer is loaded from the small hit medium control pointer area (step A1401), and the value of the loaded small hit medium control pointer is the small hit operation end value (for example, “6”). It is determined whether or not the above is the case (step A1402).

When the value of the loaded small hit medium control pointer is not equal to or greater than the small hit operation end value (step A1402; N), the value of the small hit medium control pointer in the small hit medium control pointer area is updated by "+1" (step A1403). ), The small hit operation transition setting process (step A1404) is performed, and the small hit middle process is terminated. When the value of the loaded small hit middle control pointer is equal to or greater than the small hit operation end value (step A1402; Y), the flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1405), and the loaded flag is special. Figure It is determined whether or not the probability is high (step A1406). In the determination in step A1406, the probability state is the determination target, and the time saving state is not the determination target.

When the loaded flag is in the high probability of the special figure (step A1406; Y), the process proceeds to the process of step A1409, and the subsequent processes are performed. When the loaded flag is not in the special high probability (step A1406; N), the command of the small hit end screen is prepared (step A1407), and the effect command setting process (step A1408) is performed. Then, the small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing (step 1409) is performed, and the small hit middle processing is completed.

[Small hit operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the small hit operation transition setting process (step A1404) in the above small hit medium process will be described with reference to FIG. 65. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the small hit operation transition setting process of the first embodiment.

In the small hit operation transition setting process, first, the value of the small hit medium control pointer loaded in step A1401 is determined (step A1411). When the value of the small hit medium control pointer loaded in step A1401 is "0", "2", "4" (step A1411; pointer = 0, 2, 4), the value of the small hit medium control pointer is set. The corresponding wait time (1500 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1412). Then, the off-data of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1413), and the small hit operation transition setting process is completed.

When the value of the small hit medium control pointer loaded in step A1401 is "1", "3", "5" (step A1411; pointer = 1, 3, 5), the value of the small hit medium control pointer is set. The opening time (200 ms) of the corresponding large winning opening is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1414). Then, the on-data of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1415), and the small hit operation transition setting process is completed.

Here, the small hit operation will be described with reference to FIG. 66. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a timing chart of the small hit operation of the first embodiment. The numbers in the squares in the figure indicate the values of the control pointers.

The small hit operation consists of a small hit fanfare time (300 ms), a subsequent large winning opening opening time (200 ms), a subsequent wait time (1500 ms), a subsequent large winning opening opening time (200 ms), and a subsequent wait. The time (1500 ms), the subsequent large winning opening opening time (200 ms), the subsequent wait time (1500 ms), the subsequent large winning opening opening time (200 ms), and the subsequent remaining ball processing time (1900 ms). It is a series of operations of a total of 7600 ms consisting of a small hit ending time (100 ms).

In the case of the small hit operation, the value of the control pointer becomes "0" after the first large winning opening opening time elapses, and the value of the control pointer goes through the respective processes corresponding to "0" to "5". The value of the control pointer is "6". In this way, in the case of the small hit operation, the small hit remaining ball processing is performed after the opening operation of the special variable winning device 38 four times. In the small hit operation, the small hit ending time is set after the remaining ball processing time, so that the apparent ending time is 2000 ms, which is obtained by adding the remaining ball processing time of 1900 ms to the controlled small hit ending time of 100 ms.

During the small hit fanfare time, the wait time, the remaining ball processing time, and the small hit ending time, the special variable winning device 38 is closed by the off control of the large winning opening solenoid 38b. Further, during the large winning opening opening time, the special variable winning device 38 is opened by turning on the large winning opening solenoid 38b.

[Small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the small hit remaining ball processing transition setting process (step A1409) in the above small hit medium process will be described with reference to FIG. 67. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing of the first embodiment.

In the small hit remaining ball processing transition setting process, first, "9", which is the processing number related to the small hit remaining ball processing, is set as the processing number (step A1421), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1421). Step A1422).

Then, the small hit remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 s) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1423), and the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is turned off in the large winning opening solenoid output data area. The data is saved (step A1424), and the small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing is completed.

[Small hit residual ball treatment]
Next, the details of the small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 68. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the small hit remaining ball processing of the first embodiment.

In the small hit remaining ball processing, the small hit end processing transition setting process (step A1501) is performed, and the small hit remaining ball processing is completed.
[Small hit end processing Transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the small hit end processing transition setting process (step A1501) in the small hit remaining ball processing described above will be described with reference to FIG. 69. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the small hit end processing transition setting processing of the first embodiment.

In the small hit end processing transition setting processing, first, "10", which is the processing number related to the small hit end processing, is set as the processing number (step A1511), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1512). ).

Then, the small hit ending time (for example, 0.1 s) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1513), and the signal relating to the end of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1514). The signal relating to the end of the small hit operation is, for example, a signal for turning off the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1.

Then, the information in the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings in the large winning opening is cleared (step A1515), the information in the small hit medium control pointer area is cleared to zero (step A1516), and the small hit end transition setting process is performed. To finish.

[Small hit end processing]
Next, the details of the small hit end process (step A18) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the small hit end process of the first embodiment.

In the small hit end process, first, a flag related to the probability state is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1601), and it is determined whether or not the flag loaded in step A1601 is in the special figure high probability (step). A1602). When the flag loaded in step A1601 is in the high probability of the special figure (step A1602; Y), the process proceeds to the process of step A1619, and the subsequent processes are performed.

When the flag loaded in step A1601 is not in the special figure high probability (step A1602; N), the effect mode information address table is set (step A1603), and the effect set at the start of fluctuation (when the stop symbol is set) is set. Acquire the address of the table corresponding to the mode transition information (step A1604).

Then, the effect mode number is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area (step A1605), the effect remaining rotation speed is acquired and saved in the effect remaining rotation speed area (step A1606), and the next mode transition information is acquired. Save in the next mode transition information area (step A1607).

Then, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number acquired in step A1606 is prepared (step A1608), and it is determined whether or not the prepared probability information command matches the value in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1609). ..

When the prepared probability information command matches the value in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1609; Y), the process proceeds to step A1619, and subsequent processes are performed. If the prepared probability information command does not match the value in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1609; N), the probability information command is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1610), and the effect command setting process (step A1610) is performed. Perform A1611).

Then, the effect rotation speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation speed acquired in step A1606 is prepared (step A1612), and the effect command setting process (step A1613) is performed. Further, a high probability fluctuation number command corresponding to the high probability fluctuation number is prepared (step A1614), an effect command setting process (step A1615) is performed, and it is determined whether or not the new effect mode is a left-handed mode. (Step A1616).

If the new effect mode is not a left-handed mode (step A1616; N), the process proceeds to step A1619. When the new effect mode is the left-handed mode (step A1616; Y), the left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A1617), and the effect command setting process (step A1618) is performed.

Then, a flag related to the time saving state is loaded from the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A1619), and it is determined whether or not the flag loaded in step A1619 is in the special figure time saving (step A1620). When the flag loaded in step A1619 is in the special figure time reduction (step A1620; Y), the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step A1623) is performed, and the small hit end process is terminated.

When the flag loaded in step A1619 is not in the special time reduction (step A1620; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1621). The signal related to the left-handed instruction is, for example, a signal for turning off the launch position designation signal 1.

Then, in order to turn off the right-handed display LED, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A1622), and the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step A1623) is performed. The hit end process is terminated.

[Special figure normal processing transition setting processing 3]
Next, the details of the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step A1623) in the above-mentioned small hit end process will be described with reference to FIG. 71. FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 of the first embodiment.

In the special figure normal process transition setting process 3, first, "0", which is the process number related to the special figure normal process, is set as the process number (step A1631), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step). A1632).

Then, the signal relating to the end of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step A1633), and the signal relating to the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1634). The signal relating to the end of the small hit is, for example, a signal for turning off one big hit signal. Further, the signal relating to the end of the small hit is, for example, a signal for turning off the special symbol 1 small hit signal.

Then, the information in the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A1635), and the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared (step A1636). Then, the information in the special figure game mode flag evacuation area is cleared (step A1637), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1638), and the special figure normal processing transition setting process 3 is performed. finish.

[Direction command setting process]
Next, the details of the effect command setting process in the above-mentioned special figure game process subroutine will be described with reference to FIG. 72. FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect command setting process of the first embodiment.

In the effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A1701), and it is determined whether or not the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A1702). If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A1702; Y), the process returns to step A1701. When the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A1702; N), the command data (MODE) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step A1703).

As a result, the effect command (MODE) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 by serial communication using the serial communication function of the CPU 111A in the game control device 100. In the case of this flowchart, the command is transmitted in a 2-byte configuration such as "MODE" and "ACTION" like the effect command, but a larger byte configuration may be used. In those cases, a flowchart corresponding to a multi-byte configuration may be used.

Then, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A1704), and it is determined whether or not the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A1705).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A1705; Y), the process returns to step A1704. If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A1705; N), the command data (ACTION) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step A1706), and the effect command setting process is terminated.

By writing the command data (ACTION) to the effect serial transmission buffer, the effect command (ACTION) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 by serial communication using the serial communication function of the CPU 111A in the game control device 100. Will be done.

In this way, the effect command (MODE) and the effect command (ACTION) are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 by serial communication. The effect control device 300 receives each of these commands and controls the effect on the screen of the display device 41 or the like. Since the serial communication is performed by using the serial communication function of the CPU 111A in the game control device 100, there is an advantage that the configuration is simple.

[Design fluctuation control process]
Next, the details of the symbol variation control process (step A22) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. 73. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the symbol variation control process of the first embodiment.

In the symbol variation control process, first, the target variation control flag is set and it is checked whether or not the symbol is changing (step A1801), and as a result of the check, it is determined whether or not it is changing (step A1802). ..

When it is changing (step A1802; Y), the symbol display table (for fluctuation) corresponding to the target symbol is acquired (step A1803). Then, the blinking control timer for measuring the fluctuation time of the target symbol is updated by "-1" (step A1804), and it is determined whether or not the blinking control timer is "0" (step A1805).

When the blinking control timer is "0" (step A1805; Y), the blinking control timer initial value corresponding to the target symbol and state is acquired (step A1806), and the blinking control timer initial value is set to the target symbol. Save to the blinking control timer area (step A1807). The initial value of the blinking control timer will be described later with reference to FIG. 74.

Then, the variable symbol number of the target symbol is updated by "+1" (step A1808), and the process proceeds to step A1809. If the blinking control timer is not "0" (step A1805; N), the process proceeds to step A1809.

Then, the display data corresponding to the value in the variation symbol number area of the target symbol is acquired (step A1809), the acquired display data is saved in the segment area of the target symbol (step A1812), and the symbol variation control process is completed. do.

In step A1802, when it is not changing (step A1802; N), a symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the target symbol is acquired (step A1810). Then, the display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area of the target symbol is acquired (step A1811), the acquired display data is saved in the segment area of the target symbol (step A1812), and the symbol variation control process is terminated. do.

Information on the lower address of the fluctuation control area, the address of the display table 2 (for stopping), and the address of the display table 1 (for fluctuation) is defined on the fluctuation control table prepared in the special figure game processing. There is.

[Blinking control timer initial value table]
Next, the details of the blinking control timer initial value (step A1806) acquired in the above-mentioned symbol variation control process will be described with reference to FIG. 74, FIG. 74 is an example of the blinking control timer initial value table of the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows.

The blinking control timer initial value is set for each target symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, normal figure) and its state (state 1, state 2).
The initial value of the blinking control timer is 80 ms when the special figure 1 is the state 1, and 60 ms when the special figure 1 is the state 2. The initial value of the blinking control timer is 80 ms when the special figure 2 is in the state 1, and 60 ms when the special figure 2 is in the state 2. The initial value of the blinking control timer is 160 ms when the normal figure is in the state 1, and 120 ms when the normal figure is in the state 2.

The value of the blinking control timer is not limited to the initial value of the blinking control timer, although the value of the state 2 is smaller than the value of the state 1. The blinking control timer initial value may have a larger value in state 2 than the value in state 1. For example, the initial value of the blinking control timer is 60 ms when the special figure 1 is in the state 1, 80 ms when the special figure 1 is in the state 2, and 60 ms when the special figure 2 is in the state 1. , It may be 80 ms when the special figure 2 is the state 2, 120 ms when the normal figure is the state 1, and 160 ms when the normal figure is the state 2.

Note that the state 2 is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the state 1, and a specific gaming state can be set for each gaming machine. For example, in the gaming machine of the first embodiment, when the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is not in the probability fluctuation state, it corresponds to the state 1, and when the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is in the probability fluctuation state, it is in the state 2. Equivalent to.

As a result, in the batch display device 50, in addition to the status display unit 57, the gaming machine 10 has the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, the special diagram 2 symbol display unit 54, and the normal symbol display unit 55. The status can be displayed.

Further, in the batch display device 50, the gaming machine 10 is replaced with the state display unit 57 by the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, the special diagram 2 symbol display unit 54, and the normal symbol display unit 55. Can also be displayed. For example, the gaming machine 10 displays the first state in the state display unit 57 in the first period, and then displays the second state in the state display unit 57 in the second period thereafter, and displays the special figure 1 symbol. The first state display can be performed by the unit 53, the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and the normal symbol display unit 55. More specifically, the gaming machine 10 notifies the gaming state transition (trigger notification) in the state display unit 57 at the time of the gaming state transition from the normal state to the probability fluctuation state. Further, when the gaming state such as a normal state or a probability fluctuation state is a steady state, the gaming machine 10 is in a gaming state in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, the special diagram 2 symbol display unit 54, and the normal symbol display unit 55. Is a steady state notification (steady notification). It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 does not necessarily have to notify the gaming state by the special symbol 1 symbol display unit 53, the special diagram 2 symbol display unit 54, and the normal symbol display unit 55. The gaming machine 10 may notify the gaming state by one or two of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and the normal symbol display unit 55. Further, the gaming machine 10 may notify a more complicated gaming state by combining the display modes of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, the special diagram 2 symbol display unit 54, and the normal symbol display unit 55. .. Further, the gaming machine 10 notifies a more complicated gaming state by combining the display modes of the state display unit 57, the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and the normal symbol display unit 55. It may be. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can notify the gaming progress that is easy for the player to understand.

[Distribution processing]
Next, the details of the distribution process (steps A476, A479, A485) in the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 75. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the distribution process of the first embodiment.

In the distribution process, the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game is selected from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1, or the latter half variation selection table (second half variation pattern group) is selected based on the variation pattern random number 2. Processing for selecting the second half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game, or selecting the first half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game from the first half fluctuation selection table (first half fluctuation pattern group) based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3. Is.

In the distribution process, first, the data at the beginning of the prepared second half variation group table (selection table), second half variation selection table (selection table), and first half variation selection table (selection table) is a code without distribution (that is, "0"). ) (Step A1901), and as a result of the check, it is determined whether or not the first data is a code without distribution (step A1902). Here, the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table store a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one second half fluctuation pattern group, the second half fluctuation pattern, and the first half fluctuation pattern. In the case of a selection table that does not need to be distributed, the distribution value "0", that is, the code without distribution is specified at the beginning.

Then, when the data at the head of the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, or the first half fluctuation selection table is a code without distribution (step A1902; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A1902; Y). Step A1907), the distribution process is completed. On the other hand, when the data at the beginning of the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, or the first half fluctuation selection table is not a code without distribution (step A1902; N), the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, or the first half fluctuation selection table is displayed. The first distribution value specified is acquired (step A1903).

Subsequently, the distribution value acquired in step A1903 is obtained from the random number values (values of fluctuation pattern random number 1, fluctuation pattern random number 2, and fluctuation pattern random number 3) loaded in steps A473, A478, and A484 of the fluctuation pattern setting process. After subtracting and calculating a new random number value (step A1904), it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A1905). If the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step A1905; N), the process returns to the process of step A1903 after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A1906).

That is, after acquiring the distribution values specified next in the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table in step A1903, the random number value determined in step A1905 is used as a new random number value. The distribution value is subtracted, and a new random number value is calculated (step A1904). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A1905). The above processing is executed in step A1905 until it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A1905; Y). As a result, at least one of the second half fluctuation selection table, the second half fluctuation pattern, and the first half fluctuation pattern specified in the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table can be selected from the latter half fluctuation selection table or the second half. Select a variable number or a variable number in the first half. Then, if it is determined in step A1905 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A1905; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A1907), and the distribution process is completed. do.

[2-byte distribution processing]
Next, the details of the 2-byte distribution process (step A475) in the above-mentioned variation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 76. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the 2-byte distribution process of the first embodiment.

The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1. As shown in FIG. 76, in the 2-byte distribution process, first, is the first data of the latter half variation group table (selection table) prepared in the variation pattern setting process a code without distribution (that is, "0")? (Step A2001), and as a result of the check, it is determined whether or not the first data is a code without distribution (step A2002). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern group, but the latter half that defines only the latter half fluctuation pattern group in which the latter half fluctuation pattern is “no reach”. In the variable group table (for example, some variable group tables when the result is out of order), there is no need for distribution, so the distribution value "0", that is, the code without distribution is specified at the beginning. ..

Then, when the data at the head of the latter half variable group table is a code without distribution (step A2002; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A2007), and the 2-byte distribution process is completed. do. On the other hand, when the data at the head of the latter half variable group table is not a code without distribution (step A2002; N), one distribution value first specified in the latter half variable group table is acquired (step A2003).

Subsequently, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A2003 from the random number value (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) loaded in step A473 of the fluctuation pattern setting process (step A2004). , It is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2005). If the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step A2005; N), the process returns to the process of step A2003 after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A2006). That is, in step A2003, after acquiring the distribution value specified next in the variable group selection table, the distribution value is subtracted by using the random number value determined in step A2005 as a new random number value, and further new randomness. Calculate the numerical value (step A2004). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2005).

The above processing is executed in step A2005 until it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2005; Y). As a result, any one of the latter half variable selection tables is selected from at least one latter half variable selection table defined in the latter half variable group table. Then, in step A2005, when it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2005; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A2007), and the 2-byte distribution process is performed. To finish.

[Public map game processing]
Next, the details of the normal figure game processing (step S130) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the normal diagram game processing of the first embodiment. In the normal map game processing, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the entire processing related to the normal map fluctuation display game is controlled, and the normal map display is set.

In this normal map game processing, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a is performed, and then a general electric prize switch monitoring process (step B2) for monitoring the input from the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. To do. Next, if the normal figure game processing timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step B3). The minimum value of the normal figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal figure game processing timer becomes "0" (step B4).

When the value of the normal figure game processing timer is "0" (step B4; Y), that is, when it is determined that the time has been up or has already been up, in order to branch to the processing corresponding to the normal figure game processing number. Perform the process of setting the reference general map game sequence branch table in the register (step B5), and perform the process of acquiring the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the normal figure game process number using the table (step B6). .. Then, a subroutine call (step B7) is performed using the game processing number.

In step B7, when the game processing number is "0", the fluctuation start of the normal map fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting and the effect setting of the normal map fluctuation display game are set, and the normal map fluctuation processing is performed. Perform the normal processing (step B8) to set the necessary information for the purpose. Further, in step B7, when the game processing number is "1", the normal map changing process (step B9) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal map display process is performed.

Further, in step B7, when the game processing number is "2", if the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is a hit, the normal electric opening time can be set according to whether or not the time is shortened, or the normal. Performs the normal figure display processing (step B10) for setting the information necessary for performing the drawing processing. Further, in step B7, when the game processing number is "3", the processing during the normal drawing (step) for continuing the processing during the normal drawing or setting the information necessary for performing the processing for the remaining ball of the normal electric power. Perform B11).

Further, in step B7, when the game processing number is "4", the normal electric remaining ball processing (step B12) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal end processing is performed. Further, in step B7, when the game processing number is "5", the normal drawing end processing (step B13) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal drawing normal processing (step B8) is performed.

After that, a normal symbol fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display is prepared (step B14), and a symbol fluctuation control process related to the control of the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display (step B15). And end the normal map game processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in step B4 that the value of the normal figure game processing timer is not 0 (step B4; N), that is, the time is not up, the process is shifted to step B14 and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) in the above-mentioned normal map game process will be described. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the gate switch monitoring process of the first embodiment. In this gate switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input in the gate switch 34a (step B101). Then, when there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; Y), it is determined whether or not the game is in a right-handed gaming state (step B102). Here, the right-handed game state is during a big hit, during a small hit, or during a special time reduction (during normal power support). In the case of a right-handed gaming state (step B102; Y), the process shifts to step B105. When it is not in the game state of right-handed (step B102; N), the left-handed instruction command is prepared (step B103), the effect command setting process (step B104) is performed, the number of reserved normal figures is acquired, and the number of reserved normal figures is obtained. Is less than the upper limit value (for example, “4”) or not (step B105).

When the number of reserved normal figures is less than the upper limit (step B105; Y), the number of reserved normal figures is updated by "+1" (step B106), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the updated number of reserved normal figures is set. Calculate (step B107). Then, the hit random number is extracted and saved in the hit random number storage area of the RWM (step B108), the hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the hit symbol random number storage area (step B109), and the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

Further, when it is determined in step B101 that there is no input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; N), or when it is determined in step B105 that the number of reserved figures is not less than the upper limit value (step B105; N). , The gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Public prize switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the Fuden winning switch monitoring process (step B2) in the above-mentioned Fuzu game process will be described. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the universal power winning switch monitoring process of the first embodiment. In this general-purpose winning switch monitoring process, first, whether or not the normal-figure winning switch is being hit, that is, whether or not the normal-figure fluctuation display game is in the winning state and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is executing the opening operation a predetermined number of times. Is determined (step B111). Then, when it is hitting the normal drawing (step B111; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input in the start port 2 switch 37a (step B112), and there is an input in the start port 2 switch 37a (step B112; Y). If it is determined, the count number of the general electric counter is updated by "+1" (step B113).

Next, it is determined whether or not the count number of the updated normal electric counter has reached the upper limit value (for example, "6") (step B114), and the count number has reached the upper limit value (step B114; Y). When it is determined, based on the fact that the count number of the normal power counter has reached the upper limit, as a process for closing the normal power, the value of the end of operation (for example, "4") is saved by hitting the control pointer area during the normal drawing (for example, "4"). Step B115), the normal figure game processing timer is cleared to zero (step B116), and the normal electric winning switch monitoring process is completed. That is, if there is a winning prize of the upper limit or more during the hitting state of the normal figure, the value of the hitting end is saved in the processing control pointer area during the normal drawing at that time, and the hitting state of the normal figure is in the middle. Try to finish.

Further, when it is determined in step B111 that the normal drawing is not hit (step B111; N), when it is determined in step B112 that there is no input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step B112; N) or step B114. When it is determined that the count number has not reached the upper limit value (step B114; N), this general electric winning switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Usually processing]
Next, the details of the normal drawing normal processing (step B8) in the above-mentioned normal drawing game processing will be described. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a normal process of the first embodiment. In this normal drawing normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal figure holding number is "0" (step B121), and when the normal figure holding number is "0" (step B121; Y), it is normal. Figure Normal process Transition setting process 1 (step B141) is performed, and the normal figure normal process is terminated. If the number of reserved figures is not "0" (step B121; N), a random number is loaded from the winning random number storage area (for holding number 1) and the winning symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) (step B122). , The hit random number storage area (for 1 hold number) and the hit symbol random number storage area (for 1 hold number) are cleared to zero (step B123).

Next, it is determined whether the probability of a hit result in the normal map fluctuation display game is in the high probability of the normal map, that is, the time is shortened (step B124). When the normal probability is not high (step B124; N), the low probability lower limit judgment value is set (step B125), and when the normal figure high probability is in (step B124; Y), the high probability lower limit judgment value is set. Set (step B126). The low probability upper limit determination value and the high probability upper limit determination value are common values (for example, "251"). Further, the low probability lower limit judgment value and the high probability lower limit judgment value are different values (for example, the low probability lower limit judgment value is "251" and the high probability lower limit judgment value is "1"), and the low probability lower limit judgment value and the low probability lower limit judgment value. In comparison, the high probability lower limit judgment value is a small value. As a result, the hit probability is higher in the high probability than in the low probability, for example, 0/251 in the low probability and 250/251 in the high probability.

Next, it is determined whether or not the winning random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B127), and when the winning random number is not equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B127; N), whether or not the winning random number is less than the lower limit determination value. (Step B128). In step B127, when the winning random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B127; Y), or in steps B127 and B128, the winning random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step B127; N, step B128; Y), that is, In the case of a miss, the miss information is saved in the hit flag area (step B129), the miss stop symbol number is set (step B130), and the miss symbol information is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (step B131). Further, in steps B127 and B128, when the hit random number is less than the upper limit determination value and equal to or more than the lower limit determination value, that is, when it is a hit (step B127; N, step B128; N), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B127; N, step B128; N). Step B132), the hit stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded hit symbol random number is set (step B133), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (step B134). In the first embodiment, there are three types of hit symbols.

Next, the stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol area (step B135), and the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B136). After that, the random number storage area per normal figure is shifted (step B137), the empty area after the shift is cleared to zero (step B138), and the number of reserved normal figures is updated by "-1" (step B139). That is, the order of the number of reserved numbers "2" to "4" that has been held after the number of reserved numbers "1" is executed as the game for displaying the fluctuation of the figure related to the oldest number of reserved numbers 1 is executed. Is carried out one by one. By this processing, the value for the number of holdings of the normal figure 2 to the number of holdings of the normal figure 4 in the random number storage area per normal figure is moved from the number of holdings of the normal figure 1 in the random number storage area for the normal figure to the number of holdings of the normal figure 3. Will be done. Then, the value for the number of holdings of the normal figure 4 in the random number storage area per the normal figure is cleared, and the number of holdings of the normal figure is decremented by "1".

Then, the process transition setting process (step B140) during the change of the normal map is performed, and the normal process of the normal map is terminated.
[Usually process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the normal drawing normal processing transition setting process 1 (step B141) in the above-mentioned normal drawing normal processing will be described. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the normal process transition setting process 1 of the first embodiment. In this normal figure normal process transition setting process 1, first, "0" is set as the process number for shifting to the normal figure normal process (step B151), and the process number is saved in the normal figure game process number area (step). B152). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the fraudulent monitoring period flag area (step B153), and the normal process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Processing during fluctuation of general map Transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the process transition setting process (step B140) during the change of the normal map in the above-mentioned normal process of the normal map will be described. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process transition setting process during the fluctuation of the normal diagram of the first embodiment. In this process transition setting process during fluctuation of the normal map, first, "1" is set as the process number for shifting to the process during the change of the normal map (step B161), and the process number is saved in the normal map game process number area (step B161). Step B162), the normal map fluctuation time (common to low probability and high probability (for example, 500 ms)) is saved in the normal map game processing timer area (step B163). After that, the signal relating to the start of the normal map variation display game is saved in the test signal output data area (step B164). The signal relating to the start of the normal symbol variation display game is a signal for turning on the signal during the fluctuation of the normal symbol 1.

Next, the changing flag indicating that the normal map fluctuation display game is changing is saved in the normal map fluctuation control flag area (step B165). Then, the blinking control timer initial value (for example, 100 ms), which is the initial value of the timer of the blinking cycle of the ordinary figure display, is saved in the ordinary figure blinking control timer area (step B166), and the process transition setting process during the ordinary figure change is performed. finish.

[Processing during fluctuation of general map]
Next, the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map (step B9) in the above-mentioned normal map game processing will be described. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the processing during the fluctuation of the normal diagram of the first embodiment. In this normal map changing process, the normal map display process transition setting process (step B171) is performed, and the normal map changing process is terminated.

[Processing during display of general map Transition setting process]
Next, the details of the normal map display process transition setting process (step B171) in the above-mentioned normal map changing process will be described. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process transition setting process during display of the normal map of the first embodiment. In this normal map display process transition setting process, first, the process number is set to "2" (step B181) as the setting process for shifting to the normal map display process, and the process number is set to the normal map game process number area. Save (step B182). After that, the normal map display time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the normal map game processing timer area (step B183). Further, the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation of the normal figure is saved in the test signal output data area (step B184). It should be noted that the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation of the normal figure is a signal for turning off the signal during the fluctuation of the normal symbol 1.

Next, the stop flag indicating that the normal map fluctuation display game is stopped is saved in the normal map fluctuation control flag area (step B185), and the normal map display process transition setting process is terminated.
[Processing during display of general map]
Next, the details of the normal map display processing (step B10) in the above-mentioned normal map game process will be described. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process during display of the normal diagram of the first embodiment. In this normal map display processing, first, the hit flag (hit information or miss information) set in the normal map normal process is loaded (step B191), and the information in the hit flag area of the RWM is cleared (step B192). ), It is determined whether or not the loaded hit flag is hit information (step B193).

If the hit flag is not hit information (step B193; N), the normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step B198) for shifting to the normal figure normal process is performed, and the normal figure display process is terminated. This normal process transition setting process 1 is the process shown in FIG. 81. On the other hand, when the hit flag is hit information (step B193; Y), the hit processing setting table is set (step B194).

Then, the hit start pointer value (any of the control pointers "0", "2", and "4") corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the normal figure hit middle control pointer area (step B195). The normal power release time (500 ms or 1700 ms) corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the normal figure game processing timer area (step B196). As a result, the opening mode of the normal variable winning device 37 in the time saving state is set, and for example, it is possible to open the device four times. After that, the process for setting the transition to the process for hitting the normal map (step B197) is performed, and the process for displaying the normal map is terminated.

[Middle processing per normal figure Transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the normal map hitting process transition setting process (step B197) in the above-mentioned normal map display process will be described. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process transition setting process per normal diagram of the first embodiment. In this normal figure hitting process transition setting process, first, "3" is set as the processing number for shifting to the normal figure hitting process (step B201), and the processing number is saved in the normal figure game processing number area. (Step B202). After that, the signal related to the start of the hit of the normal map fluctuation display game (the signal related to the hit of the normal map fluctuation display game) and the signal related to the start of the normal electric operation are saved in the test signal output data area (step B203). In addition, the signal related to the start of the hit of the normal figure fluctuation display game is a signal to turn on the medium signal per normal symbol 1, and the signal related to the start of the normal electric operation is a signal to turn on the signal during the normal electric accessory 1 operation. Is.

Next, on-data is saved in the Fuden solenoid output data area in order to output a signal for driving (ON) the Fuden solenoid (step B204).
Further, the information in the normal variable winning device 37 for storing the number of winnings in the normal variable winning device 37 is cleared (step B205), and the number of winnings for the normal variable winning device 37 during the normal variable winning device 37 is stored. Clear the information in the winning number area (step B206). Then, the flag defining the outside of the fraudulent monitoring period of the normal variable winning device 37 is saved in the normal electric fraud monitoring period flag area (step B207), and the process transition setting process during normal drawing is terminated.

[Processing during normal drawing]
Next, the details of the normal map hitting process (step B11) in the above-mentioned normal map game process will be described. FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the processing during the normal drawing of the first embodiment. In this normal-figure hitting process, first, the normal-figure-performing control pointer is loaded and prepared (step B211), and the value of the loaded normal-figure-performing control pointer is the value in the normal-figure-performing control pointer upper limit area. It is determined whether or not (the value at the end of winning) has been reached (step B212).

Then, when the value of the control pointer hitting the normal figure does not reach the value in the upper limit value area of the control pointer hitting the normal figure (step B212; N), the control pointer hitting the normal figure is updated by "+1" (step B213). , Performs the normal electric operation transition setting process (step B214), and ends the normal process during normal drawing. Further, when the value of the control pointer hitting the normal figure reaches the value in the upper limit value area of the control pointer hitting the normal figure (value at the end of hitting) (step B212; Y), step B213 is passed and the normal electric operation transition setting is set. The process (step B214) is performed, and the process during normal drawing is terminated.

[Public operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the normal electric operation transition setting process (step B214) in the above-mentioned normal process per drawing will be described. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the normal electric operation transition setting process of the first embodiment. This normal electric operation transition setting process is a process for driving and controlling the normal electric solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal variable winning device 37, and the process is branched according to the value of the control pointer. In this normal electric operation transition setting process, first, branch processing is performed according to the value of the control pointer (step B221).

If the value of the control pointer is either "0" or "2", the process proceeds to step B222. That is, in order to control the blockage of the normal variation winning device 37, the wait time (for example, 200 ms) after the blockage of the normal variation winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the normal figure game processing timer area (step B222). The off-data is saved in the normal power solenoid output data area in order to turn off the normal power solenoid 37c (step B223), and the normal power operation transition setting process is completed.

If the value of the control pointer is either "1" or "3", the process proceeds to step B224. That is, in order to control the opening of the normal variable winning device 37, the solenoid opening time (for example, 1700 ms), which is the opening time of the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer, is saved in the solenoid game processing timer area (step). B224), the on-data is saved in the normal power solenoid output data area in order to turn on the normal power solenoid 37c (step B225), and the normal power operation transition setting process is completed.

If the value of the control pointer is "4", the process proceeds to step B226. That is, "4" is set as the processing number in order to end the opening control of the normal variable winning device 37 and perform the processing of the remaining spheres of the normal electric power (step B12) (step B226). Then, this processing number is saved in the normal map game processing number area (step B227), and the normal electric remaining ball processing time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the normal map game processing timer area (step B228). After that, the off-data is saved in the normal power solenoid output data area in order to turn off the normal power solenoid 37c (step B229), and the normal power operation transition setting process is completed.

Next, the normal electric operation in the ordinary variable winning device 37 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 89. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing a normal electric operation timing chart of the ordinary variable winning device of the first embodiment. The numbers in the squares in the figure indicate the values of the control pointers.

The normal electric operation in the case of the winning symbol 1 in the ordinary variable winning device 37 consists of a normal figure display time (600 ms), a subsequent normal electric opening time (500 ms), and a subsequent remaining ball processing time (600 ms), for a total of 1200 ms. It is a series of operations. In the case of the winning symbol 1, the value of the control pointer becomes "4" after the lapse of the normal electric power opening time, and the normal electric power remaining ball processing is performed after one opening operation of the normal variable winning device 37.

Further, in the case of the winning symbol 2 in the normal variable winning device 37, the normal electric operation is performed by the normal figure display time (600 ms), the subsequent normal electric opening time (1700 ms), the subsequent wait time (200 ms), and the subsequent. It is a series of operations of a total of 4800 ms, which consists of a normal electric opening time (1700 ms) and a subsequent remaining ball processing time (600 ms). In the case of the hit symbol 2, the value of the control pointer becomes "2" after the lapse of the first normal power release time, and the value of the control pointer is controlled through the respective processes corresponding to "2" and "3". The value of the pointer is "4". In this way, in the case of the winning symbol 2, the normal electric remaining ball processing is performed after the opening operation of the normal variable winning device 37 twice.

Further, in the case of the winning symbol 3 in the normal variable winning device 37, the normal electric operation is performed by the normal figure display time (600 ms), the subsequent normal electric opening time (1700 ms), the subsequent wait time (200 ms), and the subsequent. It is a series of operations of a total of 6700 ms including a normal power release time (1700 ms), a subsequent wait time (200 ms), a subsequent normal power release time (1700 ms), and a subsequent remaining ball processing time (600 ms). In the case of the hit symbol 3, the value of the control pointer becomes "0" after the lapse of the first normal power release time, and the value of the control pointer corresponds to "0", "1", "2", and "3". The value of the control pointer becomes "4" through each process. In this way, in the case of the winning symbol 3, the normal electric remaining ball processing is performed after the opening operation of the normal variable winning device 37 three times.

During the normal map display time, the wait time, and the remaining ball processing time, the normal variable winning device 37 is closed by the off control of the normal electric solenoid 37c. Further, during the normal electric power opening time, the normal variable winning device 37 is opened by the on control of the general electric power solenoid 37c.

[Treatment of remaining spheres]
Next, the fuden residual ball processing (step B12) in the above-mentioned fuzu game processing will be described. FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the normal electric remaining ball processing of the first embodiment. In this normal electric remaining ball processing, the normal electric figure per end processing transition setting process (step B231) is performed, and the normal electric residual ball processing is terminated.

[End processing per normal figure Transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the per-figure end process transition setting process (step B231) in the above-mentioned normal electric remaining ball process will be described. FIG. 91 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the end processing transition setting processing per normal drawing of the first embodiment. In this normal figure hit end process transition setting process, first, the process number "5" related to the normal figure hit end process is set (step B241), and the process number is saved in the normal figure game process number area (step B242). ).

After that, the normal figure ending time (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the normal figure game processing timer area (step B243), and the signal relating to the end of operation of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is saved in the test signal output data area (step B244). The signal relating to the end of operation of the normal variable winning device 37 is a signal for turning off the normal electric accessory 1 operating signal.

Next, the information in the normal electric count number area for counting the number of winnings to the ordinary variable winning device 37 is cleared (step B245). Then, the value in the control pointer area for hitting the normal figure is cleared (step B246), and the end process for hitting the normal figure transition setting process is terminated.

[End processing per drawing]
Next, the per-figure end process (step B13) in the above-mentioned normal map game process will be described. FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the end processing per normal drawing of the first embodiment. In this normal figure hit end process, the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step B251) is performed, and the normal figure hit end process is terminated.

[Usually process transition setting process 2]
Next, the details of the normal map normal process transition setting process 2 (step B251) in the above-mentioned normal map per end process will be described. FIG. 93 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the normal process transition setting process 2 of the first embodiment. In this normal figure normal process transition setting process 2, first, the process number “0” related to the normal figure normal process is set (step B261), and the process number is saved in the normal figure game process number area (step B262). ..

After that, the signal relating to the end of the hit of the normal figure fluctuation game is saved in the test signal output data area (step B263). It should be noted that the signal relating to the end of the hit of the normal symbol fluctuation game is a signal for turning off the signal during the fluctuation of the normal symbol 1.

After that, the flag (flag during the fraud monitoring period) that defines the fraud monitoring period of the normal variable winning device 37 is saved in the Fudoden fraud monitoring period flag area (step B264), and the normal process transition setting process 2 is terminated. ..

[Segment LED editing process]
Next, the details of the segment LED editing process (step S131) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 94. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the segment LED editing process of the first embodiment. In the segment LED editing process, settings related to driving of the round display unit 51 provided in the batch display device 50, the special figure 1 hold display unit 52, the normal figure hold display unit 56, and the LEDs constituting the status display unit 57, etc. To do.

In the segment LED editing process, first, "1" is added to the blinking control timer and updated (step C11). The blinking control timer is, for example, an 8-bit counter timer.
Next, the output on-timing of the normal figure hold display is determined (step C12), and when the output is on timing (step C12; Y), the normal figure hold number display table 1 is set (step C13), and the output on timing is set. If not (step C12; N), the normal figure hold number display table 2 is set (step C14). It should be noted that the output on-timing of the normal figure hold display can be determined by referring to a specific bit of the timer. For example, the blinking cycle of 128 ms can be set by referring to the fifth bit of the timer which is incremented by 1 every 4 ms.

After that, the display data corresponding to the number of reserved numbers in the normal figure is acquired from the set number of reserved normal figures display table 1 or the number of reserved normal figures display table 2 and saved in the segment area (step C15). The segment area is a storage area for storing the display data of the LEDs_00 to LED_31.

For example, the normal figure hold number display table 1 and the normal figure hold number display table 2 have the same value for the normal figure hold number "0" to "2", but different values for the normal figure hold number "3" and "4". Is. As a result, in the normal figure hold display unit 56, the corresponding LED is turned off when the normal figure hold number is "0", the corresponding LED is turned on when the normal figure hold number is "1", and the normal figure hold number is "3". , "4" realizes the blinking of the corresponding LED.

Next, the output on timing of the special figure 1 hold display is determined (step C16), and when the output is on timing (step C16; Y), the special figure 1 hold number display table 1 is set (step C17), and the output is performed. When it is not on-timing (step C16; N), the special figure 1 hold number display table 2 is set (step C18). It should be noted that the determination of the output on-timing of the special figure 1 hold display can be the same as the determination of the output on-timing of the normal figure hold display. At this time, for example, by setting the reference bit of the timer, which is incremented by 1 every 4 ms, from the normal figure hold display, a blinking cycle different from the normal figure hold display can be set.

After that, the display data corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is acquired from the set special figure 1 hold number display table 1 or the special figure 1 hold number display table 2 and saved in the segment area (step C19). It should be noted that the special figure 1 hold display unit 52 also realizes the lighting mode of the LED in the same manner as the normal figure hold display unit 56.

Next, the output on timing of the special figure 2 hold display is determined (step C20), and when the output is on timing (step C20; Y), the special figure 2 hold number display table 1 is set (step C21), and the output is performed. When it is not on-timing (step C20; N), the special figure 2 hold number display table 2 is set (step C22). It should be noted that the determination of the output on-timing of the special figure 2 hold display can be the same as the determination of the output on-timing of the normal figure hold display. At this time, for example, by setting the reference bit of the timer, which is incremented by 1 every 4 ms, from the normal figure hold display, a blinking cycle different from the normal figure hold display can be set.

After that, the display data corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is acquired from the set special figure 2 hold number display table 1 or the special figure 2 hold number display table 2 and saved in the segment area (step C23). As for the special figure 2 hold display unit 58, the LED lighting mode is realized in the same manner as the normal figure hold display unit 56.

Further, a round display LED display table in which the display mode of the round display unit 51 is defined is set (step C24), display data corresponding to the round display LED output pointer is acquired, and the display data is saved in the segment area (step C25). ..

Next, the game status display table 1 is set (step C26), display data corresponding to the game status display number 1 is acquired, and the display data is saved in the segment area (step C27).
In addition, the game state display table 1 indicates whether or not the game state of the special figure game is during the time saving (during the support of the public train), in other words, whether or not it is one of the game states that is advantageous to the player. A display mode for the display unit 57 to notify is defined. For example, when the LED_29 in the status display unit 57 is turned off, "normal" is notified, and when the LED_29 is turned on, "special time reduction (during normal power support)" is notified.

After that, the game status display table 2 is set (step C28), the display data corresponding to the game status display number 2 is acquired, saved in the segment area (step C29), and the segment LED editing process is completed.

The game state display table 2 indicates whether or not the game state of the special figure game is a right-handed game state, in other words, whether or not the game state is another game state that is advantageous to the player. Specifies the display mode for notifying. For example, when the LED_30 in the status display unit 57 is turned off, "normal strike (left strike)" is notified, and when the LED_30 is turned on, "right strike" is notified. In addition, the period for notifying "right-handed" has a period corresponding to a gaming state such as during a big hit, during a small hit, and during normal electric support.

Thereby, the segment LED editing process can notify the player of the progress of the game according to the set display mode. Therefore, the round display unit 51, the special figure 1 hold display unit 52, the special figure 2 hold display unit 58, the normal figure hold display unit 56, and the state display unit, which are the display modes to be set by the segment LED editing process. The 57 has a function as a game progress notification unit.

Next, the magnet fraud monitoring process and the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process for monitoring fraudulent activity will be described. A fraudulent act of illegally obtaining a gaming value may be performed on a gaming machine that imparts a predetermined gaming value to a player according to the result of the gaming. Among such fraudulent acts, a gaming machine provided with a mechanism for detecting fraudulent acts using magnets has been conventionally known. There are various types of fraudulent activity, and detection methods and conditions are required according to each type. However, the occurrence of an abnormal condition could not be detected accurately.

In particular, misjudging that an abnormal condition has occurred even though no abnormal condition leading to fraudulent activity has occurred and giving a notification, etc., causes distrust of the player and is a factor for avoiding the game in the gaming machine. Therefore, it is important to prevent such false detection of abnormal conditions.

Therefore, the gaming machine 10 accurately detects the occurrence of an abnormal state based on the detection results of the magnetic detector that detects abnormal magnetism, the radio wave detector that detects abnormal radio waves, and the magnetic detector and the radio wave detector. For the purpose of preventing false detection of abnormal conditions, for example, the following magnet fraud monitoring process and panel radio wave fraud monitoring process are performed.

[Magnet fraud monitoring process]
First, the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S132) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 95. FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the magnet fraud monitoring process of the first embodiment. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61, which is a magnetic detector that detects abnormal magnetism, and the start and end of fraud notification are set. Since the magnetic detector functions as a magnet detector that detects the approach of a magnet, the magnetic sensor can be paraphrased as a magnet sensor.

In the magnet fraud monitoring process, first, whether the magnetic sensor is on, that is, a state in which abnormal magnetism is detected from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3). It is determined whether or not (step C31). When the magnetic sensor is on (step C31; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is detected, "1" is added to the magnet fraud monitoring timer that measures the detection period of abnormal magnetism and updated (step C32). ), It is determined whether or not the magnet fraud monitoring timer has timed up (step C33).

An abnormality is determined when the magnet fraud monitoring timer times out (step C33; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period (for example, 32 ms). When an abnormality is determined, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step C34), and the initial value of the magnet fraud notification timer (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the magnet fraud notification timer area (step C35). Then, a magnet fraud notification command is prepared (step C36), a magnet fraud generation flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step C37), and whether or not the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value in the magnet fraud flag region is determined. Determination (step C43).

That is, the game control device 100 has a function as an abnormal state detection control means for detecting an abnormal state based on the detection result of the magnetic sensor. Then, the game control device 100 determines that an abnormal state has occurred when the magnetic sensor continuously detects abnormal magnetism for a predetermined period of time.

On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor is not on (step C31; N), that is, when abnormal magnetism is not detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step C38), and the magnet fraud notification that defines the magnet fraud notification time is specified. If the timer is not "0", "1" is subtracted from the magnet fraud notification timer to update (step C39). The minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is "0" (step C40). Even if the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not timed up (step C33; N), the process proceeds to step C39.

Then, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not "0" (step C40; N), that is, when the time is not up, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is "0" (step C40; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time has already been up and the fraud notification period is over, or initially. If the fraudulent notification has not been sent from, prepare a command to end the magnet fraud notification (step C41). Further, a magnet fraud release flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step C42), and it is determined whether or not the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value in the magnet fraud flag region (step C43).

Then, when the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step C43; Y), the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. If the values do not match (step C43; N), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step C44), the effect command setting process is performed (step C45), and the magnet fraud monitoring process is completed. do.

[Radio wave fraud monitoring process]
Next, the details of the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S133) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process of the first embodiment. In the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62, which is a radio wave detector that detects abnormal radio waves, and the start and end of fraudulent notification are set.

In the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process, first, the panel radio wave sensor is turned on from the state of the detection signal output from the panel radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I / F 121. That is, it is determined whether or not an abnormal radio wave is detected (step C51). When the panel radio wave sensor is on (step C51; Y), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the initial value of the radio wave fraud notification timer (for example, 60,000 ms) is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (step C52).

Then, a command for radio wave fraud notification is prepared (step C53), a board radio wave fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a board radio wave fraud flag (step C54), and the prepared board radio wave fraud flag is the value in the board radio wave fraud flag area. It is determined whether they match (step C59). That is, in the case of radio wave fraud, unlike the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

That is, the game control device 100 has a function as an abnormal state detection control means for detecting the occurrence of an abnormal state based on the detection result of the panel radio wave sensor. Then, the game control device 100 determines that an abnormal state has occurred only when the panel radio wave sensor detects an abnormal radio wave once.

On the other hand, when the panel radio wave sensor is not on (step C51; N), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is not detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer that regulates the radio wave fraud notification time is not "0". Update by subtracting "1" from the timer (step C55). The minimum value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is "0" (step C56).

If the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not "0" (step C56; N), that is, if the time is not up, the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is "0" (step C56; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time has already been up and the period of the fraudulent notification has expired, or initially. If the fraudulent notification has not been sent from, prepare a command to end the board radio wave fraud notification (step C57), prepare a board radio wave fraud release flag as a board radio wave fraud flag (step C58), and prepare the board radio wave fraud. It is determined whether or not the flag matches the value in the radio wave invalid flag area (step C59).

Then, when the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (step C59; Y), the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. If the values do not match (step C59; N), the prepared board radio wave fraud flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag area (step C60), the effect command setting process is performed (step C61), and the board radio wave fraud monitoring is performed. End the process.

By performing the magnet fraud monitoring process and the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process as described above, the occurrence of an abnormal state can be accurately detected. That is, the gaming machine is equipped with a component that generates magnetism, such as a solenoid, but by determining that it is in an abnormal state when magnetism is continuously detected for a predetermined period, the magnetism of the solenoid or the like is determined. It is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the occurrence as an abnormal state. On the other hand, since the gaming machine is not equipped with a component that emits radio waves, damage can be minimized by immediately determining an abnormal state when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

In the first embodiment, the detection of abnormal magnetism is simply a state in which magnetism is detected, but a state in which magnetism stronger than the magnetic state in a non-abnormal state may be detected, and the value is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value. The state in which magnetism is detected may be regarded as abnormal. Further, in the first embodiment, the detection of abnormal radio waves is simply defined as receiving radio waves, but it is possible to receive radio waves of a strength that is not received in a non-abnormal state or in a non-abnormal state. It may be in a state of receiving radio waves of a frequency that does not exist. Further, a state in which a radio wave having an intensity equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value or a radio wave having a specific frequency may be detected may be regarded as an abnormality. When setting the threshold value by the magnetic strength, the radio wave strength, and the frequency, the magnetic sensor 61 or the panel radio wave sensor 62 may output a signal when the threshold value is exceeded, or the control device side sets the threshold value. You may want to monitor whether it has been exceeded.

From the above, the detection results of the magnetic detector (magnetic sensor 61) that detects abnormal magnetism, the radio wave detector (panel radio wave sensor 62) that detects abnormal radio waves, and the magnetic detector and radio wave detector Originally, an abnormal state detection control means (game control device 100) for detecting the occurrence of an abnormal state is provided, and in the case of a magnetic detector, the abnormal state detection control means continuously detects abnormal magnetism for a predetermined period of time. In some cases, it is determined that an abnormal condition has occurred, but in the case of a radio detector, it is determined that an abnormal condition has occurred only once an abnormal radio wave is detected.

[External information editing process]
Next, the details of the external information editing process (step S134) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. FIG. 97 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the external information editing process of the first embodiment. FIG. 98 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the external information editing process of the first embodiment.

In the external information editing process, the monitoring results of the payout command transmission process (step S125), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S128), the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S132), and the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S133) are used. Based on this, the process of creating information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test firing test device and setting it in the output buffer is performed.

In the external information editing process, first, a process of setting information according to an error state or a security state is performed. In the process of setting information according to the error status and security status, when the glass frame opening error is occurring (step C71; Y) and the main body frame opening error is occurring (step C72; Y), the door / frame The on-data of the open signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C73), and the on-data of the game machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step C74). That is, the occurrence of the glass frame opening error and the main body frame opening error is output as external information and a test signal.

On the other hand, when neither the glass frame opening error nor the main body frame opening error has occurred (steps C71 to C72; N), the off data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step). C75), the off-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C76).

Next, if the security signal control timer that measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is not "0", the security signal control timer is updated to "-1". (Step C77). The minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step C78).

When the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step C78; N), that is, when the time is not up, the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C79). On the other hand, when the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step C78; Y), that is, when the time is up, the process of step C79 is passed. That is, it is output as external information until the security signal control timer times out that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized.

Magnet fraud is occurring (step C80; Y), panel radio fraud is occurring (step C81; Y), frame radio fraud is occurring (step C82; Y), general electric signal fraud is occurring (step C83; Y), or a big prize is awarded. When the mouth fraud is occurring (step C84; Y), the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C85), and the on-data of the game machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area. (Step C86).

On the other hand, if none of the magnet fraud, board radio wave fraud, frame radio wave fraud, general electric wave fraud, or grand prize opening fraud has occurred (steps C80 to C84; N), the off-data of the gaming machine error status signal is tested. Save in the signal output data area (step C87).

Next, in the external information editing process, the main prize ball signal editing process (step C88) for setting information regarding the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and the starting port signal editing process (step C89) for editing the winning signal of the starting port is performed. To do. Next, if the symbol confirmation count control timer for controlling the output time of the information related to the number of executions of the special figure variation display game is not "0", "-1" is updated (step C90). The minimum value of the symbol confirmation count control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the symbol confirmation number control timer is "0" (step C91).

When the value of the symbol confirmation count control timer is "0" (step C91; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already been up, the off data of the symbol confirmation count signal is set to the external information output data area. Save (step C92) and end the external information editing process. If the value of the symbol confirmation count control timer is not "0" (step C91; N), that is, if the time is not up, the on-data of the symbol confirmation count signal is saved in the external information output data area (step). C93), the external information editing process is terminated.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, the details of the main prize ball signal editing process (step C88) in the above-mentioned external information editing process will be described with reference to FIG. 99. FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the main prize ball signal editing process of the first embodiment. The main prize ball signal editing process is generated every time the number of prize balls (planned payout number, planned game medium payout number) generated by winning a prize in the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case). Is a process to output to an external device.

In the main prize ball signal editing process, first, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step C101). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is "0" (step C102). When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is "0" (step C102; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is "0" (step C103).

When the number of times of output of the main prize ball signal is not "0" (step C103; N), the number of times of output of the main prize ball signal is updated by "-1" (step C104), and the main prize ball signal output control timer area is set as the main. The initial value of the prize ball signal output control timer is saved (step C105). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is the sum of the on state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) and the off state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 ms) of the main prize ball signal. It is time (for example, 192 ms). After that, the on-data for turning on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C107), and the main prize ball signal editing process is completed. When the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is 0 (step C103; Y), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step). C108), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (step C102; N), it is determined whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on section (step C106). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on section means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms) or more. When the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on section (step C106; Y), the process shifts to step C107. When the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on section (step C106; N), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step C108), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

By the above processing, the information regarding the planned number of game media payouts is transmitted to the outside. It should be noted that, after the payout condition based on the winning of the game ball is satisfied, it is faster to generate and transmit the main prize ball signal than to operate the payout device to complete the payout of the game ball. From the time when the payout condition is satisfied to the time when the payout number of game media is paid out, the information regarding the planned number of game media payouts, which is the number of game media to be paid out, is output to the outside.

That is, the game control device 100 can output information regarding the planned number of game media to be paid out, which is the number of game media to be paid out, to the outside between the time when the payout condition is satisfied and the number of game media to be paid out. External output means.

However, if the number of prize balls generated is small and the number is less than the predetermined number (for example, 10) even if this is added to the value in the remaining number of prize balls area, information on the planned number of game media payouts after the actual payout is completed. May be output. By reducing the unit of the number of scheduled game media payouts corresponding to one main prize ball signal (for example, "1"), the payout condition is always satisfied until the payout number of game media is paid out. In the meantime, it is also possible to output information regarding the number of scheduled game media to be paid out, which is the number of game media to be paid out.

From the above, a payout device (payout unit) capable of paying out game media and a control means (game control) for controlling the payout device to pay out a predetermined number of game media based on the establishment of a predetermined payout condition. In the gaming machine including the device 100 and the payout control device 200), the control means is the number of game media to be paid out between the time when the payout condition is satisfied and the time when the payout number of game media is paid out. It is provided with an external output means (game control device 100) capable of outputting information regarding the number of scheduled game media payouts to the outside. It is also possible to apply this configuration to a slot machine using a game medium as a medal.

Further, the external output means (game control device 100) is based on the storage means (game control device 100) having a game medium storage area for storing the number of scheduled game media payouts that have not been output to the outside, and the establishment of the payout conditions. The addition means (game control device 100) for adding the number of scheduled game media payouts corresponding to the established payout conditions to the game medium storage area, and the number of scheduled game media payouts stored in the game medium storage area have reached a predetermined number. Based on this, the transmission means (game control device 100) for transmitting the predetermined number of scheduled game media payouts to the outside and the predetermined number of scheduled game media payouts transmitted by the transmission means are subtracted from the game medium storage area. It is provided with a subtraction means (game control device 100).

Here, the transmission timing of the main prize ball signal will be described with reference to FIG. 100. FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a transmission timing chart of the main prize ball signal of the first embodiment.
For example, the game control device 100 outputs one pulse (main prize ball signal) for each scheduled payout of a predetermined number of units (for example, 10) of game media. The output signal of the main prize ball signal rises from "OFF" to "ON" when the value of the output control timer is "48", and "ON" to "OFF" when the value of the output control timer is "16". And keeps "OFF" until the value of the output control timer becomes "0". That is, the output signal of the main prize ball signal is a 192 ms pulse signal consisting of a 128 ms “ON” time and a 64 ms “OFF” time.

Unlike the game control device 100, the payout control device 200 outputs one pulse (prize ball signal) for each payout of a predetermined number of game media (for example, 10). As a result, the gaming machine 10 can make the external device confirm the consistency between the payout schedule of the game medium and the payout result of the game medium, and can deal with the illegal payout.

Further, in the winning during the big hit period, when the payout of the game medium is delayed due to the ball running out or the like and the game medium is paid out after the big hit is completed, the external device may use only the prize ball signal output by the payout control device 200. It was not possible to determine whether the payout was based on a prize during the jackpot period. However, the game control device 100 outputs the main prize ball signal so that the external device (for example, a hall computer) can accurately collect (determine) information.

[Start port signal editing process]
Next, the details of the start port signal editing process (step C89) in the above-mentioned external information editing process will be described with reference to FIG. 101. FIG. 101 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a start port signal editing process according to the first embodiment. The start port signal editing process is a process that is commonly performed for each of the inputs of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a.

In the start port signal editing process, first, if the start port signal output control timer is not "0", it is updated by "-1" (step C111). The minimum value of the start port signal output control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the start port signal output control timer is "0" (step C112). When the value of the start port signal output control timer is "0" (step C112; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of start port signal outputs is "0" (step C113).

When the number of start port signal outputs is not "0" (step C113; N), the number of start port signal outputs is updated by "-1" (step C114), and the start port signal is output to the start port signal output control timer area. The initial value of the control timer is saved (step C115). The initial value of the start port signal output control timer is the sum of the on state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) and the off state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 ms) of the start port signal (for example, 64 ms). For example, 192 ms). After that, the on-data for turning on the start port signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C117), and the start port signal editing process is terminated. When the number of start port signal outputs is "0" (step C113; Y), the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step). C118), the start port signal editing process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the start port signal output control timer is not "0" (step C112; N), it is determined whether or not the start port signal output control timer is in the output on section (step C116). The fact that the start port signal output control timer is in the output on section means that the value of the start port signal output control timer is a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms) or more. When the start port signal output control timer is in the output on section (step C116; Y), the process shifts to step C117. When the start port signal output control timer is not in the output on section (step C116; N), the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C116; N). Step C118), the start port signal editing process is terminated.

Next, the control of the effect control device 300 will be described. The special figure controlled by the effect control device 300 is a special figure for effect displayed on the display device 41, and the special figure in the following description of the control process of the effect control device 300 is a special figure for this effect. It means (decorative pattern that is not this special figure).

[Main processing]
First, the main process of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 102. FIG. 102 is a diagram showing a flowchart of main processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment.

The main process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300 when the power supply of the gaming machine 10 is started.
[Step D11] The control unit disables interrupts.

[Step D12] The control unit performs initial settings of the CPU 311.
[Step D13] The control unit performs the initial setting of VDP312.
[Step D14] The control unit permits interrupts.

[Step D15] The control unit permits the generation of display data. That is, the control unit permits the display circuit (not shown) in the VDP 312 to access the VRAM (not shown) in the VDP 312 and generate display data.

[Step D16] The control unit sets a random number seed. This is a process of setting a pseudo-random number generation sequence using, for example, a sland function. Here, the control unit may use a fixed value such as 0 (zero) as an argument given to the sland function, or use a value created based on the ID value of the CPU or the like so as to be different for each gaming machine. You may.

[Step D17] The control unit is an area to be initialized in the RWM (for example, RAM 322) of the effect control device 300 (for example, an effect flag area (a storage area used as various flags described later in the control process of the effect control device 300)). ) Saves the initial value when the power is turned on.

[Step D18] The control unit clears the WDT.
[Step D19] The control unit executes the effect button input process. The effect button input process is a process for editing when the effect buttons (selection button switch 25a and enter button switch 25b) are operated when they are enabled. Since the effect button does not turn on and off at high speed, the control unit may perform the process of detecting the input of the effect button in the effect button input process or in a short-cycle timer interrupt (not shown). good.

[Step D20] The control unit executes the hall / player setting mode process. The hall / player setting mode process is a process for accepting operations such as setting a range in which the brightness and volume of the LED and the display device 41 can be changed, and changing the brightness and volume of the LED and the display device 41 by the player.

[Step D21] The control unit executes a random number update process. The random number update process is a process of updating the pseudo-random number at least once in each control cycle of the main process by using, for example, the land function. Since the random function generates a random number based on the specified generation sequence each time the recalculation is performed, the control unit can obtain the random number only by executing the random function. A counter that increments by "1", such as the main board (game control device 100), may be used as a random number.

[Step D22] The control unit executes a received command check process. The reception command check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 103.
[Step D22A] The control unit executes the power saving control process. The power saving control process performs switching control between a normal control state (non-power saving control state) that does not suppress the power consumption of the power saving control target device and a power saving control state that suppresses the power consumption of the power saving control target device. It is a process.

[Step D23] The control unit executes the effect display editing process. The effect display editing process is a process of setting various commands and their parameters for instructing the VDP 312 of the drawing contents on the display device 41. For example, the control unit sets commands in a table shape in the effect display editing process.

[Step D24] The control unit executes the drawing command preparation end setting. The drawing command preparation end setting is a process for setting that all commands for the VDP 312 set in the effect display editing process have been prepared.

[Step D25] The control unit determines whether or not it is the frame switching timing, proceeds to step D26 if it is the frame switching timing, and waits for the frame switching timing if it is not the frame switching timing. Here, the frame switching timing is a time corresponding to a processing cycle (for example, 1/30 second ≈ 33.333 ms) created based on the cycle (for example, 1/60 second) of the V blank interrupt (also referred to as V sink interrupt). It is the timing to arrive at the target interval. The V blank interrupt is generated every time the VDP 312 completes one scan of the entire screen for drawing. As described above, the generation cycle of this V blank interrupt is, for example, 1/60 second. In the case of this embodiment, when the same drawing is repeated twice and a V blank interrupt occurs twice, frame switching is performed, and the frame switching timing cycle is twice the cycle of the V blank interrupt (for example, 1/60 second). (For example, 1/30 second ≈ 33.33 ms). However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed. For example, frame switching (image update) may be performed at a cycle of 1/30 second or more, or 1/30 second or less. Frame switching may be performed at intervals.

By the frame switching timing determination processing, the subsequent processing (steps D26 to D30, and subsequent steps D18 to D24) is executed at this frame switching timing for each processing cycle. The time management that needs to be synchronized with the effect content is performed in this frame unit (that is, the processing cycle unit). When the processing cycle is 1/30 second, for example, 3 frames have 100 ms. This is the same as the main board (game control device) managing the time value in units of 4 ms of the timer interrupt cycle.

[Step D26] The control unit instructs VDP312 to draw a screen according to the command set in step D23. For example, the control unit sequentially transmits commands set in a table shape and instructs VDP 312 to draw a screen.

[Step D27] The control unit executes the sound control process. The sound control process is a process related to volume control of the sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b).

[Step D28] The control unit executes the decoration control process. The decoration control process is a process for controlling various LEDs and the like such as the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18.
[Step D29] The control unit executes the movable body control process. The movable body control process is a process for controlling a movable body (for example, a board effect device 44) including various motors and SOLs (solenoids).

[Step D30] The control unit executes the launch information control process. The launch information control process sets launch-related information based on the launch state flag, and corresponds to the special map rotation state (the number of special map fluctuations per game for a predetermined amount of money (that is, the predetermined number of balls to be rented)). This is a process for correcting the mode of the production.

The control unit returns to step D18 after executing step D30, and thereafter repeatedly executes the processes of steps D18 to D30. That is, steps D18 to D30 constitute a loop process (sometimes referred to as a main loop process) that is repeatedly executed in the above process cycle after the effect control device 300 is started.

The control unit executes the processes of steps D27 to D29 in the main loop process in order to match the effect of the screen, and signals and data (particularly various LEDs and motors) generated or set by these control processes are used. The process of actually outputting the drive control signal, etc. to the port is performed in a short-cycle timer interrupt (not shown). However, when an IC specialized for controlling various devices is used, there is a case where a signal or the like is not output by a timer interrupt only by instructing by serial communication or the like.

[Receive command check process]
Next, the received command check process will be described with reference to FIG. 103. FIG. 103 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a received command check process in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The received command check process is a process executed by the control unit in step D22 of the main process.

The reception command (effect command) is configured to include MODE data (1 byte) and ACTION data (1 byte), and the effect command is sent from the game control device (main board) 100 to the effect control device 300. Are transmitted in sequence. In the following, such data constituting a command is referred to as command data or command data.

Further, the process of receiving a command from the main board is performed by "command reception interrupt processing" (not shown). That is, in the serial communication of this example, transmission / reception is automatically performed by hardware (by the function of the CPU itself), and when the command reception is completed, an interrupt (command reception interrupt) is generated to notify the user. All you have to do is take it out of the buffer, but in the above "command reception interrupt processing", every time there is a command reception interrupt, the command is loaded from the serial reception buffer, and after checking whether the loaded command data is abnormal, the command is concerned. The data (MODE and ACTION data) is stored in the command buffer, and the value of the command reception counter is increased by "1" by the stored amount. In the description of the control process, the term "storing" simply means that the device is readable and stored in a predetermined storage area for use in the subsequent control process (the same applies hereinafter). The command buffer is, for example, a ring buffer. This command buffer is composed of, for example, a storage area in RAM 311a (or RAM 322) of CPU 311. The capacity of the command buffer may be greater than or equal to the number of commands that may be transmitted from the main board in the system control cycle (the above-mentioned processing cycle; for example, 1/30 second).

[Step D41] The control unit loads the value of the command reception counter as the number of command receptions. The command reception counter is set in the RWM (RAM 322 or RAM 311a). Since the command reception counter is cleared to "0" in principle in step D43, the number of commands received during one frame (1/30 second) (time for one cycle of the above-mentioned processing cycle) is stored.

[Step D42] The control unit determines whether or not the number of command receptions is "0 (zero)", and if the number of command receptions is not "0", the process proceeds to step D43, and the number of command receptions is "0". If there is, the received command check process is terminated. In the present application, “loading” the data in the control process as in step D41 means taking out the data from the RAM (RAM 322 or RAM 311a in the effect control device 300 of this example).

[Step D43] The control unit subtracts the contents of the command reception counter area (that is, the value of the command reception counter) by the number of command receptions.
If A: the value of the command reception counter and B: the number of commands received, "A = B" immediately after the execution of step D41. Immediately after the execution of step D43, "A = AB = 0" is a normal movement, but in the embodiment of this example, the effect control device 300 is a command reception interrupt from the game control device (main board) 100. Is given the highest priority without disabling interrupts, so there is a possibility that the value of A increases between the processing of step D41 and the processing of step D43. Therefore, if the process of step D43 is set to "A ← 0" (that is, the process of setting the value of the command reception counter to zero), the command count will be deviated. Therefore, in step D43, the subtraction process of "AB" is performed. I'm doing it. However, when serial communication is used for sending and receiving commands from the main board as in this embodiment, interrupts are disabled so that the value of A does not increase between the processing of step D41 and the processing of step D153. Then, the processing content of step D43 may be set to "A ← 0".

[Step D44] The control unit inputs the contents of the received command buffer (corresponding to the command buffer, hereinafter may be simply referred to as a command buffer) (that is, the command data stored in the address corresponding to the read pointer of the command buffer). Copy to the command area (sometimes called the command storage area). The command area is, for example, a storage area in RAM 322 or RAM 311a, and is a so-called FIFO format (first-in, first-out format) buffer.

[Step D45] Since the control unit has read the data in the command buffer, the command read index value, which is a pointer for reading the command buffer, is updated by, for example, "1" in the range of "0" to "31". Do it. The range of "0" to "31" here corresponds to the capacity of the command buffer (for example, "32").

[Step D46] The control unit determines whether or not the copy of the command for the number of command receptions is completed (that is, whether or not step D44 and step D45 are repeatedly executed for the number of command receptions). The control unit proceeds to step D47 when the copy of the command for the number of received commands is completed, and proceeds to step D44 when the copy is not completed.

[Step D47] The control unit loads (that is, reads) the contents of the command area (data stored first among the data not yet read in the command area, that is, data to be read next). do.

[Step D48] The control unit executes the received command analysis process. The received command analysis process is a process for analyzing the data of the loaded command (hereinafter referred to as the command this time). The received command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG. 104.

[Step D49] The control unit updates the address of the command area (the address of the data to be read next).
[Step D50] The control unit determines whether or not the analysis of the commands for the number of command receptions has been completed (that is, whether or not steps D47 to D49 have been repeatedly executed for the number of command receptions). The control unit proceeds to step D47 when the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands has not been completed, and ends the received command check process when the analysis is completed.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis process will be described with reference to FIG. 104. FIG. 104 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a received command analysis process in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The received command analysis process is a process executed by the control unit in step D48 of the received command check process.

[Step D51] The control unit separately stores the upper byte of the data of the current command loaded in step D47 of the received command check process in MODE and the lower byte in ACT. In the case of a variable system command that commands a fluctuation pattern of a special figure, the upper byte data stored as MODE commands the first half fluctuation pattern, and the lower byte data stored as ACT commands the second half fluctuation pattern. It is a thing.

[Step D52] The control unit determines whether or not the value of MODE separated in step D51 is within the normal range. The control unit proceeds to step D53 when the MODE value is in the normal range, and ends the received command analysis process when the MODE value is not in the normal range. It should be noted that the value of MODE may not be defined and may not be used, and if it is such an unused value, it is determined in step D52 that it is not in the normal range.

[Step D53] The control unit determines whether or not the ACT value separated in step D51 is within the normal range. The control unit proceeds to step D54 when the ACT value is in the normal range, and ends the received command analysis process when the ACT value is not in the normal range.

Further, in step D53, it is determined as follows, for example, whether or not the value of ACT separated in step D51 is within the normal range. That is, the effective ACT value differs for each MODE, and the upper limit to the lower limit of the effective value of the ACT are defined in a predetermined ACTION check table (not shown), and in step D53, they are separated within the range of the upper limit to the lower limit. It is checked whether the value of the ACT that has been set is within, and if it is within the range, it is determined that the range is normal (at this point, the toothlessness check described later has not been performed).

[Step D54] The control unit determines whether or not the separated ACT value is the correct combination with respect to the separated MODE value. The control unit proceeds to step D55 when the ACT values are the correct combination, and ends the received command analysis process when the ACT values are not the correct combination. Whether or not the ACT values are the correct combination can be determined by using, for example, a match check table. In the match check table, all ACT values (ACTION values) valid for the MODE value are registered in order from the start address, and are provided for each MODE value. Then, if there is a separated ACT value in this match check table corresponding to the MODE value, it can be determined that the combination is correct, and if there is no separated ACT value in the match check table, it is correct. It can be determined that it is not a combination.

It should be noted that the determination of whether or not the ACT values are the correct combination is executed including the tooth omission check of whether or not the ACT value is a normal combination for MODE. For one MODE, there are multiple valid ACTs, but their values are not always continuous (that is, there are values that do not exist discontinuously and values that are missing teeth), so the command Is a valid value. Then, since only valid values are defined in the match check table, it is compared and confirmed one by one to see if they match any of them.

[Step D55] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the variable command range. The control unit executes variable command processing (details omitted) when the MODE value is within the variable command range (step D56), and proceeds to step D57 when the MODE data is not within the variable command range. ..

Here, the MODE data is the MODE data separated and stored in step D51 (the same applies to step D57 and the like described later). Further, a variable command (sometimes referred to as a variable command or a variable pattern command) is a command for instructing a variable pattern of a special figure, and the range that the data of this variable command can take is the variable command range.

[Step D57] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the jackpot command range. The control unit executes the jackpot command processing (details omitted) when the MODE data is within the jackpot command range (step D58), and proceeds to step D59 when the MODE data is not within the jackpot command range. .. The jackpot command is a command that commands an operation related to the jackpot production (display of a fanfare screen, a round screen, etc.), and the range that the data of this jackpot command can take is the jackpot command range.

[Step D59] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the symbol system command range. The control unit executes symbol-based command processing (details omitted) when the MODE value is within the symbol-based command range (step D60), and proceeds to step D61 when the MODE data is not within the symbol-based command range. .. A symbol command (sometimes called a symbol command or a decorative special symbol command) is a command for commanding information about a special symbol (for example, what the stop symbol of the special symbol should be), and this symbol command. The range that can be taken by the data is the design command range.

[Step D61] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the single-shot command range. The control unit executes single-shot command processing (details omitted) when the MODE value is within the single-shot command range (step D62), and proceeds to step D63 when the MODE data is not within the single-shot command range. .. In addition, unlike commands that make sense in combination, such as symbol commands and variable commands, commands that are established independently are called single-shot commands. Single-shot commands (sometimes called single-shot commands) include customer waiting demo commands, hold count commands, symbol stop commands, probability information commands, error / invalid commands, model specification commands, and the like. The range that the data of this one-shot command can take is the one-shot command range.

[Step D63] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the look-ahead symbol system command range. The control unit executes look-ahead symbol command processing (details omitted) when the MODE data is within the look-ahead symbol command range (step D64), and steps when the MODE data is not within the look-ahead symbol command range. Proceed to D65.

[Step D65] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the look-ahead fluctuation system command range. The control unit executes look-ahead variable command processing (details omitted) when the MODE data is within the look-ahead variable command range (step D66), and steps when the MODE data is not within the look-ahead variable command range. Proceed to D67. The look-ahead symbol command and the look-ahead variable command are commands for pre-reading effect.

[Step D67] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the error-type command range. The control unit executes error command processing (details omitted) when the MODE data is within the error command range (step D68), and receives command analysis processing when the MODE data is not within the error command range. To finish. The error command is a command for notifying the start and end of an error.

Here, the pre-reading effect (also referred to as pre-reading notice or pre-reading notice effect) is a variable display game corresponding to the start winning memory (holding of the starting winning memory, or simply holding) in which the variable display game of the special figure has not been executed. In order to notify the player in advance whether or not the game will be a big hit (or what kind of fluctuation pattern it will be) when it is executed after that, the start winning memory is held and displayed in an unusual manner. It is a production such as. The look-ahead command (look-ahead variable command and look-ahead symbol command) is a command that informs in advance the fluctuation pattern and the stop symbol corresponding to the hold of the start winning memory that is the target of the look-ahead effect, and is a game at the time of the start winning. It is transmitted from the control device 100 to the effect control device 300. It should be noted that normal variable commands and symbol commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

[Decoration control processing]
Next, the decoration control process will be described with reference to FIG. 105. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing a flowchart of decoration control processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The decoration control process is a process executed by the control unit in step D28 of the main process.

[Step D71] The control unit executes the test mode decoration process. The test mode decoration process is a process of setting a decoration pattern for checking whether a decoration device such as an LED provided in the gaming machine 10 is normally lit with a preset decoration pattern. The control unit executes the test mode decoration process when the gaming machine 10 is started in the test mode, and does not execute the test mode decoration process when the gaming machine 10 is started in the normal mode.

[Step D72] The control unit executes an error-time decoration process. The control unit executes the error-related decoration process when the effect control device 300 receives the error-related command from the game control device 100, and does not execute the error-time decoration process when the effect-related command is not received. The error-time decoration process is a process of setting a decoration pattern for notifying a player or an employee of a game hall that an error has occurred.

[Step D73] The control unit executes the decoration setting process. The decoration setting process is a process of setting a decoration pattern according to the game state. The decoration setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 106.

[Step D74] The control unit executes the event decoration setting process. The event decoration setting process is a process of setting a decoration pattern according to a predetermined event when a predetermined event occurs. The predetermined event is, for example, when the push button 25 is operated.

[Step D75] The control unit executes the decoration pattern control data setting process. The decoration pattern control data setting process is a process of setting control data to be transmitted to each effect device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18), and sets control data according to the decoration pattern set in steps D71 to D74. do. The control unit ends the decoration control process after executing the decoration pattern control data setting process.

[Decoration setting process]
Next, the decoration setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 106. FIG. 106 is a diagram showing a flowchart of decoration setting processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The decoration setting process is a process executed by the control unit in step D73 of the decoration control process.

[Step D81] The control unit branches the process according to the gaming state. The control unit proceeds to step D82 when the game state is "power on", proceeds to step D84 when the game state is "power failure recovery", and proceeds to step D86 when the game state is "waiting for customers". When the game state is "changing", the process proceeds to step D88, when the game state is "design stopped", the process proceeds to step D89, when the game state is "fanfare", the process proceeds to step D90, and the game state is "fanfare". If "in the round", the process proceeds to step D91, and if the game state is "ending", the process proceeds to step D92.

[Step D82] The control unit sets the decoration pattern to a loop setting. The loop setting is to repeat a predetermined decoration pattern.
[Step D83] The control unit sets the power-on decoration pattern from the power-on to the game-playable state (waiting for customers (state)). As a result, the gaming machine 10 repeatedly displays the decoration corresponding to the power-on until the gaming machine 10 is in a playable state. The control unit ends the decoration setting process after setting the power-on decoration pattern.

[Step D84] The control unit sets the decoration pattern to a loop setting.
[Step D85] The control unit sets the power failure recovery decoration pattern from the recovery from the power failure to the playable state (waiting for customers (state)). As a result, the gaming machine 10 repeatedly displays the decoration corresponding to the recovery from the power failure until the gaming machine 10 is in a playable state. The control unit ends the decoration setting process after setting the power failure recovery decoration pattern.

[Step D86] The control unit sets the decoration pattern to a loop setting.
[Step D87] The control unit executes the customer waiting demo decoration setting process while waiting for customers (state). The control unit sets a decoration pattern corresponding to the customer waiting demo in the customer waiting demo decoration setting process. As a result, the gaming machine 10 displays the decoration corresponding to the customer waiting demo while waiting for the customer. The control unit ends the decoration setting process after executing the customer waiting demo decoration setting process.

[Step D88] The control unit executes the decoration setting process while the game state is "changing", that is, while the variable display game is being executed. In the changing decoration setting process, the control unit uses a decoration pattern corresponding to the effect mode of the running variable display game (for example, a rainbow including a clockwise rainbow color display and a counterclockwise rainbow color display when a jackpot notice is included). Color display) is set. As a result, the gaming machine 10 performs decorative display corresponding to the effect mode of the running variable display game while the variable display game is being executed. The control unit ends the decoration setting process after executing the changing decoration setting process.

[Step D89] The control unit executes the decoration setting process while the symbol is stopped when the game state is "stopped symbol", that is, when the identification symbol in the variable display game is stopped. The control unit sets a decoration pattern indicating that the identification symbol is stopped in the decoration setting process while the symbol is stopped. As a result, the gaming machine 10 performs a decorative display indicating that the identification symbol is stopped while the identification symbol is stopped. The control unit ends the decoration setting process after executing the decoration setting process while the symbol is stopped.

[Step D90] The control unit executes the decoration setting process during fanfare when the game state is "during fanfare", that is, when the result of the variable display game is a big hit. The control unit sets a decoration pattern (for example, a rainbow color display including a clockwise rainbow color display and a counterclockwise rainbow color display) indicating that the result of the variable display game is a big hit in the decoration setting process during fanfare. .. As a result, the gaming machine 10 performs a decorative display indicating that the result of the variable display game is a big hit during the fanfare. The control unit ends the decoration setting process after executing the decoration setting process during fanfare. The gaming machine 10 displays the decoration with the decoration pattern set in the fanfare middle decoration setting process until the big hit state is started.

[Step D91] The control unit executes the decoration setting process during the round when the gaming state is "in the round", that is, when each round in the jackpot state is executed. The control unit sets a decoration pattern (for example, a rainbow color display including a clockwise rainbow color display and a counterclockwise rainbow color display) indicating that the round is in progress in the decoration setting process during the round. As a result, the gaming machine 10 makes a decorative display indicating that the round is in progress during the round. The control unit ends the decoration setting process after executing the decoration setting process during the round.

[Step D92] The control unit executes the ending decoration setting process when the gaming state is "ending", that is, the ending process indicating that the jackpot state has ended is executed. In the ending decoration setting process, the control unit sets a decoration pattern (for example, a rainbow color display including a clockwise rainbow color display and a counterclockwise rainbow color display) indicating that the ending is in progress. As a result, the gaming machine 10 performs a decorative display indicating that the ending is in progress during the ending. The control unit ends the decoration setting process after executing the decoration setting process during the ending.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, the second embodiment will be described. First, the gaming machine of the second embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 107. FIG. 107 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the second embodiment. In the following, the differences from the game board 30 of the first embodiment will be mainly described.

On the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32 of the game board 3000 of the game machine 10 of the second embodiment, a normal map start gate 34 that gives a start condition of the normal map variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the prize in the normal drawing start gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 109). Further, two general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, and one general winning opening is located on the lower right side of the special variable winning device 38 arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40. 35 is arranged. The game ball that has won a prize in these general winning openings 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 109).

Below the center case 40 are a start winning opening 36 and a second special figure variable display game (special figure), which form a first starting winning opening that gives a start condition for the first special figure variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game). A winning device 90 is provided with a second starting winning opening 97 that gives a start condition for the (2 variable display game). The winning device 90 includes a distribution member 92 that alternately distributes the game ball flowing into the upper inflow port 91 into the starting winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 97. The distribution member 92 can rotate about a rotation axis along the front-rear direction, and the tilting direction changes depending on the weight of the inflowing game ball, and the starting winning opening 36 on the left side and the second starting winning prize on the right side. The game balls are distributed alternately to the mouth 97. The game ball that has won the starting winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 109), and the game ball that has won the second starting winning opening 97 is detected by the starting opening 2 switch 97a (see FIG. 109). Will be done. Further, below the winning device 90, an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that did not win in the winning opening or the like is provided.

Further, on the right side of the center case 40, a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting winning area) that gives a start condition of the second special figure variation display game is provided. The ordinary variable winning device 37 includes a movable member 37b that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side tilts to the right and can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in. It is almost vertical and maintains a closed closed state (a state that is disadvantageous to the player) in which the game ball cannot flow in. Then, when the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 109) as a driving device rotates so that the upper end side tilts to the right and normally fluctuates. The winning device 37 can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous for the player) in which the game ball easily flows into the winning device 37. The game ball that has won the ordinary variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 109). It should be noted that the normally variable winning device 37 may be able to win a prize even in the closed state, and may be more difficult to win in the closed state than in the open state.

On the right side of the normal variable winning device 37, a flow path 615 whose front side is covered with a transparent cover and communicates vertically is formed, and the game ball that did not win the normal variable winning device 37 goes down through the flow path 615. Flow down to. A guide portion 616 is provided below the flow path 615. The guide portion 616 has an inclined surface whose upper surface 617 descends to the left, and the game ball flowing downward is received by the upper surface 617 and guided to the left where the special variable winning device 38 is present.

Further, the guidance unit 616 is provided with an information display device 630 for displaying information related to the special figure variation display game.
This information display device 630 has a first information display unit that displays the number of first start storages, which is the right to execute the first special figure variation display game, and a second start memory, which is the right to execute the second special figure variation display game. It is provided with a second information display unit that displays the number of. Further, the decorative special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the 1st special figure variable display game is displayed by the 4th symbol separately from the decorative special figure variable display game displayed by the 1st to 3rd symbols on the display device 41. The decoration special figure 2 variation corresponding to the second special figure variation display game by the fourth symbol separately from the decoration special figure variation display game displayed by the third information display unit and the display device 41 by the first to third symbols. Display A fourth information display unit for displaying a game is provided.

The first information display unit and the second information display unit are each composed of two light emitting members, and the third information display unit and the fourth information display unit are each composed of one light emitting member. In the second display device, three of these six light emitting members are arranged side by side in two rows on the left and right. The upper two light emitting members in the right column constitute the first information display unit, and the upper two light emitting members in the left column constitute the second information display unit. Further, one lower light emitting member in the right column constitutes a third information display unit, and one lower light emitting member in the left column constitutes a fourth information display unit.

The first information display unit and the second information display unit are each composed of two light emitting members, and a design is provided around each information display unit so that the two light emitting members are related to each other. At first glance, it can be seen that one information display unit is composed of two light emitting members. Further, although the third information display unit and the fourth information display unit are each composed of one light emitting member, the designs around these information display units are designed so as to be understood to be independent of each other. At first glance, it can be seen that the information display unit is composed of one light emitting member. The design around the light emitting member is considered to have a sense of unity with the design of the entire gaming machine so as not to spoil the aesthetic appearance. Further, the design around the light emitting member is not a sticker or the like but is molded into a member constituting the guide portion 616, which can reduce the labor and cost in manufacturing.

Further, in the lower right of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a special variable winning device (large winning opening) 38 that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted is arranged according to the result of the special figure variation display game. It is set up. The details of the configuration of the special variable winning device 38 will be described later, but depending on the result of the special figure variable display game as an auxiliary game, the opening / closing member 990 is closed from the closed state (a closed state disadvantageous to the player). The opening / closing member 990 retracts and converts the game ball flowing down the game area 32 into an open state (a state advantageous for the player) that can be accepted. That is, the special variable winning device 38 includes a large winning opening opened and closed by an opening / closing member 990 driven by a large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 109) as a driving device, and is in a special gaming state (first special gaming state). During the small hit game state (second special game state), the large winning opening is changed from the closed state to the open state to facilitate the inflow of the game ball into the large winning opening, and the player is given a predetermined value. The game value (prize ball) is given. Inside the large winning opening (winning area), a large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 109) is provided as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening. ..

In the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, of the gaming areas 32 in which the gaming balls flow down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left gaming area, and the right area of the center case 40 is the right gaming area. It is said that. Then, the player adjusts the firing force and launches the game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed) to win a prize in the starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, and the general winning opening 35 of the winning device 90. By launching a game ball into the right game area (so-called right-handed), it is possible to aim for a prize in the normal figure start gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, and the special variable winning device 38. ing.

Further, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right of the game board 30), a prize is given to the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game, and the normal figure start gate 34, which form a special figure variable display game. A batch display device 50 for displaying a normal map fluctuation display game as a trigger and displaying various information is provided.

Next, the special variable winning device 38 will be described with reference to FIG. 108. FIG. 108 is an exploded perspective view of the special variation winning device of the gaming machine of the second embodiment as viewed from the front side.
The special variable winning device 38 includes a front wall member 950, a rear wall member 960, a main body portion 970, and a cover member 979.

The front wall member 950 includes a plate-shaped front surface portion 951. The front surface of the front surface portion 951 is arranged close to the back surface of the cover glass 14 of the glass frame 15, so that the game ball does not flow down in front of the front surface. Further, the front surface of the front surface portion 951 is a surface that can be visually recognized by the player, and is a lens that is decorated and partly capable of transmitting light. An LED (not shown) is arranged on the back surface of the front wall member 950 as a decorative means, and it is possible to decorate the special variable winning device 38 with light. The color of the light that decorates the special variable winning device 38 is different from the emission color of the batch display device 50, which prevents the display of the adjacent batch display device 50 from becoming difficult to understand. Further, the upper portion of the plate-shaped front surface portion 951 is a flow path front wall 952 forming a side wall on the front side of the flow path.

The rear wall member 960 includes a plate-shaped rear surface portion 961. A front wall member 950 is attached to the front surface of the rear surface portion 961, and a portion of the front surface of the rear surface portion 961 that is not hidden by the front wall member 950 is decorated. The upper part of the rear surface portion 961 is a flow path rear wall 962 forming a side wall on the rear side of the flow path. Further, at a position at the lower end of the flow path rear wall 962, an opening / closing member insertion portion 963 penetrating the front and rear for inserting the opening / closing member 990 from the back surface side of the rear wall member 960 is formed.

Further, on the front surface side of the flow path rear wall 962, a plurality of rear wall projecting portions 964 projecting forward are provided. The rear wall projecting portion 964 is a triangular columnar projecting portion having slopes on the left and right side surfaces, and is provided at a position adjacent to a plurality of recesses provided in the opening / closing member 990. The rear wall protrusion 964 and the recess have a function of guiding the game ball flowing down to the left forward in order to meander the game ball flowing down the flow path. That is, it forms a contact portion where the game balls flowing down the flow path can come into contact with each other. Since the rear wall protrusion 964 is provided adjacent to the recess, it is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing down the right side portion of the flow path in the portion where the recess is not provided, and the game ball is surely meandered. Is possible.

In the central portion of the rear surface portion 961 facing the portion of the front wall member 950 where the guide flow path 955 was formed, the guide flow path 955 penetrated back and forth so as to communicate with the back surface side of the rear surface portion 961. A penetrating portion 968 is formed. Further, above the guide flow path 955, a switch mounting portion 965 is formed which penetrates back and forth so as to accommodate the rear portion of the large winning opening switch 38a. Further, in the right side portion of the rear surface portion 961 facing the portion of the front wall member 950 where the general winning opening 35 is formed, the game ball winning the general winning opening 35 is moved to the back surface side of the rear wall member 960. A penetrating portion 966a is formed so as to communicate the general winning port flow path 966 to be guided to the back surface side of the rear surface portion 961.

The main body portion 970 includes a rear wall portion 972 forming the rear wall of the induction flow path 955. In the rear wall portion 972, at a position facing the penetrating portion 968 formed in the rear wall member 960, a game ball guided to the back surface of the rear wall member 960 through the penetrating portion 968 is introduced into the guiding flow path 955. A rib 973 leading to the right is formed along the line. Further, a penetrating portion 974 penetrating back and forth is formed at a position of the rear wall portion 972 facing the downstream end portion of the guide flow path 955 formed in the rear wall member 960. The gaming ball that has flowed down the induction flow path 955 passes through the penetrating portion 974 and is guided to the back surface side of the main body portion 970 and flows into the discharge flow path that discharges the game ball to the outside of the gaming machine.

Further, in the portion facing the downstream end of the general winning opening flow path 966 formed in the rear wall member 960, a game ball flowing down the general winning opening flow path 966 is guided to the back surface side of the main body portion 970. A portion 975 is formed. The gaming ball that has flowed down the general winning opening flow path 966 is guided to the back surface side of the main body portion 970 through the penetrating portion 975, detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 109), and then to the outside of the gaming machine. Is designed to flow into the discharge channel.

Further, an opening / closing member holding portion 976 that guides and supports the opening / closing member 990 that operates in the front-rear direction is provided at a position facing the opening / closing member insertion portion 963 formed in the rear wall member 960. The opening / closing member holding portion 976 is a slit-shaped penetrating portion penetrating the front and rear of the main body portion 970, and can abut on the upper / lower / left / right surfaces of the opening / closing member 990 to guide and support the opening / closing member 990. The guide wall 977 is provided so as to extend along the front-rear direction.

An opening / closing member unit 980 having an opening / closing member 990 and an operating mechanism for operating the opening / closing member 990 is attached to the back surface side of the main body portion 970. The opening / closing member unit 980 includes a unit base member for attaching various members, an opening / closing member 990 that can slide in the front-rear direction, and a large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 109) for operating the opening / closing member 990. ..

One end of the grand prize opening solenoid 38b is connected to the drive arm 983. Further, the drive arm 983 is provided with a rotation shaft 983b along the vertical direction, and is rotatable about the rotation shaft 983b. When the special variable winning device 38 is closed, the drive shaft of the large winning opening solenoid 38b is extended and the drive arm 983 is located at the front end of the rotation range. When the special variable winning device 38 is opened from this state, the drive shaft of the large winning opening solenoid 38b retracts, so that the drive arm 983 moves in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the back surface side with the rotation shaft 983b as the center. The opening / closing member 990 is retracted backward. As a result, the special variable winning device 38 is opened. When the special variable winning device 38 is closed, the operation opposite to the above operation is performed.

Further, the main body portion 970 is provided with a V door 520 at a position where the induction flow path 955 composed of the main body portion 970 and the rear wall member 960 serves as an inflow portion of the V flow path 955a formed by branching. .. The V door 520 slides in the front-rear direction by the specific region solenoid 520a (see FIG. 109) to prevent the inflow to the V flow path 955a, and retracts backward to allow the inflow to the V flow path 955a. It can be changed to the allowable state.

Further, the main body portion 970 is provided with a specific area switch 460 for detecting a game ball that has flowed into the V flow path 955a.
The gaming ball that has flowed into the V flow path 955a is detected by the specific region switch 460 that detects the gaming ball that has flowed into the V flow path 955a, and then is guided to the back surface side of the main body portion 970 through the penetrating portion 974. It is designed to flow into a discharge channel that discharges a game ball to the outside of the game machine.

In the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is not determined by the jackpot symbol, but the gaming ball flows into the V flow path 955a in the special gaming state and the specific area switch 460. It is designed to be in a high probability state based on being detected in.

Further, the main body portion 970 has a game ball at a position where the guide flow path 955 composed of the main body portion 970 and the rear wall member 960 serves as an inflow portion of the discharge ball flow path 955b formed by branching. A through port 462 for guiding to the back surface side and a residual ball discharge switch 461 for detecting a game ball flowing down the discharge ball flow path 955b are provided.

Next, the control system of the gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. 109. FIG. 109 is a block diagram showing an example of the control system of the gaming machine of the second embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 includes a CPU unit 110 having a game microcomputer 111, an input unit 120 having an input port, and an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like. It is composed of a data bus 140 or the like connecting between the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130.

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 includes a panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the game machine 10, a start port 1 switch 36a in the winning device 90, and a start port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37. Gate switch 34a in the normal starting gate 34, winning port switch 35a, large winning opening switch 38a in the special variable winning device 38, starting port 2 switch 97a in the winning device 90, specific area switch in the special variable winning device 38. An interface chip (proximity I / F) that is connected to 460 and that receives a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches and converts it into a 0V-5V positive logic signal. 121 is provided. Since the input range of the proximity I / F 121 is 7V-11V, the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is illegally shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is cut and floats. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as the above and output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, 97a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the large winning port switch 38a, the detection signal and the sensor of the specific area switch 460, and the like. The abnormality detection signal 1 output when an abnormality of the switch is detected is input to the second input port 123. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal 2 output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, in the third input port 124, a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the game machine 10 or a glass frame opening detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 is detected. The detection signal of the switch 63 and the detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the game machine 10 are also input. A vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine so that the detection signal is input to the third input port 124.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to the test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switches 37a and 97a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123. There is.

In the second embodiment, the output unit 130 has a large winning port solenoid 38b that is connected to the data bus 140 and opens the special variable winning device 38, and a specific area solenoid 520a that opens the V door 520 of the special variable winning device 38. A second output port 134 is provided for outputting open / closed data of the normal electric solenoid 37c for opening the movable member 37b of the ordinary variable winning device 37.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the open / close data signals of the large winning port solenoid 38b, the specific area solenoid 520a, and the peripheral electric solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. (Drive circuit) 138a, batch output from the second driver 138b and fourth output port 136 that output the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 135. The external information signal supplied to the external device such as the management device from the third driver 138c and the fifth output port 137 that output the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the current drawing side of the display device 50 is output to the external information terminal board 71. A fourth driver 138d is provided.

Next, the configuration of the screen in the display device 41 will be described with reference to FIG. 110. FIG. 110 is a diagram showing an example (No. 1) of a screen displayed by the display device of the second embodiment.
The screen 700 is the display content of the display device 41. The screen 700 includes a large symbol group 701, a small symbol group 702, a special figure 1 hold number display 703, a special figure 2 hold number display 704, a hold display 705, and a hold digestion display 706.

The large symbol group 701 is in charge of game production for the purpose of improving the interest. Therefore, the display device 41 displays the large symbol group 701 in a substantially central portion of the screen 700. The large symbol group 701 includes a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol. The left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the large symbol group 701 of the screen 700 all indicate that the corresponding special symbol variable display game is in the variable display state.

The small symbol group 702 is in charge of notifying the variable display state for the purpose of improving the ease of grasping the game state of the player. Therefore, the display device 41 displays the small symbol group 702 in a small size on the peripheral portion so as to ensure visibility without interfering with the display effect by the large symbol group 701. The small symbol group 702 independently secures the visibility of the symbol. The small symbol group 702 includes a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol. The left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the small symbol group 702 of the screen 700 all indicate that the corresponding special symbol variable display game is in the variable display state.

In general, the large symbol group 701 is displayed larger than the small symbol group 702, the degree of freedom of the display position is high, and the display mode can be greatly changed. On the contrary, the small symbol group 702 is displayed smaller than the large symbol group 701, and the degree of freedom of the display position is low (for example, the position is fixed).

The special figure 1 hold number display 703 displays the hold storage number (starting memory number) of the special figure 1 game. The special figure 2 hold number display 704 displays the hold storage number of the special figure 2 game. The hold display 705 can clearly indicate the number of hold storages of the special figure variation display game and notify the degree of expectation for the game result for each hold storage according to the display mode. The hold storage number displayed by the hold display 705 corresponds to the sum of the hold storage number displayed by the special figure 1 hold number display 703 and the hold storage number displayed by the special figure 2 hold number display 704. The hold digestion display 706 can indicate that the special figure variable display game is in the variable display state and notify the degree of expectation for the game result depending on the display mode.

The small symbol group 702, the special figure 1 hold number display 703, and the special figure 2 hold number display 704 are positioned so as not to enter the player's blind spot due to the operation of the board effect device 44 or the game ball rolling on the front side. It is always displayed on the player, and the variable display state and the number of reserved memories are clearly indicated to the player.

Further, in the gaming machine 10, the large symbol group 701 and the small symbol group 702 are each composed of three-digit symbols, but the gaming machine 10 may have any number of digits as long as it includes one or more symbols. Further, in the gaming machine 10, the number of digits of the symbol is the same for the large symbol group 701 and the small symbol group 702, but the number of digits of the symbol is different between the large symbol group 701 and the small symbol group 702. May be good.

Further, the gaming machine 10 may change the transparency of the symbol for the large symbol group 701 between the variable display and the stop display, or during the variable display (for example, the transparency is changed from 0% to 50%). The transparency of the symbol can be fixed (for example, fixed to 0%) for the small symbol group 702. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can easily grasp the playing state of the player in the small symbol group 702 while ensuring the variety of display effects for the large symbol group 701.

Further, even if the game machine 10 changes the hue of the symbol of the large symbol group 701 between the variable display and the stop display, or during the variable display (for example, from red to blue), the small symbol group The hue of the design can be fixed (for example, fixed to red) for 702. Further, the gaming machine 10 may change the saturation of the symbol for the large symbol group 701 between the variable display and the stop display, or during the variable display (for example, the saturation is changed from 100% to 0%). Also, the saturation of the symbol can be fixed (for example, fixed to 100%) for the small symbol group 702. Further, even if the gaming machine 10 changes the brightness of the symbol for the large symbol group 701 between the variable display and the stop display, or during the variable display (for example, the brightness is changed from 100% to 10%), the gaming machine 10 may change the brightness. The brightness of the symbol can be fixed (for example, fixed to 100%) for the small symbol group 702. Further, the gaming machine 10 may change the size of the symbol for the large symbol group 701 between the variable display and the stop display, or during the variable display (for example, change from the standard size to the enlarged (reduced) size). Even if there is, the size of the symbol can be fixed for the small symbol group 702. Further, even if the gaming machine 10 changes the display position of the symbol for the large symbol group 701 between the variable display and the stop display, or during the variable display (for example, the display position is changed from the center of the screen to the upper right of the screen). The display position of the symbol can be fixed for the small symbol group 702. Further, the gaming machine 10 may change the design of the large symbol group 701 between the variable display and the stop display, or during the variable display (for example, change from a rectangle to a circle, or change from a number to a character). Even if there is, the design of the symbol can be fixed (for example, fixed to a number) for the small symbol group 702. Further, even if the gaming machine 10 may change the variable display mode of the symbol for the large symbol group 701 (for example, change from vertical scroll to horizontal scroll) during the variable display, the variable display mode of the symbol for the small symbol group 702. Can be fixed (for example, fixed to shaft rotation fluctuation).

Even with these, the gaming machine 10 can easily grasp the playing state of the player in the small symbol group 702 while ensuring the variety of display effects for the large symbol group 701.
Further, the gaming machine 10 can have different modes of variation during the variation display for the large symbol group 701 and the small symbol group 702. For example, the gaming machine 10 can easily distinguish between the large symbol group 701 and the small symbol group 702 when the large symbol group 701 is vertically scrolled. Further, the gaming machine 10 can reduce the sense of discomfort given to the player even if the symbols are asynchronously updated between the large symbol group 701 and the small symbol group 702.

Next, the display effect of the jackpot of the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 111 to 117. FIG. 111 is a diagram showing an example (No. 1) of the effect flow of the second embodiment. FIG. 112 is a diagram showing an example (No. 2) of the effect flow of the second embodiment. FIG. 113 is a diagram showing an example (No. 2) of a screen displayed by the display device of the second embodiment. FIG. 114 is a diagram showing an example (No. 3) of a screen displayed by the display device of the second embodiment. FIG. 115 is a diagram showing an example (No. 4) of a screen displayed by the display device of the second embodiment. FIG. 116 is a diagram showing an example (No. 5) of a screen displayed by the display device of the second embodiment. FIG. 117 is a diagram showing an example (No. 6) of a screen displayed by the display device of the second embodiment.

[Effect flow F11] The gaming machine 10 displays a fluctuation stop state (stop display state) before the fluctuation start in the fluctuation display game. An example of the screen in the stop display state is shown in screen 710 of FIG. 113 (F11).

The screen 710 shows a screen in which the symbol is stopped (stop being displayed). On the screen 710, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the large symbol group 701 are stopped, indicating that the special symbol variation display game is in the stopped display. Further, on the screen 710, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the small symbol group are stopped, indicating that the special symbol variation display game is in the stopped display.

Further, on the screen 710, the hold digestion display 706 indicates that the special figure variable display game is not in the variable display state by the blank display. Further, on the screen 710, the special figure 1 hold number display 703 indicates that the hold storage number of the special figure 1 game is "4", and the special figure 2 hold number display 704 indicates that the hold memory number of the special figure 1 game is "4". It indicates that it is "0", and the hold display 705 indicates that the total number of hold storages of the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game is "4".

When the game machine 10 starts the symbol change, the game machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F12.
[Production flow F12] The gaming machine 10 starts a variable display. An example of the screen after the start of the variable display is shown in the screen 711 of FIG. 113 (F12).

The screen 711 is a screen after the screen 710, and shows a screen after the start of the variable display. On the screen 711, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the large symbol group 701 are fluctuating, indicating that the special symbol variable display game is being displayed in a variable manner. Further, on the screen 711, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the small symbol group are fluctuating, indicating that the special symbol variation display game is being displayed in a variable manner.

At this time, the gaming machine 10 makes the large symbol group 701 semi-transparent on the screen 711, so that the visibility of the background display is higher than the visibility of the large symbol group 701. On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 ensures visibility that gives priority to the background display by not making the small symbol group 702 a semi-transparent state on the screen 711.

Further, on the screen 711, the special figure 1 hold number display 703 displays a value (“3”) obtained by subtracting the hold storage number of the special figure 1 game by one from “4”, and the hold display 705 displays the special figure change. Display A value (“3”) obtained by subtracting one from “4” for the number of pending memories of the game is displayed. The hold digestion display 706 displays the hold storage display during digestion, and indicates that the special figure variable display game is in the variable display state.

The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F13 when deriving the outlier, and proceeds to the effect flow F14 when deriving the jackpot (special gaming state).
[Production flow F13] The gaming machine 10 displays a variation display result (missing). An example of a screen for displaying the variation display result (off) is shown on the screen 712 of FIG. 113 (F13).

The screen 712 is a screen after the screen 711, and shows a screen in a state where the variable display result is out of order.
On the screen 712, the large symbol group 701 is stopped and displayed in a symbol combination mode corresponding to the deviation, indicating that the variation display result is the deviation. Further, on the screen 712, the small symbol group 702 is stopped and displayed in a symbol combination mode corresponding to the deviation, indicating that the variation display result is the deviation.

[Production flow F14] The gaming machine 10 displays a variable display result (big hit). An example of a screen for displaying the variation display result (big hit) is shown on the screen 713 of FIG. 113 (F14).
The screen 713 is a screen after the screen 711, and shows a screen in a state where the variable display result is a big hit.

On the screen 713, the large symbol group 701 is stopped and displayed in a symbol combination mode corresponding to the jackpot, indicating that the variable display result is the jackpot. Further, on the screen 713, the small symbol group 702 is stopped and displayed in a symbol combination mode corresponding to the jackpot, indicating that the variable display result is the jackpot.

The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F15 after guiding the occurrence of a big hit.
[Production flow F15] The gaming machine 10 starts a jackpot production. An example of the screen at the start of the jackpot effect is shown on the screen 714 of FIG. 114 (F15).

The screen 714 is a screen after the screen 713 and shows the screen at the start of the big hit effect. The screen 714 includes an effect display 715, a round display 716, and a cumulative display 717 as display contents.

The effect display 715 is in charge of displaying an effect such as an image. On the screen 714, the effect display 715 displays an image or the like corresponding to the big hit. The gaming machine 10 is provided with the effect display 715 only in a part (central part) on the screen 714, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the gaming machine 10 may provide the effect display 715 on the entire screen and arrange other display elements (cumulative display 717 and round display 716) on the front side of the effect display 715.

The round display 716 displays the number of big hit rounds (the number of times the big winning opening is opened) and the digestion status (progress status) of the rounds depending on the display mode. Specifically, the round display 716 displays the number of rounds according to the number of heart symbols to be displayed, and displays the digestion status (progress status) of the rounds according to the lighting state of the heart symbols. On the screen 714, the round display 716 indicates that the number of rounds is "6" and that it is before the start of one round by displaying the six heart symbols in a lit state.

For example, the number of rounds of the jackpot has three patterns of "6", "9", and "12" (6 rounds of jackpot, 9 rounds of jackpot, 12 rounds of jackpot), and the gaming machine 10 has the game machine 10 at the start of the jackpot production. , The number of heart symbols of the number of rounds of the jackpot or less (for example, the symbol of the number of hearts of 9 or less when the generated jackpot is a 9-round jackpot) is displayed.

Cumulative display 717 displays the cumulative status (cumulative round) of rounds within a predetermined period (cumulative period). The cumulative display 717 displays the cumulative status of rounds with a value obtained by converting a predetermined number of rounds into one unit (1 kyun). On the screen 714, the cumulative display 717 displays "1 Kyun" to indicate that the first unit (set) is being executed.

For example, the value displayed by the cumulative display 717 is used when determining the notification mode in a big hit such as a video or BGM. That is, the gaming machine 10 notifies the video or BGM corresponding to the value displayed by the cumulative display 717 during the big hit. The predetermined period (cumulative period) will be described later with reference to FIG. 120.

Here, the correspondence (conversion rule) between the round and the unit of cumulative display "Kyun" will be described with reference to FIG. 118. FIG. 118 is a diagram showing the correspondence between the cumulative display unit of the second embodiment and the round.

As shown in FIG. 118, in the gaming machine 10, the cumulative rounds "1 to 3" correspond to 1 kyun, the cumulative rounds "4 to 6" correspond to 2 kyun, ..., The cumulative round is ". "3n-2 to 3n" corresponds to n Kyun. In other words, Kyun is a value converted into units according to a conversion formula that converts 3 rounds as 1 unit. According to this, when the cumulative round is "1 to 3", the gaming machine 10 converts the unit according to the conversion formula, and displays 1 kyun on the cumulative display 717 using the converted unit. If the cumulative round is "4 to 6", the unit is converted according to the conversion formula, and the converted unit is used to display 2 in the cumulative display 717, ..., The cumulative round is "3n-". If it is "2 to 3n", the unit is converted according to the conversion formula, and the converted unit is used to display n-kun on the cumulative display 717. In this way, the gaming machine 10 abstracts the rounds by using the unit-converted values and notifies the player of the cumulative number of rounds. According to this, the gaming machine 10 can display information without causing a decrease in the interest of the player. The above is the correspondence between the round and the unit of cumulative display.

In addition, the size of the opening time and the size of the maximum number of winnings may differ depending on the opening mode for each round. May have.

When such one index does not necessarily represent a single value, the player cannot properly grasp the value.
Also, if only the high-value rounds are displayed excluding the low-value rounds out of the 15 rounds, or if the actual number of prize balls won is displayed, the player feels a gap between the displayed content and the expectation. There was something. A value display that is too specific may impair the player's expectation and cause a decline in interest. However, the gaming machine 10 can display information without causing a decrease in the interest of the player by abstracting the value display.

The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F16 after displaying the start of the jackpot effect.
[Direction flow F16] The gaming machine 10 performs a normal round progress effect (a round progress effect without additional round effect (promotion effect)). Examples of screens in the normal round progress effect are the screen 718 of FIG. 114 (F16a1), the screen 719 of FIG. 114 (F16a2), the screen 720 of FIG. 114 (F16b1), the screen 721 of FIG. 115 (F16b2), and the screen 115 (F16b3). Shown on screen 723.

The screen 718 is a screen after the screen 714, and shows a screen during one round (during the opening of the first big winning opening). On the screen 718, the round display 716 indicates that the first round is in progress (the first big winning opening is open) by displaying the symbol of the first heart in a blinking state.

The screen 719 is a screen after the screen 718, and shows a screen after the end of one round and before the start of two rounds (during the interval between one round and two rounds). On the screen 719, the round display 716 displays the symbol of the first heart in the off state and the symbols of the second to sixth hearts in the on state, so that after the end of the first round and before the start of the second round ( (During the interval between the 1st and 2nd rounds).

The screen 720 is a screen after the screen 719, and shows a screen during three rounds (during the opening of the third big winning opening). On the screen 720, the round display 716 indicates that the third round is in progress by displaying the symbol of the third heart in a blinking state.

The screen 721 is a screen after the screen 720, and shows a screen when the value of the cumulative display 717 is added (counted up) by the end of the round (digestion of the round). The screen 721 includes a count-up display 722 as a display content. The count-up display 722 clearly indicates that the value displayed by the cumulative display 717 is counted up (added). On the screen 721, the count-up display 722 clearly indicates that the value displayed by the cumulative display 717 is counted up by displaying "Kyun" which is a unit of the cumulative display 717.

The screen 723 is a screen after the screen 721 and shows the screen after the end of the 3rd round and before the start of the 4th round (during the interval between the 3rd round and the 4th round). On the screen 723, the round display 716 displays the symbols of the first to third hearts in the off state and the symbols of the fourth to sixth hearts in the on state, so that after the third round is completed and 4 Indicates that it is before the start of the round (during the interval between the 3rd and 4th rounds). Further, on the screen 723, the cumulative display 717 displays the value (“2 Kyun”) after counting up from “1 Kyun” on the screen 720, and the second unit (set) is being executed. Show that there is.

As described above, in the normal round progress effect, the gaming machine 10 advances the round by notifying the progress status of the round by the round display 716 and notifying the image or the like corresponding to the big hit by the effect display 715.

As a result of advancing the round, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F23 when the number of lit heart symbols becomes 0, that is, when the number of remaining rounds becomes 0.
When the game machine 10 reaches the round addition determination timing as a result of advancing the round (the number of remaining rounds reaches the specified value (for example, 2) and the number of heart symbols reaches the display upper limit (for example, 12)). If it has not been reached and there is room for additional rounds), the process proceeds to the effect flow F17, and a special round progress effect (a round progress effect accompanied by a round additional effect) is performed.

In cases other than the above, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F16 and continues the normal round progress effect.
[Production flow F17] The gaming machine 10 starts a round additional production. An example of the screen at the start of the round addition effect is shown on the screen 724 of FIG. 115 (F17).

The screen 724 is a screen after the screen 723, and shows a screen at the start of the round additional effect. The screen 724 includes an effect display 715, a round display 716, a cumulative display 717, and an effect success / failure display 725 as display contents.

The production success / failure display 725 is in charge of displaying the production success / failure. On the screen 724, the effect success / failure display 725 displays the success / failure of the round additional effect using a heart-shaped symbol. Further, on the screen 724, the effect success / failure display 725 is displayed on the front side of the effect display 715. As described above, the gaming machine 10 displays the effect success / failure display 725 on the front side rather than the effect display 715 to ensure visibility having priority over the effect display 715. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can enhance the effect (attention, visibility) of the effect success / failure display 725 and prevent the player from missing the round additional effect. Further, on the screen 724, the round display 716 indicates that the player is in the fifth round (the fifth big winning opening is open) by displaying the symbol of the fifth heart in a blinking state.

The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F18 after the start of the round additional effect.
[Direction flow F18] The gaming machine 10 performs a success / failure fanning effect that fuels whether or not the round additional effect is successful. An example of the screen at the time of the success / failure fanning effect is shown in the screen 726 of FIG. 115 (F17).

The screen 726 is a screen after the screen 724, and shows a screen of a success / failure fanning effect execution state that fuels the success / failure of the round additional effect. On the screen 726, the effect success / failure display 725 displays an effect (success / failure effect) in which the heart-shaped symbol is stopped with the characters "development" displayed on the surface, and the effect is aroused. ..

The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F19 when the effect ends in success (when a round is added), and proceeds to the effect flow F21 when the effect ends in failure (when the round is not added).

[Direction flow F19] The gaming machine 10 displays success. A screen example of the success display is shown in screen 727 of FIG. 116 (F19).
The screen 727 is a screen after the screen 726 and shows a screen to be displayed when the effect is successful. On the screen 727, the effect success / failure display 725 stops and displays the heart-shaped symbol with the characters "development" displayed on the surface, indicating that the effect is successful.

When the game machine 10 displays success, the game machine 10 proceeds to the production flow F20.
[Direction flow F20] The gaming machine 10 adds a round. An example of a screen after adding a round is shown in screen 728 of FIG. 116 (F20).

The screen 728 is a screen after the screen 727 and shows the screen after the round is added. On the screen 728, the number of heart symbols constituting the round display 716 is added by 3 (1 kyun) from the state of the screen 727 (6 heart symbols), and 9 heart symbols (9 heart symbols). 9 rounds) is shown.

When the game machine 10 adds a round, the game machine 10 proceeds to the production flow F21.
[Production flow F21] The gaming machine 10 displays a failure. An example of a failure display screen is shown on screen 729 of FIG. 116 (F21).

The screen 729 is a screen after the screen 726 and shows a screen to be displayed when the production fails. On the screen 729, the effect success / failure display 725 displays the heart-shaped symbol in a broken state, indicating that the effect has failed.

When the gaming machine 10 displays a failure, the game machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F22.
[Direction flow F22] The gaming machine 10 displays the round digestion. Examples of screens after round digestion are shown in screen 730 of FIG. 117 (F22a) and screen 731 of FIG. 117 (F22b).

The screen 730 is a screen after the screen 728, and shows a state in which the round display 716 turns off the heart symbol of the fifth round to clearly indicate that the fifth round has been completed.

The screen 731 is a screen after the screen 729, and shows a state in which the round display 716 turns off the heart symbol of the fifth round to clearly indicate that the fifth round has been completed.

The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F16, and starts the normal round progress effect again.
[Production flow F23] The gaming machine 10 ends the jackpot effect and stops fluctuating.
In this way, the gaming machine 10 performs a round additional effect (promotion effect (also referred to as rank-up effect or value improvement effect) to improve the value of the jackpot) by using the effect success / failure display 725 during the jackpot effect. As a result, the gaming machine 10 has the expectation that the gaming machine 10 will change (promote) from a low-value jackpot (for example, a 6-round jackpot) to a high-value jackpot (for example, a 12-round jackpot). You can improve your interest.

Next, the timing of performing the special round progress effect will be described more specifically with reference to FIG. 119. FIG. 119 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart showing the execution timing of the special round progress effect of the second embodiment.

The timing T11 indicates the timing at which the gaming machine 10 ends the round and starts the interval, and the number of remaining rounds reaches 2 (specified value). Further, the timing T12 indicates the timing at which the interval is ended and the round is started. Timing T13 indicates the timing at which the round is completed.

The gaming machine 10 continues the normal round progress effect until the number of remaining rounds becomes 2 (specified value) and the round starts (until the timing T12). Then, when the game machine 10 starts a round with the number of remaining rounds being 2 (specified value), the effect type is switched, and the special round progress effect is executed within the round (timing T12 to timing T13).

The above is the timing at which the gaming machine 10 executes the special round progress effect. The timing at which the gaming machine 10 executes the special round progress effect is an example and is not limited to this. For example, the gaming machine 10 may execute a special round progress effect within an interval (between timing T11 and timing T12) in a state where the number of remaining rounds is 2 (specified value), or the number of remaining rounds is 2 specified values. A special round progress effect may be executed over the rounds from the interval in the state of).

Next, the cumulative period in which the cumulative display values continue to be accumulated will be described with reference to FIG. 120. FIG. 120 is a flowchart of the cumulative round counter clearing process of the second embodiment.
The cumulative round counter is a counter that counts the cumulative number of rounds. The cumulative round counter clearing process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300 in the effect display editing process of step D23 of the main process (FIG. 102).

[Step D100] The control unit determines whether or not the value of the cumulative round counter is 0 (cumulative round is 0). The control unit ends the cumulative round counter clear process when it is determined that the value of the cumulative round counter is 0, and proceeds to step D101 when it is determined that the value of the cumulative round counter is not 0.

[Step D101] The control unit determines whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state (probability change state) or a time saving state. The control unit ends the cumulative round counter clear process when it is determined that the gaming state is the high probability state or the time saving state, and when it is determined that the gaming state is not the high probability state or the time saving state (when it is the normal state), step D102. Proceed to.

[Step D102] The control unit clears the value of the cumulative round counter (the value of the cumulative round counter is set to 0).
According to this, the gaming machine 10 continues to accumulate the value of the cumulative round counter when it is in the high probability state or the time saving state, and clears the cumulative round counter when it is not in the high probability state or the time saving state. That is, when the game is supported by the previously generated jackpot, the gaming machine 10 continues to accumulate the value of the cumulative round counter.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 keeps accumulating the value of the cumulative round counter when the previously generated jackpot contributes to the generated jackpot, so that the player can determine the relationship with the previous jackpot. Can be recognized by.

Next, the display effect of the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment in the high probability state will be described with reference to FIGS. 121 to 123. FIG. 121 is a diagram showing an example (No. 3) of the effect flow of the second embodiment. FIG. 122 is a diagram showing an example (No. 7) of a screen displayed by the display device of the second embodiment. FIG. 123 is a diagram showing an example (No. 8) of a screen displayed by the display device of the second embodiment.

[Production flow F31] The gaming machine 10 displays a fluctuation stop state (stop display state) before the fluctuation start in the fluctuation display game. An example of a screen in a variable stop state is shown in screen 732 of FIG. 122 (F31).

The screen 732 includes a small symbol group 702, a special figure 1 hold number display 703, a special figure 2 hold number display 704, an effect display 715, and a symbol display 733 as display contents.
The symbol display 733 is used in place of the large symbol group 701 and is in charge of notifying the variable display state. Specifically, the symbol display 733 notifies the variable display state according to the display mode. The symbol display 733 displays the heart-shaped symbol, and when the heart-shaped symbol is displayed in the stopped state, it indicates that the fluctuation is stopped, and the heart-shaped symbol is in the variable state (rotational state). ) Indicates that the variable display is in progress. Further, the symbol display 733 displays a small symbol (a symbol smaller than the large symbol group 701) on the peripheral portion so as to ensure visibility without interfering with the display effect by the effect display 715.

On the screen 732, the symbol display 733 displays a heart-shaped symbol in a stopped state, indicating that the fluctuation is stopped. Further, on the screen 732, the small symbol group 702 is in a stopped state, indicating that the fluctuation is stopped. On the screen 732, the effect display 715 displays an image or the like corresponding to the high probability state. Further, on the screen 732, the special figure 1 hold number display 703 indicates that the hold storage number of the special figure 1 game is "2", and the special figure 2 hold number display 704 indicates that the hold memory number of the special figure 1 game is "2". 3 ”.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 can notify the player of the variable display state while ensuring the visibility of the effect display 715 by using the symbol display 733 instead of the large symbol group 701.
If the gaming machine 10 does not develop into reach, it proceeds to the production flow F32, and if it develops into reach, it proceeds to the production flow F33.

[Production flow F32] The gaming machine 10 displays a variation display result (missing). An example of a screen during variable display when it does not develop into reach is shown on screen 734 of FIG. 122 (F32a), and an example of a screen for displaying a variable display result (missing) is shown on screen 735 of FIG. 122 (F32b).

The screen 734 is a screen after the screen 732, and shows a screen during variable display when it does not develop into reach. On the screen 734, the symbol display 733 indicates that the symbol is being displayed in a variable manner by displaying the symbol in the shape of a heart in a variable manner. Further, on the screen 734, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the small symbol group 702 are fluctuating, indicating that the special symbol variation display game is being displayed in a variable manner.

Further, on the screen 734, the special figure 1 hold number display 703 displays "2", and the special figure 2 hold number display 704 is a value obtained by subtracting the hold storage number of the special figure 2 game by one from "3". "2") is displayed.

The screen 735 is a screen after the screen 734 and shows a screen for displaying the variable display result (off). On the screen 735, the symbol display 733 stops and displays the heart-shaped symbol in the same manner as before the start of the fluctuation, thereby ending the fluctuation display performed on the screen 734 and indicating that the fluctuation display result is out of alignment. .. Further, on the screen 735, the small symbol group 702 is stopped and displayed in a symbol combination mode corresponding to the deviation, indicating that the variation display result is the deviation.

After displaying the variation display result (missing), the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F31.
[Direction flow F33] The gaming machine 10 starts a reach effect (a derivation process effect for deriving a special gaming state). An example of a screen at the start of the reach effect is shown in screen 736 of FIG. 122.

The screen 736 is a screen after the screen 732 and shows a screen at the start of the reach effect.
The screen 736 includes a small symbol group 702, a special figure 1 hold number display 703, a special figure 2 hold number display 704, an effect display 715, and an effect success / failure display 725.

On the screen 736, the effect success / failure display 725 displays the success / failure of the reach effect using a heart-shaped symbol, as in the case of the round addition effect. Further, on the screen 736, the effect success / failure display 725 is displayed on the front side of the effect display 715. As described above, the gaming machine 10 displays the effect success / failure display 725 on the front side rather than the effect display 715 to ensure visibility having priority over the effect display 715. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can enhance the effect (attention, visibility) of the effect success / failure display 725 and prevent the player from overlooking the reach effect.

Further, on the screen 736, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the small symbol group 702 are fluctuating, indicating that the special symbol variation display game is being displayed in a variable manner. Further, on the screen 736, the special figure 1 hold number display 703 displays "2", and the special figure 2 hold number display 704 is a value obtained by subtracting the hold storage number of the special figure 2 game by one from "3". "2") is displayed.

When the game machine 10 starts the reach effect, the game machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F34.
[Direction flow F34] The gaming machine 10 performs a success / failure fanning effect that fuels whether or not the reach effect is successful. An example of the screen at the time of the success / failure fanning effect is shown in the screen 737 of FIG. 123 (F34).

The screen 737 is a screen after the screen 736, and shows a screen of a success / failure fanning effect execution state that fuels the success / failure of the reach effect. On the screen 737, the effect success / failure display 725 is similar to the round addition effect, in which the heart-shaped symbol stops with the characters "development" displayed on the surface, and the success / failure of the effect is fueled. Display the effect.

The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F36 when the effect ends in success (when the jackpot is derived), and proceeds to the effect flow F35 when the effect ends in failure (when the loss is derived).

[Production flow F35] The gaming machine 10 displays a failure. A screen example of the failure display is shown in screen 738 of FIG. 123 (F35).
The screen 738 is a screen after the screen 737 and shows a screen to be displayed when the production fails. On the screen 738, the effect success / failure display 725 displays the heart-shaped symbol in a broken state, indicating that the effect has failed. Further, on the screen 738, the small symbol group 702 is stopped and displayed in a symbol combination mode corresponding to the deviation, indicating that the variation display result is the deviation.

The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F31 after displaying the failure.
[Direction flow F36] The gaming machine 10 displays success. A screen example of the success display is shown in screen 739 of FIG. 123 (F36).

The screen 739 is a screen after the screen 737 and shows a screen to be displayed when the effect is successful. On the screen 739, the effect success / failure display 725 stops and displays the heart-shaped symbol with the characters "development" displayed on the surface, indicating that the effect is successful. Further, on the screen 739, the small symbol group 702 is stopped and displayed in a symbol combination mode corresponding to the jackpot, indicating that the variable display result is the jackpot.

The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the production flow F37 after displaying success.
[Production flow F37] The gaming machine 10 starts a jackpot production. An example of the screen at the start of the jackpot effect is shown on the screen 740 of FIG. 123 (F37).

The screen 740 is a screen after the screen 739 and shows the screen at the start of the big hit effect. On the screen 740, the effect display 715 displays an image or the like corresponding to the big hit. On the screen 740, the round display 716 indicates that the number of rounds is "6" and that it is before the start of one round by displaying the six heart symbols in the lit state. On the screen 740, the cumulative display 717 displays "11 Kyun", indicating that the 11th unit (set) is being executed.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 performs the reach effect in the high probability state by using the effect success / failure display 725. That is, the gaming machine 10 executes the reach effect in the high probability state and the promotion effect during the big hit effect in the same effect mode.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can make it difficult to distinguish between the reach effect in the high probability state and the promotion effect during the big hit effect. For example, when the reach effect in a high probability state derives a big hit and the promotion effect is performed within the big hit, the gaming machine 10 can give a sense of unity to a series of effects by executing the game machine 10 in the same effect mode. can.

Further, since the reach effect and the promotion effect in the high probability state are set to the same effect mode, the game machine 10 increases the number of times that the effect success / failure display 725 makes a success display in the high probability state. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can make the number of big hits experienced to be greater than or equal to the actual number of big hits (it is possible to give the player the feeling that the big hits are occurring more than they actually are. can).

In addition, in general, since the player has a limited opportunity to come into contact with the promotion effect in the special gaming state (big hit), he / she cannot understand the content of the promotion effect, and the player who has little experience in playing gets a sufficient interest by the promotion effect. Sometimes I couldn't. On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10, a part of the promotion effect and a part of the reach effect (derivation process effect) in the high probability state are the same effect, so that the opportunity to deepen the understanding of the effect content is expanded. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Modification 1 of the second embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the first modification of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 124. FIG. 124 is a diagram showing an example of a screen displayed by the display device of the first modification of the second embodiment.

The screen 741 is a modification of the screen 732 shown in FIG. 122 (F31). The screen 741 shows that the symbol display 733a for displaying the star-shaped symbol is used instead of the symbol display 733 for displaying the heart-shaped symbol.

The screen 742 is a modification of the screen 732 shown in FIG. 122 (F31). The screen 742 shows how the symbol display 733b, which displays the symbol in the shape of a character, is used instead of the symbol display 733, which displays the symbol in the shape of a heart.

The screen 743 is a modification of the screen 732 shown in FIG. 122 (F31). The screen 743 shows that the symbol display 733c that displays the symbols (two symbols) in the shape of two characters is used instead of the symbol display 733 that displays the symbol in the shape of a heart.

The above is the first modification of the second embodiment. As described above, the gaming machine 10 can use a symbol of a figure (star shape) other than a heart or a symbol display composed of a symbol of a character. Further, the gaming machine 10 can also use a symbol display composed of two or more symbols.

The gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment (including the modification 1) described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The gaming machine 10 has an effect means (display device 41) capable of producing a variable display game and a first gaming state (display device 41) capable of deriving a special gaming state (big hit) with a first probability in the variable display game. A control means (game control device 100, which can transition between a normal probability state) and a second gaming state (high probability state: probabilistic state) in which a special gaming state can be derived with a second probability higher than the first probability. It is equipped with an effect control device 300). The control means presents at least a part of the derivation process effect (reach effect) of the special game state performed in the second game state and the first value (number of rounds) for the special game state, and then from the first value. In common with at least a part of the promotion effect (round additional effect) that presents a high second value (number of rounds), the effect is controlled by the effect means.

[Third Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 125 to 127. In the gaming machine 10 shown in the third embodiment, the player can select an effect mode (for example, a character, a background, etc.), and the game machine 10 executes an effect according to the effect mode selected by the player. .. In the following, an example in which the player selects a character will be described. First, in the gaming machine 10, a character that can be selected by the player and an effect that is executed when each character is selected will be described with reference to FIG. 125. FIG. 125 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the character and the effect of the third embodiment.

FIG. 125 shows the correspondence between the characters that can be selected by the gaming machine 10 and the effects that can be executed when each character is selected. In the gaming machine 10, character A, character B, ..., Character N can be selected, and when character A is selected, effects A1 to An can be executed, and when character B is selected. B1 to Bn can be executed, and ..., When the character N is selected, the effects N1 to Nn can be executed. The above is the correspondence between the selectable character and the effect.

Next, the timing at which the selection (change) of the character can be accepted will be described with reference to FIG. 126. FIG. 126 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart showing the timing at which the selection of the character of the third embodiment can be accepted.

The gaming machine 10 starts the symbol variation at the timing T11 from the stop display (variation stop) state, and starts the Nth variation display. After that, the gaming machine 10 starts a reach effect for deriving the deviation from the timing T12. After that, when the gaming machine 10 notifies the timing T13 of the variation display result (result mode: off) and ends the reach effect, the character is selected (changed) until the timing T14 when the Nth variation display ends. Performs possible character selection effects (displaying the character selection screen).

According to this, when the gaming machine 10 performs a reach effect for deriving the loss in the variable display game, the player selects (changes) a character in the variable display game for which the reach effect for deriving the loss is performed. ) Can give you the opportunity to do it.

For example, if the character selection effect is performed before the reach effect is started, the content of the reach effect may change depending on the character selected by the player. Therefore, when preparing the effects from the start of the change to the end of the change, the gaming machine 10 must prepare in advance all the effects corresponding to the characters to be selected (characters that may be selected). I had to.

On the other hand, when accepting character selection after deriving the loss, the gaming machine 10 does not have to prepare a plurality of reach effects, so that the character selection effect is performed after the reach effect is completed (after the loss is derived). , It is possible to give the player an opportunity to select a character while suppressing the processing load.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 can provide an opportunity to select a character after the reach effect of deriving the loss, and by making the character changeable, it is possible to provide an opportunity to switch feelings such as dissatisfaction due to the occurrence of the loss. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the player from being excessively enthusiastic (inserted).

Depending on the gaming machine, the variation display may be terminated when the effect control device receives the stop command issued by the gaming control device. In general, the length of the reach effect (time to reach the off-screen) is predetermined, so such a gaming machine receives a stop command due to some error when it stops fluctuating after the reach effect (off-screen display). If the command is delayed, the player will have to wait on the off screen for the delay in reception, which may give the player a sense of discomfort. In that respect, if the character selection effect (display of the character selection screen) is performed after the reach effect (display of the off-screen), such a gaming machine will have a character selection time even if the reception of the stop command is delayed due to some error. It is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity given to the player because it can be dealt with for a long time.

Next, a screen example at the time of character selection reception effect will be described with reference to FIG. 127. FIG. 127 is a diagram showing an example of a screen displayed by the display device of the third embodiment.
The screen 750 is a screen (character selection screen) during the character selection effect. The screen 750 includes the selected character display 751, the option character display 752, the operation method display 753, the operation content display 754, and the timer display 755 as display contents.

The selected character display 751 displays the currently selected character, that is, the changed character. On the screen 750, the selected character display 751 displays a tiger-like character, indicating that the currently selected character is a tiger-like character.

The option character display 752 displays selectable characters. Further, the option character display 752 displays the currently selected character in a distinguishable manner. On the screen 750, the choice character display 752 displays a tiger-like character, a pig-like character, and a lion-like character, and the tiger-like character, the pig-like character, and the lion. Indicates that such a character can be selected. Further, on the screen 750, the option character display 752 displays the background display of the tiger-like character so as to be distinguishable from the background display of other characters, and indicates that the currently selected character is a tiger-like character. ..

For example, when the display of the character selection screen is started (initial state), the gaming machine 10 starts from the state in which the currently set and currently set character before change is initially selected.

The operation method display 753 displays the operation method. On the screen 750, the operation method display 753 displays an image of the push button (option setting unit 25) to indicate that the character is selected by the push button.

The operation content display 754 displays the operation content. On the screen 750, the operation content display 754 indicates that the displayed screen is a character selection screen by displaying the message "Please select a favorite character".

The timer display 755 displays the operation time. On the screen 750, the timer display 755 displays a bar-type timer, and displays the remaining time of the selection operation according to the display mode of the displayed bar-type timer.

If the gaming machine 10 does not accept any operation from the player in the character selection effect, the game machine 10 may select the character used for the immediately preceding reach effect, or may use it for the immediately preceding reach effect. A character different from the character may be selected.

For example, the gaming machine 10 can promote the change of the character by selecting a character different from the character used for the immediately preceding reach effect, and can prevent the effect from getting bored.

It should be noted that the explanation is made using the case where the reach effect derives the deviation, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even when the reach effect derives a big hit, it is also possible to perform the character selection effect after notifying the result mode (big hit).

[Modification 1 of the third embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the first modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 128. In the first modification of the third embodiment, a part of the reach effect is replaced and the character selection effect is executed in the reach effect. The specific timing of the character selection effect will be described with reference to FIG. 128. FIG. 128 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart showing the timing at which the selection of the character of the modification 1 of the third embodiment can be accepted.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 128, the gaming machine 10 starts the symbol variation at the timing T11 and starts the Nth variation display, and is composed of a plurality of effect parts from the timing T12. Is started, and the timing T13 indicates that the reach effect (off) is finished.

When the character selection effect is not performed in the Nth variation display, the gaming machine 10 performs the effect 1, the effect 2, and the effect 3 in the reach effect (between the timing T12 and the timing T13).

On the other hand, when the game machine 10 performs the character selection effect in the Nth variation display, the game machine 10 performs the effect 1, the effect 3, and the character selection effect in the reach effect (between the timing T12 and the timing T13).

In this way, the gaming machine 10 replaces a part of the effect with the character selection effect (by omitting a part of the effect and adding the character selection effect), and instead of the reach effect, in the reach effect. Character selection effect can be performed (between timing T12 and timing T13).

[Modification 2 of the third embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the first modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 129. In the second modification of the third embodiment, the character selection effect is performed after the reach effect for deriving the loss based on the number of effects performed by the selected character (the number of reach effects or the number of reach effects for deriving the loss). Decide whether or not to do.

The flow of deciding whether or not to perform the character selection effect will be described with reference to FIG. 129. FIG. 129 is a diagram showing an example of a flowchart of the out-of-order effect setting process of the second modification of the third embodiment.

The off-effect setting process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300 in the effect display editing process of step D23 of the main process (FIG. 102). The loss effect setting process is a process for setting the effect mode of the reach effect for deriving the loss.

[Step D110] The control unit determines whether or not the number of times of effect executed by the currently selected character satisfies a predetermined condition.
For example, the control unit determines whether or not the number of effects executed by the currently selected character exceeds a predetermined number of times. Further, for example, the control unit determines whether or not the number of times of effect executed by the currently selected character is a predetermined number of times (10 times, 20 times, 30 times).

The control unit proceeds to step D111 when it is determined that the number of effects executed by the currently selected character satisfies the predetermined condition, and proceeds to step D112 when it is determined that the number of effects does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

[Step D111] The control unit sets an out-of-order effect mode with a character selection effect.
[Step D112] The control unit sets an out-of-order effect mode without a character selection effect.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can perform the character selection effect when the number of effects of the selected character satisfies a predetermined condition. That is, the gaming machine 10 can provide the player with an opportunity to select a character at the timing when the number of times the selected character is produced satisfies a predetermined condition. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the character selection effect from being excessively performed.

[Modification 3 of the third embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the third modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 130. In the third modification of the third embodiment, it is determined whether or not to perform the character selection effect after the reach effect that derives the deviation based on the effect history.

The flow of determining whether or not to perform the character selection effect will be described with reference to FIG. 130. FIG. 130 is a diagram showing an example of a flowchart of the out-of-order effect setting process of the modification 3 of the third embodiment.

The off-effect setting process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300 in the effect display editing process of step D23 of the main process (FIG. 102). The loss effect setting process is a process for setting the effect mode of the reach effect for deriving the loss.

[Step D120] The control unit evaluates the effect history.
[Step D121] The control unit determines whether or not the evaluation result satisfies a predetermined condition.
For example, the control unit evaluates the effect history and determines whether or not the effect recovery rate of the character (the ratio of the executed reach effect among the reach effects associated with the character) satisfies a certain ratio (predetermined condition). To judge.

The control unit proceeds to step D122 when it is determined that the evaluation result satisfies the predetermined condition, and proceeds to step D123 when it is determined that the evaluation result does not satisfy the predetermined condition.
[Step D122] The control unit sets an out-of-order effect mode with a character selection effect.

[Step D123] The control unit sets an out-of-order effect mode without a character selection effect.
In this way, the gaming machine 10 can perform the character selection effect when the effect history of the selected character satisfies a predetermined condition. That is, the gaming machine 10 can provide the player with an opportunity to select a character at the timing when the evaluation result of the effect history of the selected character satisfies a predetermined condition. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the character selection effect from being excessively performed.

[Modification 4 of the third embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the modified example 4 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 and 132. In the fourth modification of the third embodiment, the characters that can be selected on the character selection screen are different based on the pre-reading result. A flow of processing for different characters that can be selected on the character selection screen will be described with reference to FIG. 131. FIG. 131 is a diagram showing an example of a flowchart of the character selection effect setting process of the modification 4 of the third embodiment.

The character selection effect setting process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300 in the effect display editing process of step D23 of the main process (FIG. 102). The character selection effect setting process is a process for setting an effect mode of the character selection effect.

[Step D130] The control unit determines whether or not there is a big hit in the hold. The control unit proceeds to step D131 when it is determined that there is a big hit in the hold, and proceeds to step D132 when it is determined that there is no big hit in the hold.

[Step D131] The control unit sets a special option pattern including a special character as an option on the character selection screen.
[Step D132] The control unit sets a normal selection pattern that does not include a special character as a choice on the character selection screen.

In addition, although it was explained that a special option pattern is set when there is a big hit in the hold, it is not limited to this. The gaming machine 10 may have different options based on the hold look-ahead result. For example, a special option pattern may be set when there is a hold of a predetermined expected value or more.

Next, a character selection screen when a special character is included in the options will be described with reference to FIG. 132. FIG. 132 is a diagram (No. 1) showing an example of a screen displayed by the display device of the modification 4 of the third embodiment.

The screen 760 is a character selection screen that does not include a special character as an option, and the option character display 752 displays a character like a tiger, a character like a pig, and a character like a lion as options. Indicates the state of being.

Further, the screen 760 shows a screen which is a state (initial state) at the start of display of the character selection screen. That is, the screen 760 shows that the currently set character before change is a pig-like character.

The screen 761 is a character selection screen including a special character as a choice, and the choice character display 752 is a normal time (in addition to a character like a tiger, a character like a pig, and a character like a lion). The screen 760) shows a state in which a character such as a tiger wearing sunglasses, which is not displayed, is displayed as an option.

Further, the screen 761 shows a screen which is a state (initial state) at the start of display of the character selection screen. That is, the screen 761 shows that the currently set character before the change is a character like a tiger wearing sunglasses.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can make the characters that can be selected on the character selection screen different based on the pre-reading result. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can give the player a sense of expectation for the effect to be performed in the later variable display game.

Next, a modification of the selection screen will be described with reference to FIGS. 133, 134, and 135. FIG. 133 is a diagram (No. 2) showing an example of a screen displayed by the display device of the modification 4 of the third embodiment. FIG. 134 is a diagram (No. 3) showing an example of a screen displayed by the display device of the modification 4 of the third embodiment. FIG. 135 is a diagram (No. 4) showing an example of a screen displayed by the display device of the modification 4 of the third embodiment.

The screen 762 is a modification of the screen which is the state (initial state) at the start of the display of the character selection screen shown on the screen 760, and the character arrangement of the option character display 752 is the character before the change which is currently set. The screens arranged according to the corresponding arrangement are shown. On the screen 762, the option character display 752 displays the character as an option in the array in which the currently set character such as a pig (initial option), which is the character before the change, is arranged on the leftmost side.

The initial option refers to the option being selected when the option is presented. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can facilitate the selection operation by the player. For example, the gaming machine 10 sets the currently set option (character) as the initial option, so that the option other than the option currently set by one selection operation (for example, a left shift operation or a right shift operation of the option) is used. Can be selected. Further, the gaming machine 10 can select the currently set option by not performing the selection operation by setting the currently set option as the initial option.

The screen 763 is a modification of the screen which is the state (initial state) at the start of the display of the character selection screen shown on the screen 761, and the character arrangement of the option character display 752 is the character before the change which is currently set. The screens arranged according to the corresponding arrangement are shown. On the screen 763, the option character display 752 displays the character as an option in an array in which a tiger-like character (initial option) wearing sunglasses, which is the character before the change, which is currently set, is arranged on the leftmost side. are doing.

The screen 764 is a modification of the screen which is the state (initial state) at the start of the display of the character selection screen shown on the screen 761, and the character array of the option character display 752 is arranged according to the past character selection history. Shows the screen. On the screen 764, the option character display 752 is on the left side of the currently set character before the change, such as a tiger-like character wearing sunglasses (initial option), in the past (one before and two before). The selected character is displayed, and the unselected character is displayed on the right side.

Specifically, on the screen 764, the option character display 752 shows the character selected two times before, the character selected one before, the character currently set before change, and the character not selected. Characters that can be selected are displayed in an array arranged in order. Further, the option character display 752 displays a character selected in the past and an unselected character in a distinguishable manner.

By the way, since the player does not always select a character according to a predetermined rule (for example, in order from the left) when the character arrangement is fixed, if the option character display 752 fixes the character arrangement, You may not know which character you have not selected (which character has been selected). As a result, the player may mistakenly select an already selected character in an attempt to select an unselected character.

In this regard, if the options are displayed in an array corresponding to the character selection history as shown in the option character display 752 on the screen 764, the gaming machine 10 can easily make the player grasp the character selected in the past. In this way, the gaming machine 10 can assist the player in selecting a character by letting the player grasp the selection status.

In addition, on the screen 764, the option character display 752 displays the character selected up to two before as the character selected in the past, but the arrangement of the options may be determined based on the character selection history, and the present invention is not limited to this.

The character selection history may be a selection history during a series of big hits, a selection history from the previous customer waiting state, a selection history at a predetermined time, or a predetermined time. It may be a selection history up to several times ago.

The screen 765 is a modification of the screen which is the state (initial state) at the start of the display of the character selection screen shown on the screen 764, and the character array of the option character display 752 is arranged according to the past character selection history. At the same time, a screen showing a screen in which some of the options are hidden. On the screen 765, the option character display 752 displays the selected character in a distinguishable manner by increasing the size of the selected character by one size.

On the screen 765, the option character display 752 arranges the currently selected character (initial option) in the center, and displays the previously selected character on the left side and the unselected character on the right side.

Further, on the screen 765, the option character display 752 displays a part of the characters selected in the past and a part of the unselected characters so as not to be seen.
For example, in the option character display 752 on the screen 765, when the operator presses the left side of the push button, each option (each character) is slid to the right side by one. Specifically, a tiger-like character is selected (one size larger) and placed in the center, a human-like character is hidden, and a character like a pig is selected before the pig-like character. The character (located one on the left side) is displayed.

Further, in the option character display 752 on the screen 765, when the operator presses the right side of the push button, each option (each character) is slid to the left side by one. Specifically, a lion-like character is selected and placed in the center, a pig-like character is hidden, and an unselected character located to the right of one of the human-like characters is displayed. To.

The screen 766 is a music selection screen when the music is changed as a change of the effect mode, and shows a state (initial state) at the start of display of the music selection screen. The screen 766 includes a selected music display 751a, an optional music display 752a, an operation method display 753, an operation content display 754a, and a timer display 755 as display contents.

The selected music display 751a displays the currently selected music, that is, the changed music. On the screen 766, the selected music display 751a displays the currently set music before change (initial choice): AAA, and indicates that the currently selected music is AAA. At the time of music selection, the gaming machine 10 outputs the music selected by the selected music display 751a from the speakers 19a and 19b. As a result, the gaming machine 10 assists the player in selecting a musical piece.

The option music display 752a displays selectable music. Further, the option music display 752a displays the currently selected music in a distinguishable manner. Further, the option music display 752a displays the music selected in the past and the music not selected in the past so as to be distinguishable. On the screen 766, the option music display 752a displays music: BBB, music: CCC, music: AAA, and music: DDD, and displays "BBB", "CCC", "AAA", and "DDD". "And" can be selected as a song. Further, on the screen 766, the option music display 752a displays the music selected in the past (“BBB” and “CCC”) and the unselected music (“DDD”) in a distinguishable manner.

Further, on the screen 766, the operation content display 754a indicates that the displayed screen is the music selection screen by displaying the message "Please select a favorite music".
The screen 767 is a notification pattern selection screen when the notification pattern is changed as a change of the effect mode, and shows a state (initial state) at the start of display of the notification pattern selection screen. The screen 767 includes a selection notification pattern display 751b, an option notification pattern display 752b, an operation method display 753, an operation content display 754b, and a timer display 755 as display contents.

The selected notification pattern display 751b displays the currently selected notification pattern, that is, the changed notification pattern.
On the screen 767, the selected notification pattern display 751b displays "complete notification" which is the currently set notification pattern before change (initial option), and the currently selected notification pattern notifies up to the fluctuation result such as a big hit. Indicates that it is a complete announcement.

The option notification pattern display 752b displays selectable notification patterns. Further, the option notification pattern display 752b displays the currently selected notification pattern in a distinguishable manner. On the screen 767, the option notification pattern display 752a displays chance notification, complete notification, and no notification, and "chance notification", "complete notification", and "no notification" can be selected as the notification pattern. Show that there is.

Further, on the screen 767, the operation content display 754b indicates that the screen being displayed is the notification pattern selection screen by displaying the message "Please select a favorite notification pattern".

It should be noted that, as the change of the effect mode, the change of the character, the change of the music, and the change of the notification pattern have been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a change of the effect mode, it is possible to change the decoration mode, the presence / absence of the effect of the board effect device 44, and the like.

[Variation Example 5 of the Third Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the modified example 5 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 136. In the fifth modification of the third embodiment, the characters that can be selected on the character selection screen are different based on the number of effects (the number of reach effects or the number of reach effects for deriving the loss).

A flow of processing for different characters that can be selected on the character selection screen will be described with reference to FIG. 136. FIG. 136 is a diagram showing an example of a flowchart of the character selection effect setting process of the modification 5 of the third embodiment.

The character selection effect setting process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300 in the effect display editing process of step D23 of the main process (FIG. 102). The character selection effect setting process is a process for setting an effect mode of the character selection effect.

[Step D140] The control unit determines whether or not the number of times of effect satisfies a predetermined condition. The control unit proceeds to step D141 when it is determined that the number of times of effect satisfies the predetermined condition, and proceeds to step D142 when it is determined that the number of times of effect does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

[Step D141] The control unit sets a special option pattern including a special character as an option on the character selection screen.
[Step D142] The control unit sets a normal selection pattern that does not include a special character as a choice on the character selection screen.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can make the characters that can be selected on the character selection screen different based on the number of times of production.
By making it possible to select a special character according to the number of effects in this way, the gaming machine 10 can increase the value of the reach effect for deriving the loss (adding value to the reach effect for deriving the loss).

[Variation Example 6 of the Third Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the modification 6 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 137. In the sixth modification of the third embodiment, the characters that can be selected on the character selection screen are different based on the effect history. The flow of the process of making the selectable characters different on the character selection screen will be described with reference to FIG. 137. FIG. 137 is a diagram showing an example of a flowchart of the character selection effect setting process of the modification 6 of the third embodiment.

The character selection effect setting process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300 in the effect display editing process of step D23 of the main process (FIG. 102). The character selection effect setting process is a process for setting an effect mode of the character selection effect.

[Step D150] The control unit evaluates the effect history.
[Step D151] The control unit determines whether or not the evaluation result satisfies a predetermined condition.
The control unit proceeds to step D152 when it is determined that the evaluation result satisfies the predetermined condition, and proceeds to step D153 when it is determined that the evaluation result does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

[Step D152] The control unit sets a special option pattern including a special character as an option on the character selection screen.
[Step D153] The control unit sets a normal selection pattern that does not include a special character as a choice on the character selection screen.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can make the characters that can be selected on the character selection screen different based on the effect history.
By making it possible to select a special character based on the effect history in this way, the gaming machine 10 can increase the value of the reach effect for deriving the loss (adding value to the reach effect for deriving the loss).

[Modification 7 of the third embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the modified example 7 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 138 and 139. In the modification 7 of the third embodiment, the characters that can be selected on the character selection screen are different depending on the character that is currently selected. First, FIG. 138 will be described. FIG. 138 is a diagram showing an example of a flowchart of the character selection effect setting process of the modification 7 of the third embodiment.

The character selection effect setting process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300 in the effect display editing process of step D23 of the main process (FIG. 102). The character selection effect setting process is a process for setting an effect mode of the character selection effect.

[Step D160] The control unit acquires a selection pattern corresponding to the currently selected character.
[Step D161] The control unit sets the acquired option pattern as an option on the character selection screen.

Next, the correspondence between the currently selected character and the options will be described with reference to FIG. 139. FIG. 139 is a diagram showing an example of options according to the character being selected in the modification 7 of the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 139, when the selected character is character 770 (character like a tiger), character 770, character 771 (character like pig), and character 772 (character like lion). ) And character 773 (a tiger-like character wearing sunglasses) are options. That is, when the character 770 is selected, the gaming machine 10 acquires an option pattern in which the character 770, the character 771, the character 772, and the character 773 are selected.

When the selected character is the character 771, the character 770, the character 771, and the character 772 are options. That is, when the character 771 is selected, the gaming machine 10 acquires an option pattern in which the character 770, the character 771 and the character 772 are selected.

When the selected character is the character 772, the character 770, the character 771, and the character 772 are options. That is, when the character 772 is selected, the gaming machine 10 acquires an option pattern in which the character 770, the character 771 and the character 772 are selected.

If the selected character is the character 773, the character 770 and the character 773 are options. That is, when the character 773 is selected, the gaming machine 10 acquires an option pattern in which the character 770 and the character 773 are selected. The above is the correspondence between the selected character and the options.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can make the characters that can be selected on the character selection screen different depending on the character being selected.
The gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment described above (including the modified examples 1 to 7) has the following features on one side.

(1) The gaming machine 10 includes effect means (display device 41), operation reception means (option setting unit 25: push button), and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The effect means can produce a variable display game in one effect mode set from two or more effect modes (characters). The operation receiving means can receive the player's operation. The control means derives the result mode (missing) while leaving a predetermined operation selection time (T13 to T14 in FIG. 126) in the fluctuation time in the fluctuation display game, and accepts the player operation in the selection operation time. One of the above effect modes is set.

(2) The gaming machine 10 includes effect means (display device 41), operation reception means (option setting unit 25: push button), and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The effect means can produce a variable display game in one effect mode set from two or more effect modes (characters). The operation receiving means can receive the player's operation. The control means derives the result mode (missing) while leaving a predetermined selection operation time within the variable time in the variable display game, accepts the player operation, and sets one of the two or more production modes. do. When the control means presents two or more effect modes that are options in the selection operation time, the currently set effect mode is used as the initial option.

[Fourth Embodiment]
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment delays the notification of the occurrence of a high-probability state based on the inflow of the gaming ball into the V flow path 955a in the special gaming state from the detection time instead of the detection time of the specific area switch 460. Do it at the right time. The gaming machine 10 is set to a high probability state based on the detection of the gaming ball by the specific area switch 460.

First, the hit corresponding to the special gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. 140. FIG. 140 is a diagram showing an example of performance for each hit of the fourth embodiment. The gaming machine 10 includes "hit A" and "hit B" as hit types.

The hit A has no probability fluctuation, that is, the probability state after the end of the hit is a low probability state. Further, in the hit A, the number of rounds during the hit is "9 (9R)". Further, in the hit A, the short opening with a relatively short opening time is 6R, and the long opening with a relatively long opening time is 3R, so that the actual number of rounds is "3 (3R)".

The hit B has a probability fluctuation, that is, a high probability state in which the probability state after the end of the hit is higher than the low probability state. In addition, the number of rounds hit B and hit is "9 (9R)". Further, as for the hit B, the short opening with a relatively short opening time is 3R, and the long opening with a relatively long opening time is 6R, so that the actual number of rounds is "6 (6R)".

Therefore, the hit B is a hit that is more valuable to the player than the hit A because the actual number of rounds is large in terms of the number of prize balls won. Further, the hit B is a hit having a higher value for the player than the hit A because the hit B is in a high probability state from the viewpoint of the probability state after the hit is completed.

The high probability state is based on the fact that the game ball passes through a specific area. Since it is difficult for the hit A to pass through a specific area of the game ball, there is a high probability that the hit A will be in a low probability state, and the high probability state is not denied. Further, since the hit B is easy to pass through a specific area of the game ball, there is a high probability that the hit B will be in a high probability state, and the high probability state is not guaranteed.

Here, the game progress of the hit A will be described with reference to FIG. 141. FIG. 141 is a timing table showing an example of the game progress of the hit A in the fourth embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 enters a fanfare state due to the occurrence of hit A, then shifts to round 1, advances to round 9 while advancing the round with an interval, and then ends hit A through the ending.

The hit A performs a fanfare effect in a fanfare state in a time of 10,000 ms. For hit A, 1R is set to a short opening of 100 ms. The hit A opens the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) for 100 ms in 1R, and opens the V door 520 at a predetermined timing to create a winning opportunity for the specific area switch 460. However, it is difficult to win a prize in the specific area switch 460 in the hit A. Depending on whether or not the specific area switch 460 is won, the gaming machine 10 determines whether to produce a winning A (V winning) or a winning A (V non-winning).

For hit A, 2R to 4R are set to a long opening of 25,000 ms, and subsequent 5R to 9R are set to a short opening of 100 ms. That is, the hit A has a real number of rounds of "3". Further, for the hit A, the interval between 1R and 2R is set to 2000 ms, which is longer than the interval period of 1000 ms between 2R and 9R.

As for the production of hit A (V prize), the bonus production is from 1R to 3R, and the interval after 3R and 4R are V prize production. That is, in the production of the hit A (V winning), the occurrence of the high probability state is notified at a timing delayed from the game ball detection time instead of the game ball detection time of the specific area switch 460. The winning A (V prize) production will be performed from the interval after 4R to 9R, including the ending state of 2700ms.

On the other hand, the production of hit A (V non-winning) is a bonus production from 1R to 4R. The hit A (V non-winning) production will be performed from the interval after 4R to 9R, including the ending state of 2700ms.

Next, the game progress of the hit B will be described with reference to FIG. 142. FIG. 142 is a timing table showing an example of the game progress of the hit B in the fourth embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 enters a fanfare state due to the occurrence of hit B, then shifts to round 1, advances to round 9 while advancing the round with an interval, and then ends hit B through the ending.

Hit B performs a fanfare effect in a fanfare state in a time of 10,000 ms. For hit B, 1R is set to a long opening of 25,000 ms. However, the opening mode is anomalous, and the details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 144. The hit B opens the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) for a long time at 1R, and opens the V door 520 at a predetermined timing to create a winning opportunity for the specific area switch 460. However, it is easy to win a prize in the specific area switch 460 in the hit B. Depending on whether or not the specific area switch 460 is won, the gaming machine 10 determines whether to produce a winning B (V winning) or a winning B (V non-winning).

For hit B, 1R to 6R are set to a long opening of 25,000 ms, and subsequent 7R to 9R are set to a short opening of 100 ms. That is, the hit B has a real number of rounds of "6". Further, for the hit B, the interval between 1R and 2R is set to 2000 ms, which is longer than the interval period of 1000 ms between 2R and 9R.

The winning B (V winning) production is a bonus production from 1R to 2R, and the interval after 2R and 3R are V winning productions. That is, in the production of the hit B (V winning), the occurrence of the high probability state is notified at a timing delayed from the game ball detection time instead of the game ball detection time of the specific area switch 460. As for the production of hit B (V prize), the bonus production is performed again from the interval after 3R to 6R, and the ending production including the ending state of 2700ms is performed from the interval after 6R to 9R.

On the other hand, in the production of hit B (V non-winning), 1R to 2R are bonus productions, and the interval after 2R and 3R are V non-winning productions. As for the production of hit B (V non-winning), the bonus effect is performed again from the interval after 3R to 6R, and the ending effect is performed from the interval after 6R to 9R, including the ending state of 2700 ms.

Next, the jackpot command of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 143. FIG. 143 is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot command list according to the fourth embodiment.
The game control device 100 transmits an effect command to the effect control device 300 by serial communication using the serial communication function of the CPU 111A. The effect control device 300 receives the effect command and performs a required game effect. The effect control device 300 can execute the process corresponding to the effect command received in the jackpot command process (see FIG. 104) in step D58 of the received command analysis process.

The effect command (reception command) has a configuration including MODE data (1 byte) and ACTION data (1 byte).
The jackpot command includes a fanfare command, a big winning opening opening nth command, an interval command, and an ending command. The fanfare command is designated by MODE "81H" and ACTION "01H". The nth command for opening the winning opening is designated by either MODE "82H" and either ACTION "01H" to "09H" according to the number of rounds "n". The interval command is specified by MODE "83H" and ACTION "01H". The ending command is specified by MODE "84H" and ACTION "01H".

Next, the large winning opening opening mode in 1R and 2R of hit A and the large winning opening opening mode in 1R of hit B will be described with reference to FIG. 144. FIG. 144 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart showing a large winning opening opening mode in 1R and 2R of hit A and a large winning opening opening mode in 1R of hit B according to the fourth embodiment.

Hit A receives the first command to open the big winning opening at timing t11, opens the big winning opening (special variable winning device 38), opens the V door 520 at the required timing, and does not switch to the specific area switch 460. Provide an easy winning opportunity. The hit A receives the interval command at the timing t12 and closes the big winning opening. As a result, the winning A opens the large winning opening for the period Ta (for example, 100 ms). When the winning A detects the winning of the required number (for example, 9) of game balls by the elapse of the period Ta, the hit A receives the interval command without waiting for the elapse of the period Ta. Hit A receives the second command to open the big winning opening at timing t13, and opens the big winning opening. As a result, the winning A closes the large winning opening for the period Tb (for example, 2000 ms). In addition, the hit A does not provide a winning opportunity to the specific area switch 460 after 2R. The hit A receives the interval command at the timing t14 and closes the big winning opening. As a result, the winning A opens the large winning opening for the period Tc (for example, 25,000 ms). When the winning A detects the winning of the required number (for example, 9) of game balls by the elapse of the period Tc, the hit A receives the interval command without waiting for the elapse of the period Tc.

In this way, in the hit A, the gaming machine 10 opens the big winning opening of the period Tc after opening the big winning opening of the period Ta from the hit start (1R) and then closing the big winning opening of the period Tb (interval). To do.

Hit B receives the first command to open the big winning opening at timing t11, opens the big winning opening (special variable winning device 38), opens the V door 520 at the required timing, and easily to the specific area switch 460. Provide a good winning opportunity. The hit B closes the big winning opening at the timing t12. As a result, the winning B opens the large winning opening for the period Ta (for example, 100 ms). Hit B opens the big prize opening at timing t13. As a result, the winning B closes the large winning opening for the period Tb (for example, 2000 ms). The hit B receives the interval command at the timing t15 and closes the big winning opening. As a result, the winning B opens the large winning opening for the period Td (for example, 22900 (= 25000-100-2000) ms). When the winning B detects the winning of the required number (for example, 9) of game balls from the timing t11 to the timing t15, the hit B receives the interval command without waiting for the timing t15. In addition, the hit B does not provide a winning opportunity to the specific area switch 460 after 2R.

In this way, in the hit B, the gaming machine 10 passes through the big winning opening opening (waiting) of the period Tb after the opening of the big winning opening of the period Ta (the first opening of 1R) from the hit start (1R). The big prize opening of the period Td will be opened (the second opening of 1R).

As a result, the gaming machine 10 has a large winning opening opening mode from timing t11 to timing t14 (1R, interval (between 1R2R), and 2R) of hit A, and opening from timing t11 to timing t15 of hit B (1R first opening). , Weight, and 1R 2nd opening) can be the same as the opening mode of the large winning opening.

For example, in the gaming machine 10, the opening timing of the large winning opening and the closing timing of the large winning opening are the same for the 1R opening of the hit A and the 1R first opening of the hit B. Further, in the gaming machine 10, the interval between 1R and 2R of the hit A and the 1R weight of the hit B have the same timing of closing the large winning opening and opening the large winning opening. Naturally, the interval time between 1R and 2R of hit A and the 1R wait time of hit B are the same.

Further, the gaming machine 10 hides the round correspondence display between the timing t11 and the timing t13 after the hit A and the hit B both occur, and displays the round correspondence display after the timing t13. The round correspondence display is a display corresponding to the number of rounds. The round-compatible display is displayed abstractly instead of clearly indicating the number of rounds. The round-compatible display will be described in detail later.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can make it difficult to distinguish between the hit A and the hit B from the comparison between the opening of the big winning opening of the hit A and the opening of the big winning opening of the hit B. Further, the gaming machine 10 does not perform V notification (high probability state transition notice) at the time when the specific area switch 460 detects the gaming ball in both the hit A and the hit B. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can make it difficult for the player to grasp the winning value until the V winning effect or the V non-winning effect is performed (after the end of 2R).

Next, the relationship between the reception timing of the nth command for opening the large winning opening and the display timing of the round correspondence display will be described with reference to FIG. 145. FIG. 145 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart showing the reception timing of the nth command for opening the large winning opening of the fourth embodiment and the display timing of the round correspondence display.

FIG. 145 (1) shows the relationship between the reception timing of the second command for opening the large winning opening in A and the display timing of the round correspondence display. The gaming machine 10 receives the second command for opening the large winning opening for the hit A at the timing t13. When the hit in progress is hit A, the gaming machine 10 displays the round correspondence with the reception of the second command for opening the large winning opening.

FIG. 145 (2) shows the relationship between the reception timing of the first command for opening the large winning opening in B and the display timing of the round correspondence display. The gaming machine 10 receives the first command for opening the big winning opening for the hit B at the timing t11. When the ongoing hit is a hit B, the gaming machine 10 performs a round correspondence display at the timing t13 when a set time (for example, 2100 ms) has elapsed from the reception of the first command for opening the large winning opening.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can display the round correspondence from the same timing t13 at the hit A and the hit B.
Next, the display screen during the hit (hit A and hit B) in the display device 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 146 and 147. FIG. 146 is a diagram showing an example (No. 1) of a screen displayed by the display device of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 147 is a diagram showing an example (No. 2) of a screen displayed by the display device of the fourth embodiment.

The display screen 1000 shown in FIG. 146 (1) is a display screen in a fanfare state, and displays a fanfare effect common to hit A and hit B. The display screen 1000 includes a bonus name 1001 which is a winning name in the production. The bonus name 1001 displays a large hit name (for example, "X bonus") on the screen, which is common to the hit A and the hit B.

The display screen 1002 shown in FIG. 146 (2) is a display screen following the display screen 1000 in the fanfare state, and includes a striking direction guidance display 1003. The striking direction guidance display 1003 guides the player that the striking direction is the right-handed gaming area (right-handed striking) by displaying a large arrow pointing to the right on the screen.

The display screen 1004 shown in FIG. 146 (3) shows the 1R opening (short opening) of the hit A and the interval period following it, and the first opening (short opening) of the 1R of the hit B and the subsequent wait period. It is a screen. The display screen 1004 includes a bonus name 1005, a striking direction guidance display 1006, and a game explanation display 1007. The bonus name 1005 displays a winning name (for example, "X bonus") that is common to both the hit A and the hit B. The display screen 1004 displays the bonus name 1005 for confirmation, which is smaller in the corner of the screen than the well-known bonus name 1001. The striking direction guidance display 1006 informs the player that the striking direction is the right gaming area. The display screen 1004 displays the striking direction guidance display 1006 in the corner of the screen for confirmation as compared with the well-known striking direction guidance display 1003. The game description display 1007 describes a mini-game for a V winning effect or a V non-winning effect. For example, the game explanation display 1007 displays "Put a ball in the attacker and collect the meter!" As a message. The game explanation display 1007 may explain the mini-game by means of pictograms, still images, moving images, and the like.

The display screen 1008 shown in FIG. 146 (4) is a display screen in the period after the 2R opening (long opening) of the hit A and the period after the second opening (long opening) of the 1R of the hit B. That is, the display screen 1008 is a display screen during execution of the mini game described in the display screen 1004 (during bonus production). The display screen 1008 includes a bonus name 1005, a striking direction guidance display 1006, a round correspondence display 1009, an effect display 1010, and a meter display 1011.

The round-corresponding display 1009 displays a symbol (for example, a star-shaped display) corresponding to the round. The display screen 1008 shows three symbols in the round correspondence display 1009, and guides at least the number of remaining rounds currently presented and the current round. For example, the hatched symbol corresponds to the running round, and the solid white symbol corresponds to the scheduled round. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can guide the progress of the round without specifying the specific number of rounds. Further, the gaming machine 10 can make it difficult to discriminate between the hit A and the hit B at different timings for starting the round correspondence display 1009. Further, the gaming machine 10 can make it difficult to distinguish between the hit A and the hit B, which have different substantially different numbers of rounds.

The effect display 1010 produces a mini game by displaying characters, effects, and the like. The meter display 1011 includes a 16-step meter and a patrol lamp for notifying the success of the mini game. The 16-step meter is turned off in the initial state, and the predetermined step is turned on for each prize in the big winning opening, and the mini game is successful with all the lights.

The display screen 1012 shown in FIG. 147 (1) is a display screen during execution of a mini game (during bonus effect), and is a display screen following the display screen 1008. The display screen 1012 includes a bonus name 1005, a striking direction guidance display 1006, a round correspondence display 1009, an effect display 1010, and a meter display 1011. The meter display 1011 on the display screen 1012 indicates that the mini-game is in progress, that is, four of the 16 steps are lit based on the winning of the big winning opening.

The display screen 1014 shown in FIG. 147 (2) is a display screen when a V prize is won. The display screen 1014 is a display screen during the V winning effect, and is a display screen following the display screen 1012. The display screen 1014 includes a bonus name 1005, a striking direction guidance display 1006, a round correspondence display 1009, an effect display 1010, and a meter display 1011. The round correspondence display 1009 on the display screen 1014 guides the round progress by updating the symbol of the hatch display to the symbol of the broken line white display and updating one of the symbols of the solid line white display to the symbol of the hatch display. The meter display 1011 on the display screen 1014 indicates that the mini game is successful, that is, 16 of the 16 steps are lit based on the winning of the big winning opening, and the patrol lamp notifies the success of the mini game.

The display screen 1016 shown in FIG. 147 (3) is a display screen during the V winning effect, and is a display screen following the display screen 1014. The display screen 1016 includes a bonus name 1005, a striking direction guidance display 1006, a round correspondence display 1009, and a V passage notification display 1017. The V passage notification display 1017 guides the V passage (V winning). For example, the V passage notification display 1017 displays a pictogram “V”. The V-passage notification display 1017 may guide the V-passage by means of a message, a still image, a moving image, or the like.

The display screen 1018 shown in FIG. 147 (4) is a display screen during the bonus effect after the V winning effect in the hit B. In addition, since the winning A shifts to the ending after the V winning effect even if there is a V winning effect, there is no bonus effect after the V winning effect.

The display screen 1018 is a display screen following the display screen 1016. The display screen 1018 includes a bonus name 1005, a striking direction guidance display 1006, a round correspondence display 1009, and an effect display 1010. The round correspondence display 1009 on the display screen 1018 guides the round progress by updating the symbol of the hatch display to the symbol of the broken line white display and updating one of the symbols of the solid line white display to the symbol of the hatch display.

The gaming machine 10 makes it difficult to distinguish between the hit A and the hit B by setting a common effect for the hit A and the hit B, and sets a time lag for the notification regarding the probability fluctuation. It may include a big hit without setting a time lag. For example, the gaming machine 10 includes a hit C in which a time lag is not set for the notification regarding the probability fluctuation.

Here, the display screen in the hit C in the display device 41 will be described with reference to FIG. 148. FIG. 148 is a diagram showing an example (No. 3) of a screen displayed by the display device of the fourth embodiment.

The display screen 1020 shown in FIG. 148 (1) is a display screen in the fanfare state, and displays the fanfare effect of the hit C. The display screen 1020 includes a bonus name 1021 which is a winning name in the production. The bonus name 1021 displays the winning name (for example, "V bonus") in the production of the hit C in a large size on the screen.

The display screen 1022 shown in FIG. 148 (2) is a display screen following the display screen 1020 in the fanfare state, and includes a striking direction guidance display 1023. The striking direction guidance display 1023 guides the player that the striking direction is the right-sided gaming area (right-handed striking) by displaying a large arrow pointing to the right on the screen.

The display screen 1024 shown in FIG. 148 (3) is a display screen in the 1R open period of the hit A. The display screen 1024 includes a bonus name 1025, a striking direction guidance display 1026, and a game explanation display 1027. The bonus name 1025 displays the winning name (for example, "V bonus") in the production of the hit C. The display screen 1024 displays the bonus name 1025 for confirmation, which is smaller in the corner of the screen than the well-known bonus name 1021. The striking direction guidance display 1026 informs the player that the striking direction is the right gaming area. The display screen 1024 displays the striking direction guidance display 1026 in the corner of the screen for confirmation as compared with the well-known striking direction guidance display 1023. The game explanation display 1027 explains that it is the timing to aim at V (specific area switch 460). For example, the game description display 1027 displays "Aim for V" as a message. The game explanation display 1027 may explain the mini game by a pictogram, a still image, a moving image, or the like.

The display screen 1028 shown in FIG. 148 (4) is a display screen following the display screen 1024. The display screen 1028 includes a bonus name 1025, a striking direction guidance display 1026, a round correspondence display 1029, and a V passage notification display 1027. The round correspondence display 1029 guides the round progress in the same manner as the round correspondence display 1009. The round correspondence display 1029 is different from the round correspondence display 1009 in that four symbols are displayed, but the number of symbols to be displayed may be changed according to the type of hit and the progress of the effect. The V-passage notification display 1030 guides V-passage (V winning) in the same manner as the V-passage notification display 1017.

Next, the correspondence relationship between the round correspondence display and the round will be described with reference to FIG. 149. FIG. 149 is a diagram showing an example of the correspondence relationship between the round correspondence display and the round of the fourth embodiment.

The correspondence table shown in FIG. 149 (1) shows an example of the correspondence between the display mode of the round correspondence display 1009 having three symbols and the number of rounds of hit A and hit B. The display mode 1009a corresponds to 2R at the hit A and 1R at the hit B. In the display mode 1009a, three symbols are arranged in a vertical row and the first symbol from the top is hatched to indicate the corresponding round, and the second and third symbols are displayed in solid white and there are two undigested rounds. Show that. The display mode 1009b corresponds to 3R at the hit A and 2R at the hit B. In the display mode 1009b, three symbols are arranged in a vertical row and the second symbol from the top is hatched to indicate the corresponding round, and the first symbol is displayed in dashed white to indicate that there is one digested round. The third symbol is displayed in solid white to indicate that there is one undigested round. The display mode 1009c corresponds to 4R at hit A and corresponds to 3R at hit B. In the display mode 1009c, three symbols are arranged in a vertical row and the third symbol from the top is hatched to indicate the corresponding round, and the first and second symbols are displayed in dashed white and there are two digested rounds. Is shown.

That is, even if the gaming machine 10 displays rounds in the same display mode, the number of corresponding rounds can be different depending on the type of hit. In other words, the gaming machine 10 can display a predetermined number of round-corresponding displays in a display mode according to the hit type.

The hit B may be displayed in the same manner as in 1R, 2R, and 3R for 4R, 5R, and 6R. Further, in the round corresponding to the short opening, the round corresponding display 1009 can be hidden.

The correspondence table shown in FIG. 149 (2) shows an example of the correspondence between the display mode of the round correspondence display 1009 having four symbols and the number of rounds of hit A and hit B. The display mode 1009d does not correspond to the hit A, but corresponds to 1R in the hit B. In the display mode 1009d, four symbols are arranged in a vertical row and the first symbol from the top is hatched to indicate the corresponding round, and the second, third and fourth symbols are displayed in solid white to indicate the undigested round. It shows that there are three. In the display mode 1009e, both the hit A and the hit B correspond to 2R. In the display mode 1009e, four symbols are arranged in a vertical row and the second symbol from the top is hatched to indicate the corresponding round, and the first symbol is displayed in dashed white to indicate that there is one digested round. The third and fourth symbols are displayed in solid white to indicate that there are two undigested rounds. The display mode 1009f corresponds to 3R in both the hit A and the hit B. In the display mode 1009f, four symbols are arranged in a vertical row and the third symbol from the top is hatched to indicate the corresponding round, and the first and second symbols are displayed in broken white and there are two digested rounds. The fourth symbol is displayed in solid white to indicate that there is one undigested round. The display mode 1009 g corresponds to 4R in both the hit A and the hit B. In the display mode 1009g, four symbols are arranged in a vertical row and the fourth symbol from the top is hatched to indicate the corresponding round, and the first, second and third symbols are displayed in broken white and the digested round is 3. Indicates that there is one.

That is, when the gaming machines 10 display rounds in the same display mode, the corresponding number of rounds matches regardless of the type of hit. In other words, the gaming machine 10 can display a predetermined number of round-corresponding displays in a common display mode for a plurality of hit types.

The gaming machine 10 can hide the round correspondence display of a predetermined number of rounds for some hit types. For example, the round-corresponding display corresponding to 1R of the hit A is hidden. The gaming machine 10 can hide the round-corresponding display when the corresponding round is in a specific opening mode (for example, short opening or the like).

Next, instead of not specifying the rounds, the unit conversion round number display for guiding the player to the guideline of the cumulative number of rounds will be described with reference to FIG. 150. FIG. 150 is a diagram showing an example of a correspondence relationship between the number of rounds and the number of unit conversion rounds of the fourth embodiment.

FIG. 150 (1) shows a correspondence table between the actual number of rounds and the number of unit conversion rounds. The winning type "hit A" is the number of rounds (formal number of rounds) "9", but the number of rounds with short opening of the big winning opening is "6" and the number of rounds with opening of the big winning opening is "3". Therefore, the actual number of rounds (corresponding to the number of rounds with a large winning opening) is "3". Instead of guiding the player to the actual number of rounds "3", the gaming machine 10 guides the player to the unit conversion round number "1 gao" corresponding to the actual number of rounds "3".

Similarly, the winning type "hit B" is the number of rounds (formal number of rounds) "9", but the number of rounds with short opening of the big winning opening is "3" and the number of rounds with opening of the big winning opening is "3". Since it is "6", the actual number of rounds (corresponding to the number of rounds with a large winning opening) is "6". Instead of guiding the player to the actual number of rounds "6", the gaming machine 10 guides the player to the unit conversion round number "2 gao" corresponding to the actual number of rounds "6".

As a result, the gaming machine 10 makes it possible to evaluate the value of winning in a unit different from the number of formal rounds and the actual number of rounds.
FIG. 150 (2) shows a history table of the number of unit conversion rounds displayed corresponding to the hit. The history table includes a series of hit histories from the first to the fourth. The first hit is the hit type "hit B", and the hit B is the unit conversion round number display "2 gao" according to the correspondence table shown in FIG. 150 (1). In addition, in order to promote and display the winning value, the gaming machine 10 once displays the unit conversion round number display "1 gao" and then displays the unit conversion round number display "2 gao". Since the second hit is the hit type "hit B", the gaming machine 10 accumulates the unit conversion round number display "2 gao" and displays the unit conversion round number "3 gao" and "4 gao". indicate. The third hit is the hit type "hit A", and the hit A is the unit conversion round number display "1 gao" according to the correspondence table shown in FIG. 150 (1). The gaming machine 10 accumulates on the unit conversion round number display "4 gao", which is a matter of course, and displays the unit conversion round number display "5 gao". Since the fourth hit is the hit type "hit B", the gaming machine 10 accumulates the unit conversion round number display "5 gao" and displays the unit conversion round number display "6 gao".

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can easily grasp the value of the number of rounds acquired by the cumulative hit. In addition, the gaming machine 10 makes it easy to grasp the value of each of the cumulative hits. For example, some conventional gaming machines accumulate and display the number of rounds themselves and the number of prize balls that can be acquired, but it is not easy to grasp the magnitude of the acquired value.

Also, when displaying the number of rounds, displaying the formal number of rounds does not show the value that can be obtained, which may confuse the player, and displaying the actual number of rounds may be different from the current gaming state. It can be confusing to the player. Displaying the formal number of rounds and the actual number of rounds in parallel can be even more confusing to the player. In that respect, the unit conversion round number display has few points that give the player a misunderstanding, and can easily guide the winning value and the winning progress.

Next, the unit conversion round number display will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 and 152. FIG. 151 is a diagram showing an example (No. 4) of a screen displayed by the display device of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 152 is a diagram showing an example (No. 5) of a screen displayed by the display device of the fourth embodiment.

The display screen 1100 shown in FIG. 151 (1) is a display screen during bonus production, and is a common display screen for hit A and hit B. The display screen 1100 includes a bonus name 1101, a striking direction guidance display 1102, a round correspondence display 1103, a unit conversion display 1104, and an effect display 1105. The bonus name 1101 displays a winning name (for example, "X bonus") that is common to both the hit A and the hit B. The hitting direction guidance display 1102 guides the player that the hitting direction is the right gaming area. The round-corresponding display 1103 displays a symbol (for example, a star-shaped display) corresponding to the round. The round correspondence display 1103 displays three symbols and acquires the actual number of rounds "3", and indicates that one of the rounds is being executed. The gaming machine 10 does not need to clarify whether the hit type is hit A or hit B. The unit conversion display (display of the number of unit conversion rounds) 1104 is converted into a numerical value "1 (= 3/3)" numerically converted by a 1/3 conversion formula prepared in advance in response to the acquisition of the actual number of rounds "3". The unit "gao" is attached and "1 gao" is displayed. The effect display 1105 produces a hit by displaying a character, an effect, or the like.

The display screen 1106 shown in FIG. 151 (2) is a display screen during the bonus effect, and is a display screen following the display screen 1100. The round correspondence display 1103 additionally displays three symbols corresponding to the round. The gaming machine 10 does not need to clarify whether the hit type is hit A or hit B, and further whether the hits are continuous. For example, when the hit type is hit A, six symbols can be displayed by two consecutive hits A, and when the hit type is hit B, six symbols can be displayed by one hit B. Can be displayed. It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 does not need to reset the round correspondence display for each hit when the hits are continuous. Further, the gaming machine 10 may reset the round correspondence display for each hit or in a predetermined case when the hits are continuous. The round-corresponding display 1103 displays 6 symbols, and indicates that 3 rounds have been digested and the actual number of rounds "3" is acquired, of which 1 round is being executed. The unit conversion display 1104 adds the conversion unit "Gaoh" to the numerical value "2 (= 6/3)" that has been numerically converted by the 1/3 conversion formula prepared in advance in response to the additional acquisition of the actual number of rounds "3". Then, "2 Gao" is displayed.

The display screen 1108 shown in FIG. 151 (3) is a display screen during the bonus effect, and is a display screen following the display screen 1106. The round correspondence display 1103 additionally displays three symbols corresponding to the round. The round-corresponding display 1103 displays nine symbols, six rounds have been digested, and the actual number of rounds "3" has been obtained, one of which is in progress. The unit conversion display 1104 shown on the display screen 1108 is converted into a numerical value "3 (= 9/3)" numerically converted by a 1/3 conversion formula prepared in advance in response to the additional acquisition of the actual number of rounds "3". "3 Gao" is displayed with "Gao" attached.

The display screen 1110 shown in FIG. 151 (4) is another example of the display screen 1108, and is a display screen following the display screen 1106. The round correspondence display 1103 additionally displays six symbols corresponding to the round. In this way, the gaming machine 10 can make the number of symbols to be additionally displayed variable. For example, the gaming machine 10 can add 6 symbols at a time at the time of hit B, or can add 6 symbols in 2 times of 3 each. The gaming machine 10 may arbitrarily set the addition unit and the number of additions of the symbol according to the hit type. The round-corresponding display 1103 displays 12 symbols, and indicates that 6 rounds have been digested, the actual number of rounds is "6", and one of the rounds is in progress. The unit conversion display 1104 shown on the display screen 1110 is converted into a numerical value "4 (= 12/3)" numerically converted by a 1/3 conversion formula prepared in advance in response to the additional acquisition of the actual number of rounds "6". "4 Gao" is displayed with "Gao" attached.

The display screen 1112 shown in FIG. 152 (1) is a display screen during the bonus effect, and is a display screen following the display screen 1108 or the display screen 1110. The round correspondence display 1103 once resets the previously displayed symbol, and then displays three symbols corresponding to the round. The round correspondence display 1103 indicates that the actual number of rounds "3" has been acquired by three symbols, and one of them indicates that one round is being executed. The unit conversion display 1104 adds the conversion unit "Gaoh" to the numerical value "5 (= 15/3)" that has been numerically converted by the 1/3 conversion formula prepared in advance in response to the additional acquisition of the actual number of rounds "3". Then, "5 Gao" is displayed.

The display screen 1114 shown in FIG. 152 (2) is a display screen during the bonus effect, and is a display screen following the display screen 1112. The round correspondence display 1103 additionally displays three symbols corresponding to the round. The round-corresponding display 1103 displays 6 symbols, and indicates that 3 rounds have been digested and the actual number of rounds "3" is acquired, of which 1 round is being executed. The unit conversion display 1104 shown on the display screen 1114 is converted into a numerical value "6 (= 18/3)" numerically converted by a 1/3 conversion formula prepared in advance in response to the additional acquisition of the actual number of rounds "3". "6 Gao" is displayed with "Gao" attached.

The display screen 1116 shown in FIG. 152 (3) is a display screen during the bonus effect, and is a display screen following the display screen 1114. The round correspondence display 1103 once resets the previously displayed symbol, and then displays three symbols corresponding to the round. The round correspondence display 1103 indicates that the actual number of rounds "3" has been acquired by three symbols, and one of them indicates that one round is being executed. The gaming machine 10 can arbitrarily set the reset trigger of the previously displayed symbol. For example, the display screen 1112 triggered the reset by displaying 12 symbols, while the display screen 1116 triggered the reset by displaying 6 symbols. In this way, the gaming machine 10 can produce a hobby for the player to reset the symbol by making the reset trigger of the symbol displayed earlier variable. For example, the gaming machine 10 may produce a sense of expectation according to the number of symbols being displayed, or may add a privilege effect (addition of audible music, addition of selectable characters, etc.). .. The unit conversion display 1104 adds the conversion unit "Gaoh" to the numerical value "7 (= 21/3)" that has been numerically converted by the 1/3 conversion formula prepared in advance in response to the additional acquisition of the actual number of rounds "3". Then, "7 Gao" is displayed. In addition, the gaming machine 10 is designed to produce a sense of expectation according to the size of the unit conversion display being displayed, and to give a privilege effect (addition of audible music, addition of selectable characters, etc.). You may.

Here, a modification of the unit conversion display (modification 1 of the fourth embodiment) will be described with reference to FIGS. 153 to 156. The unit conversion display is not limited to the number of rounds, but any target that can measure the size such as the number of prize balls, the number of winnings, the number of outs, the operating time, the number of fluctuations, the number of reach, the number of hits, etc. can do.

As an example, the unit conversion of the number of prize balls will be described. First, the model specification commands of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 153. FIG. 153 is a diagram showing an example of a model specification command list of the modification 1 of the fourth embodiment.

The game control device 100 uses the serial communication function of the CPU 111A to transmit model specification commands to the effect control device 300 by serial communication. The effect control device 300 receives the model specification command and performs the required prize ball number integration process. The effect control device 300 can include the model specification command in the processing range of the one-shot command processing (see FIG. 104) in step D62 of the reception command analysis processing, and execute the processing corresponding to the received model specification command. ..

The model specification command (receive command) has a configuration including MODE data (1 byte) and ACTION data (1 byte).
The model specification commands include a large winning opening count command, a starting winning opening winning command, a Fuden winning command, and a general winning opening winning command. The large winning opening count command is a command in which the game control device 100 notifies the effect control device 300 of the winning of the special variable winning device 38. The grand prize opening count command is designated by MODE "A7H" and ACTION "08H". The ACTION "08H" in the large winning opening count command indicates the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning of the special variable winning device 38, and is, for example, eight. The start winning opening winning command is a command in which the game control device 100 notifies the effect control device 300 of the winning of the starting winning opening 36. The start winning opening winning command is designated by MODE "A8H" and ACTION "04H". The ACTION "04H" in the start winning opening winning command indicates the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning to the starting winning opening 36, and is, for example, four. The Fuden winning command is a command in which the game control device 100 notifies the effect control device 300 of winning a prize in the ordinary variable winning device 37 (ordinary electric accessory). The Fuden winning command is designated by MODE "A9H" and ACTION "01H". The ACTION "01H" in the Fuden winning command indicates the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning of the starting winning opening 36, and is, for example, one. The general winning opening winning command is a command in which the game control device 100 notifies the effect control device 300 of winning a prize in the general winning opening 35. The general winning opening winning command is designated by MODE "AAH" and ACTION "03H". The ACTION "03H" in the general winning opening winning command indicates the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning of the general winning opening 35, and is, for example, three.

Next, the unit conversion prize ball number display for guiding the player to the guideline of the cumulative prize ball number instead of not specifying the cumulative prize ball number will be described with reference to FIG. 154. FIG. 154 is a diagram showing an example of a correspondence relationship between the number of prize balls and the number of unit-converted prize balls in the modified example 1 of the fourth embodiment.

The effect control device 300 includes a special variable winning device 38 (large winning opening) and a starting winning opening 36 (from a large winning opening count command, a starting winning opening winning command, a general electric winning command, and a general winning opening winning command. The starting winning opening), the normal variable winning device 37 (Public), and the general winning opening 35 (general winning opening), and the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning can be obtained. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 154 (1), the effect control device 300 has a number of prize balls "8" corresponding to a prize in the large winning opening, a prize ball number "4" corresponding to a winning in the starting winning opening, and the like. It is possible to obtain the number of prize balls "1" corresponding to the prize in the Fuden and the number of prize balls "3" corresponding to the prize in the general prize opening.

As a result, the effect control device 300 can calculate the cumulative number of prize balls according to the prize ball history, perform the required unit conversion, and display the number of unit-converted prize balls, which is the number of prize balls after the unit conversion. The effect control device 300 rounds down the first digit of the cumulative number of prize balls and converts the unit into a value of "pt".

FIG. 154 (2) shows a correspondence history table between the prize ball history and the unit conversion prize ball number display. The correspondence history table is in chronological order with the number of prize balls "1", "3", "4", "8", "8", "8", "8", "3", "8", "8". Indicates that a prize ball has been generated. Based on the number of prize balls acquired in chronological order, the effect control device 300 sets the cumulative number of prize balls for a predetermined period as the cumulative number of prize balls "1", "4", "8", "16", in chronological order. Obtain "24", "32", "40", "43", "51", "59". The effect control device 300 rounds down the first place of the cumulative prize ball number and displays the unit conversion prize ball number in chronological order "0pt", "0pt", "0pt", "10pt", "20pt", "30pt". , "40pt", "40pt", "50pt", "50pt" are obtained.

According to this, the gaming machine 10 can abstractly guide the cumulative number of prize balls to the player without clearly indicating the specific cumulative number of prize balls to the player. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can intuitively inform the player of the magnitude of the numerical value to the player who takes time to acquire and interpret the information because the numerical value is too specific.

The gaming machine 10 can arbitrarily perform the required unit conversion, including the selection of the conversion target and the conversion formula. Further, although the gaming machine 10 has performed unit conversion for the game history, the gaming machine 10 may perform unit conversion for the scheduled game result such as the expected number of prize balls. Further, the gaming machine 10 can arbitrarily set the cumulative period, for example, the cumulative value can be reset by an event trigger or a timer trigger such as 10 minutes per round.

Next, the unit conversion prize ball number display will be described with reference to FIG. 155. FIG. 155 is a diagram showing an example of a screen displayed by the display device of the first modification of the fourth embodiment.
The display screen 1120 shown in FIG. 155 (1) is a display screen at the beginning of the bonus effect. The display screen 1120 includes a bonus name 1121, a striking direction guidance display 1122, and an expected acquisition value display 1123. The bonus name 1121 displays a winning name (for example, "X bonus") in the production. The striking direction guidance display 1122 informs the player that the striking direction is the right gaming area. In the expected acquisition value display 1123, a predetermined unit (for example, "pt") is added to a value obtained by converting the expected number of prize balls to be acquired (the number of expected prize balls to be acquired) according to the winning type into a unit, and the expected acquisition value (for example, "pt") is added. , "240pt").

The display screen 1124 shown in FIG. 155 (2) is a display screen during the bonus effect and is a display screen following the display screen 1120. The display screen 1124 includes a bonus name 1121, a striking direction guidance display 1122, and an acquired value display 1125. In the acquired value display 1125, a predetermined unit (for example, "pt") is added to a value obtained by converting the number of prize balls acquired during the hit (the number of acquired prize balls) into a unit to obtain the acquired value (for example, "240 pt"). show. When the number of prize balls is acquired in excess of the number of expected prize balls, the gaming machine 10 may stop updating the number of acquired prize balls up to the maximum number of expected prize balls. Further, the gaming machine 10 may be a target for calculating the number of winning prize balls only for winning a prize in a winning opening (for example, a large winning opening) for which the expected number of winning prize balls is calculated.

The display screen 1126 shown in FIG. 155 (3) is another example of the display screen 1124 and is a display screen following the display screen 1120. The display screen 1126 includes a bonus name 1121, a striking direction guidance display 1122, and an acquired value display 1127. The acquired value display 1127 adds a predetermined unit (for example, "pt") to the value obtained by converting the number of prize balls (the number of acquired prize balls) acquired during the hit into units to obtain the acquired value (for example, "250 pt"). show. When the number of prize balls is acquired in excess of the expected number of prize balls, the gaming machine 10 allows the number of expected prize balls to be exceeded and updates the number of prize balls to be acquired. Further, the gaming machine 10 calculates the number of winning prize balls, which is not limited to winning a prize in a winning opening (for example, a large winning opening) for which the expected number of winning winning balls is calculated (for example, winning a general winning opening). It may be a target.

Although the gaming machine 10 is supposed to convert the cumulative number of prize balls into units, it may be possible to obtain the cumulative value after converting the number of prize balls into units in advance. First, the unit conversion prize ball number display in which the number of prize balls is converted into units and the cumulative value of the converted values is obtained will be described with reference to FIG. 156. FIG. 156 is a diagram showing an example of the correspondence between the number of prize balls and the cumulative number of points in the modified example 1 of the fourth embodiment.

The effect control device 300 includes a special variable winning device 38 (large winning opening) and a starting winning opening 36 (from a large winning opening count command, a starting winning opening winning command, a general electric winning command, and a general winning opening winning command. The starting winning opening), the normal variable winning device 37 (Public), and the general winning opening 35 (general winning opening), and the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning can be obtained. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 156 (1), the effect control device 300 has a number of prize balls “8” corresponding to a prize in the large winning opening, a prize ball number “4” corresponding to a winning in the starting winning opening, and the like. It is possible to obtain the number of prize balls "1" corresponding to the prize in the Fuden and the number of prize balls "3" corresponding to the prize in the general prize opening.

The effect control device 300 performs a required unit conversion with respect to the acquired number of prize balls. The effect control device 300 multiplies the number of prize balls by 10 to convert the unit into a value of "pt". According to this, the number of big prize-winning prize balls is set to points (unit conversion prize balls) "80pt", the number of starting prize-winning prize balls is set to points "40pt", and the number of Fuden prize balls is set to points "10pt". Then, the number of general prize-winning prize balls can be converted into points "30pt".

FIG. 156 (2) shows a correspondence history table between the prize ball history and the cumulative number of points. The correspondence history table is in chronological order with the number of prize balls "1", "3", "4", "8", "8", "8", "8", "3", "8", "8". Indicates that a prize ball has been generated. The effect control device 300 has, as the cumulative number of points for a predetermined period, the cumulative number of points "10pt", "40pt", "80pt", in chronological order, based on the points after unit conversion of the number of prize balls acquired in chronological order. Obtains "160 pt", "240 pt", "320 pt", "400 pt", "430 pt", "510 pt", and "590 pt".

According to this, the gaming machine 10 can guide the player to the abstract cumulative points without clearly indicating the specific cumulative number of prize balls to the player. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can inform the player of the image given by the concrete numerical value as an abstract image.

The gaming machine 10 can arbitrarily perform the required unit conversion, including the selection of the conversion target and the conversion formula. Further, although the gaming machine 10 has performed unit conversion for the game history, the gaming machine 10 may perform unit conversion for the scheduled game result such as the expected number of prize balls. Further, the gaming machine 10 can arbitrarily set the cumulative period, for example, the cumulative value can be reset by an event trigger or a timer trigger such as 10 minutes per round.

Returning to the description of the fourth embodiment again. The V winning effect and the V non-winning effect have been briefly described with reference to FIGS. 146 and 148, but will be described in detail again with reference to FIGS. 157 to 163.

First, the hit type will be described again with reference to FIG. 157. FIG. 157 is a diagram showing an example of a performance table for each hit including the presence or absence of the V notification game of the fourth embodiment. The gaming machine 10 includes "hit A", "hit B", "hit C", and "hit D" as hit types.

The hit A is that there is no probability fluctuation and there is a V notification game. The hit B is that there is a probability fluctuation and there is a V notification game. The hit C is that there is no probability fluctuation and there is no V notification game. The hit D has a probability fluctuation and no V notification game. In addition, for a hit (hit A and hit B) with a V notification game, a production with a V notification game (mini game) is performed for a V winning effect or a V non-winning effect. A hit with a V-notification game notifies about the probability fluctuation via the V-notification game, and a hit without the V-notification game (hits C and hit D) notifies about the probability fluctuation without going through the V-notification game.

Here, the probability fluctuation notification for each hit will be described with reference to FIG. 158. FIG. 158 is a diagram showing an example of a game flow of probability fluctuation notification for each hit of the fourth embodiment.
The game flow shown in FIG. 158 (1) is a game flow of hit A and hit B. Hit A and hit B play a V notification game within the hit effect. Hit A and hit B notify the player of the success or failure of V winning (game ball detection by the specific area switch 460) without informing the player to aim at "V (specific area)" (V aiming non-guidance). do. That is, in the hit A and the hit B, the gaming machine 10 notifies the success of the V prize when there is a V prize (V prize success notification), and notifies the V prize failure when there is no V prize (V prize failure). Notify). By determining the V notification game according to the game ball detection of the specific area switch 460, the gaming machine 10 can perform V winning success notification or V winning failure notification in correspondence with the result of the V notification game. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 performs V winning success notification or V winning failure notification later than the game ball detection timing of the specific area switch 460 by providing the production time of the V notification game.

The game flow shown in FIG. 158 (2) is a game flow of hit C. The hit C does not play the V notification game in the hit effect, and does not guide the aim of "V". The gaming machine 10 notifies the success of the V winning when there is a V winning in the hit C, but does not dare to notify the failure of the V winning when there is no V winning because the V aim is not guided. (V prize failure not notified).

The game flow shown in FIG. 158 (3) is a game flow of hit D. The hit D guides the aiming of "V" (V aiming guidance) without playing the V notification game in the hit effect. That is, in the winning D, the gaming machine 10 notifies the success of the V winning when there is a V winning, and notifies the failure of the V winning when there is no V winning. It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 does not necessarily need to notify the V winning failure at the hit D.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 detects whether or not a high-probability state has occurred (hits A and hits B) delayed from the game ball detection timing of the specific area switch 460, and the game ball detection of the specific area switch 460. It is possible to set a hit (hit C and hit D) for notifying the pros and cons of the occurrence of a high probability state at a time point.

Next, the game flow of the V notification game will be described with reference to FIG. 159. FIG. 159 is a diagram showing an example of a game flow of the V notification game of the fourth embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 provides game guidance in the V notification game (F100). As a result, the gaming machine 10 informs the player of the V notification game. Further, the gaming machine 10 suppresses the player's interest from turning to the open state of the special variable winning device 38 and the V door 520 by directing the player's interest to the game guidance.

The gaming machine 10 performs the first game production as a V notification game (F101). The first game production corresponds to the mini-game described with reference to FIGS. 146 and 148. The gaming machine 10 performs the first game success effect in a part of the case where there is a V prize (F102), and then performs the V prize success notification (F103).

On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 performs the first game failure effect depending on the remaining part when there is a V prize and the case where there is no V prize (F104). The gaming machine 10 gives a V-winning failure notification in a part of the case where there is no V-winning (F105).

The gaming machine 10 performs a second game production, which is a first game failure revival effect, with the remaining part when there is a V prize and the remaining part when there is no V prize (F106). The second game effect is a game effect different from the first game effect, and is, for example, a game effect that requires the player to press the push button 25.

When the gaming machine 10 has a V prize and detects a push button 25 pressing operation within a predetermined time (non-timeout), the game machine 10 performs a second game success effect (F107), and then notifies the V prize success notification. Do it (F103).

On the other hand, when there is no V winning and the pressing operation of the push button 25 is detected within a predetermined time (non-timeout), the gaming machine 10 performs the second game failure effect (F108), and then the V winning fails. Notify (F105).

Further, when the gaming machine 10 does not detect the pressing operation of the push button 25 within a predetermined time (time-out), the gaming machine 10 performs a time-out effect (F109). Then, after the time-out effect, the gaming machine 10 notifies the success of the V prize when there is a V prize (F103), and notifies the failure of the V prize when there is no V prize (F105).

Next, the progress of the V notification game in the hit B will be described with reference to FIG. 160. FIG. 160 is a diagram showing an example of the progress of the V notification game in the hit B of the fourth embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 is in a fanfare state (FAN) due to the occurrence of a hit B, and performs a fanfare effect. The gaming machine 10 progresses from the fanfare state to 1R (round), releases the V blockage, that is, opens the V door 520, and makes it possible to detect the gaming ball with the specific area switch 460. The gaming machine 10 provides game guidance at intervals (INT) following 1R and 1R. The gaming machine 10 performs the first game production at intervals following 2R and 2R. The gaming machine 10 performs the first game success effect or the first game failure effect at the intervals following the 3Rs and the 3Rs. When the game machine 10 performs the first game success effect at the interval following the 3R and the 3R, the game machine 10 notifies the V winning success from the 4R to the 6R.

When the first game failure effect is performed at the interval following the 3R and the 3R, and the second game effect is not performed, the gaming machine 10 performs V winning failure notification from 4R to 6R. When the first game failure effect is performed at the intervals following the 3Rs and the 3Rs, and the second game effect is performed, the gaming machine 10 performs the second game effect at the intervals following the 4Rs and the 4Rs.

When the gaming machine 10 detects the pressing operation of the push button 25 within a predetermined time in the second game production, the second game success production or the second game failure production is performed until the end of the interval following 4R, depending on whether or not there is a V prize. Do it. The gaming machine 10 notifies V winning success from 5R to 6R when the second game success effect is performed, and V prize failure notification from 5R to 6R when the second game failure effect is performed.

If the gaming machine 10 does not detect the pressing operation of the push button 25 within a predetermined time in the second game effect, the game machine 10 performs a time-out effect. After performing the time-out effect, the gaming machine 10 performs V winning success notification or V winning failure notification depending on the presence or absence of V winning from 5R to 6R.

After the V winning success notification or the V winning failure notification is given, the gaming machine 10 performs an ending effect including an ending (END) state after the interval following 6R.
In this way, the gaming machine 10 can set a predetermined time lag for the success or failure of the V winning (the game ball detection by the specific area switch 460) and perform the V winning success notification or the V winning failure notification. The gaming machine 10 can set such a time lag as a predetermined period after winning the V prize. Further, the gaming machine 10 can set a time lag based on the detection of winning a prize in a large winning opening after the V winning timing (for example, a large winning opening winning in a mini game). Further, the gaming machine 10 can set the timing from the V winning timing to the detection of the player operation (for example, the pressing operation of the push button 25) as a time lag. Further, the gaming machine 10 can set a time lag by notifying the success of V winning or the failure of V winning after the end of the round with the V winning timing. Further, the gaming machine 10 can set a time lag by notifying the success of V winning or the failure of V winning after the next round of the round having the V winning timing. Further, the gaming machine 10 can set a multi-step time lag by setting two or more notification opportunities (for example, a first game effect and a second game effect) after the V winning timing.

Next, the display screen during the V notification game on the display device 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 161 to 163. FIG. 161 is a diagram showing an example (No. 6) of a screen displayed by the display device of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 162 is a diagram showing an example (No. 7) of a screen displayed by the display device of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 163 is a diagram showing an example (No. 8) of a screen displayed by the display device of the fourth embodiment.

The display screen during the V notification game will be described in correspondence with the game flow of the V notification game (see FIG. 159).
The display screen 1130 shown in FIG. 161 (1) is a display screen for providing game guidance (F100) in the V notification game. The display screen 1130 includes a game description display 1132. The game explanation display 1132 describes a mini-game for a V winning effect or a V non-winning effect, and informs the player of the V notification game (first game). For example, the game explanation display 1132 displays "Put a ball in the attacker and collect the meter!" As a message.

The display screen 1134 shown in FIG. 161 (2) is a display screen for performing the first game effect (F101) in the V notification game. The display screen 1134 includes a meter display 1136 and an event display 1137. The meter display 1136 includes a 16-step meter and a patrol lamp for notifying the success of the mini game. The 16-step meter is turned off in the initial state, and the predetermined step is turned on for each prize in the big winning opening, and the mini game is successful with all the lights. The event display 1137 directs an event corresponding to a prize in the big prize opening. For example, the event display 1137 emits a light ray from the direction of the special variable winning device 38 in the direction of the meter display 1136 for each prize in the large winning opening, and lights the meter in a predetermined step as shown in the display screen 1138 shown in FIG. 161 (3). ..

The display screen 1140 shown in FIG. 161 (4) is a display screen for performing the first game success effect (F102) in the V notification game. The display screen 1140 includes a meter display 1136 and a success effect display 1141. In the meter display 1136, the 16-step meter is fully lit. The success effect display 1141 notifies the success of the mini game (first game) by the display mode (for example, flash lighting) of the patrol lamp.

The display screen 1142 shown in FIG. 162 (1) is a display screen for performing V winning success notification (F103) in the V notification game. The display screen 1142 includes a V winning success notification display 1143. The V winning success notification display 1143 displays a pictogram "V" to notify the success of the V winning. The V-winning success notification display 1143 may notify the V-winning success by means of a message, a still image, a moving image, or the like.

The display screen 1144 shown in FIG. 162 (2) is a display screen for performing the first game failure effect (F104) in the V notification game. The display screen 1144 includes a meter display 1136 and a failure effect display 1145. The meter display 1136 turns off at least a part of the 16-step meter. The failure effect display 1145 notifies the mini-game failure depending on the display mode (for example, failure) of the patrol lamp.

The display screen 1146 shown in FIG. 162 (3) is a display screen for performing V winning failure notification (F105) in the V notification game. The display screen 1146 includes a V winning failure notification display 1147. The V winning failure notification display 1147 displays the message "sorry" to notify the failure of the V winning. The V winning failure notification display 1147 may be used to notify the V winning failure by a pictogram, a still image, a moving image, or the like.

The display screen 1148 shown in FIG. 162 (4) is a display screen for performing the second game effect (F106) in the V notification game. The display screen 1148 includes a game description display 1149 and a time-up display 1150. The game explanation display 1149 explains the player operation for the V winning effect or the V non-winning effect, and informs the player of the V notification game (second game). For example, the second game is a game that notifies the success or failure of the V prize by detecting the pressing operation of the push button 25 within a predetermined time. The game explanation display 1149 displays an image of the push button 25 corresponding to the player operation unit as a pictogram with "press!" As a message. The time-up display 1150 displays a gauge of a predetermined time (time-up time) for detecting the pressing operation of the push button 25.

The display screen 1152 shown in FIG. 163 (1) is a display screen for performing a second game success effect (F107) in the V notification game. The display screen 1152 includes a success effect display 1153. The success effect display 1153 notifies the success of the mini game (second game) by lighting the image of the push button 25 with a flash.

The display screen 1154 shown in FIG. 163 (2) is a display screen for performing a second game failure effect (F108) in the V notification game. The display screen 1154 includes a failure effect display 1155. The failure effect display 1155 notifies the failure of the mini game (second game) by causing the image of the push button 25 to lose its saturation and lightness.

The display screen 1156 shown in FIG. 163 (3) is a display screen for performing a time-out effect (F109) in the V notification game. The display screen 1156 includes a time-out effect display 1157. The time-out effect display 1157 notifies the mini-game (second game) time-out when the image of the push button 25 loses its saturation and lightness.

Next, the second modification of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 164 to 166. The gaming machine of the second modification of the fourth embodiment includes a hit X in which the release timing of the V block is not set to the first round (1R) but to the intermediate round (4R).

First, the progress of the V notification game in the hit X will be described with reference to FIG. 164. FIG. 164 is a diagram showing an example of the progress of the V notification game in the hit X of the second modification of the fourth embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 is in a fanfare state (FAN) due to the generation of a hit X, and performs a fanfare effect. The gaming machine 10 progresses from the fanfare state to 1R (round), and guides the game at the interval (INT) following 1R to 3R. The gaming machine 10 performs game production 1 at intervals following 4R and 4R. Further, the gaming machine 10 releases the V blockage in 4R, that is, opens the V door 520, and makes it possible to detect the gaming ball with the specific area switch 460.

The gaming machine 10 performs V winning failure notification, game 1 success production, or game production 2 after 5R. When the gaming machine 10 notifies the V winning failure after the game effect 1, the notification period is set to 5R to 9R. When the game machine 10 performs the game 1 success effect or the game effect 2, the effect period is set to an interval following 5R and 5R. When the game 1 success effect is performed, the gaming machine 10 sets the notification period of the V winning success notification from 6R to 9R.

When the game production 2 is performed, the game machine 10 performs V winning failure notification, game 2 success production, or game production 3 after 6R. When the gaming machine 10 notifies the V winning failure after the game effect 2, the notification period is set to 6R to 9R. When the game machine 10 performs the game 2 success effect or the game effect 3, the effect period is set to an interval following 6R and 6R. When the game 2 success effect is performed, the gaming machine 10 sets the notification period of the V winning success notification from 7R to 9R.

When the game production 3 is performed, the game machine 10 performs the game 3 success production at intervals following 7R and 7R. That is, the game production 3 is a V-winning success confirmation production in which there is no failure and only success. When the game 3 success effect is performed, the gaming machine 10 sets the notification period of the V winning success notification from 8R to 9R.

The gaming machine 10 performs a V winning success notification or a V winning failure notification, and then performs an ending effect in the ending (END) state.
In this way, the gaming machine 10 can set a predetermined time lag for the success or failure of the V winning (the game ball detection by the specific area switch 460) and perform the V winning success notification or the V winning failure notification. The gaming machine 10 can set such a time lag as a predetermined period after winning the V prize. Further, the gaming machine 10 can set a time lag by notifying the success of V winning or the failure of V winning after the end of the round with the V winning timing. Further, the gaming machine 10 can set a time lag by notifying the success of V winning or the failure of V winning after the next round of the round having the V winning timing. Further, the gaming machine 10 can set a multi-step time lag by setting two or more notification opportunities (for example, game effect 1, game effect 2, and game effect 3) after the V winning timing.

Next, the display screen during the V notification game in the display device 41 of the second modification of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 165 and 166. FIG. 165 is a diagram showing an example (No. 1) of a screen displayed by the display device of the second modification of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 166 is a diagram showing an example (No. 2) of a screen displayed by the display device of the second modification of the fourth embodiment.

The display screen 1160 shown in FIG. 165 (1) is a display screen for providing game guidance in the V notification game. The display screen 1160 includes a game description display 1162. The game explanation display 1162 explains the game for the V winning effect or the V non-winning effect, and disseminates the content of the effect. For example, the game description display 1162 displays "Win the game!" As a message.

The display screen 1164 shown in FIG. 165 (2) is a display screen for performing a game effect (common to the game effects 1, 2, and 3) in the V notification game. The display screen 1164 includes an event display 1168. The event display 1168 directs the game between the two characters 1168a and 1168b. The character 1168a corresponds to the main character, and the character 1168b corresponds to the enemy character. Although the game effects are common to the game effects 1, 2, and 3, they may be different.

The display screen 1170 shown in FIG. 165 (3) is a display screen for performing a game success effect (common to the game effects 1, 2, and 3) in the V notification game. The display screen 1170 includes a game success display 1171. The game success display 1171 indicates that the character 1168a has won the character 1168b. The game success effect is common to the game effects 1, 2, and 3, but may be different.

The display screen 1172 shown in FIG. 165 (4) is a display screen for notifying the success of winning a V in the V notification game. The display screen 1172 includes a V winning success notification display 1173. The V winning success notification display 1173 displays a pictogram "V" to notify the success of the V winning. The V winning success notification display 1173 may be used to notify the success of the V winning by a message, a still image, a moving image, or the like.

The display screen 1174 shown in FIG. 166 (1) is a display screen for performing a game failure effect (common to the game effects 1 and 2) in the V notification game. The display screen 1174 includes a game failure display 1175. The game failure display 1175 indicates that the character 1168a is defeated by the character 1168b. The game failure effect is common to the game effects 1 and 2, but may be different.

The display screen 1176 shown in FIG. 166 (2) is a display screen for notifying the failure of V winning in the V notification game. The display screen 1176 includes a V winning failure notification display 1177. The V winning failure notification display 1177 displays the message "sorry" to notify the failure of the V winning. The V winning failure notification display 1177 may notify the V winning failure by a pictogram, a still image, a moving image, or the like.

The display screen 1178 shown in FIG. 166 (3) is a display screen for performing a game effect (game effect 2) in the V notification game. The display screen 1178 includes an event display 1179. The event display 1179 directs the second game of the two characters 1168a and 1168b.

The display screen 1180 shown in FIG. 166 (4) is a display screen for performing a game effect (game effect 3) in the V notification game. The display screen 1180 includes an event display 1181. The event display 1181 directs the third game of the two characters 1168a and 1168b.

The gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment (including the modified example) described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a winning means (special variable winning device 38), a detecting means (specific area switch 460), and a control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The winning means are a first state (short opening) that facilitates acceptance of the game ball in the first period, a second state (long opening) that facilitates acceptance of the game ball in the second period longer than the first period, and a game. It is possible to convert to the third state (blockage) that makes it difficult to accept the ball. The detecting means can detect the game ball accepted by the winning means. The control means is in the first special gaming state (hit A) or the second state in which the detection means can transition to the specific gaming state (probability fluctuation (high probability state)) when the detecting means detects the gaming ball in the first state. When the detection means detects a game ball, a second special game state (hit B) capable of transitioning to a specific game state can be generated, and the second special game state is generated from the first special game state in the first special game state. The first elapsed period until the conversion to the state and the second elapsed period from the occurrence of the second special gaming state to the conversion to the second state in the second special gaming state are the same (Ta + Tb (Fig. 144)). ).

(2) The gaming machine 10 of (1) is provided with a display effect means (display device 41) for performing a display effect. The control means waits for the lapse of the first elapsed period and the second elapsed period, and then displays the notification regarding the round (round correspondence display 1009) by the display effect means.

(3) The control means of (1) or (2) is set to the first state in one round (1R) in the first special gaming state, and is set to the first state in two rounds (2R) sandwiching the third state (interval). The second state is set, and the second state is set with the first state to the third state (weight) sandwiched in one round in the second special gaming state.

(4) The gaming machine 10 includes a winning means (special variable winning device 38), a detecting means (specific area switch 460), and a control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The winning means can convert between a first state (opening) that facilitates acceptance of the game ball and a second state (blocking) that makes it difficult to accept the game ball. The detecting means can detect the game ball accepted by the winning means at a predetermined timing. The control means is a first special gaming state capable of transitioning to a specific gaming state when the detecting means detects a gaming ball in the first state, or a specific gaming state when the detecting means detects a gaming ball in the second state. A second special game state capable of transitioning to (probability fluctuation (high probability state)) can be generated, and the transition notification to the specific game state based on the detection result of the game ball by the detection means is time-lagped with respect to a predetermined timing. (For example, the first game production) is set and performed.

(5) The gaming machine 10 includes a display means (display device 41) and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display means can display information (round-corresponding display) in connection with a variable display game in which a symbol is variablely displayed. The control means can derive a first hit (hit A) or a second hit (hit B) in the variable display game, and corresponds to the number of rounds of the first hit or the number of rounds of the second hit. When displaying the round-corresponding display on the display means, the number of rounds corresponding to one of the round-corresponding displays (for example, the display mode 1009a) is the first hit (the display mode 1009a corresponds to 2R) and the first. It is different from the hit of 2 (display mode 1009a corresponds to 1R).

(6) The gaming machine 10 includes a display means (display device 41) and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display means can display information in relation to a variable display game in which a symbol is variablely displayed. The control means can derive a first hit (hit B) or a second hit (hit A) in the variable display game, and corresponds to the number of rounds of the first hit or the number of rounds of the second hit. When displaying the round-compatible display (for example, display mode 1009d) on the display means, the display mode corresponding to a predetermined number of rounds among the round-compatible displays is displayed in the first hit (display mode 1009d corresponds to 1R). Then, it is hidden at the second hit (display mode 1009d does not correspond to 1R).

(7) The gaming machine 10 includes a winning means (special variable winning device 38), a detecting means (specific area switch 460), a guiding means (display device 41), and a control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). ) And, including. The winning means can convert between a first state (opening) that facilitates acceptance of the game ball and a second state (blocking) that makes it difficult to accept the game ball. The detecting means can detect the game ball accepted by the winning means at a predetermined timing (for example, V blockage release). The guidance means provides game guidance (game explanation display 1027) according to a predetermined timing. The control means can derive the first hit or the second hit in the variable display game, and causes the game guidance to be performed in either the first hit or the second hit (hits A, B, C). : V aiming non-guidance, hit D: V aiming guidance), when the detection means detects a game ball, the detection of the game ball is notified (V winning success notification) regardless of the presence or absence of the game guidance, and the specific game state (V winning success notification) Transition to probability fluctuation (high probability state)).

(8) The gaming machine 10 includes a display means (display device 41) and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display means can display information in relation to a variable display game in which a symbol is variablely displayed. The control means is the first numerical information (for example, 16 (round), 6 (round), 10) represented by the first unit (for example, "round" or "individual") in relation to the variable display game. Second numerical information (for example, 4 (round) or 2 (round), etc.) according to the conversion formula (for example, 1/4 conversion, 1/3 conversion, 10 times conversion, etc.) prepared in advance. Convert to 100 (pieces), etc.) and use the second numerical information and the second unit different from the first unit (for example, "Kyun", "Gaoh", "pt", etc.) as the display means. Display.

[Fifth Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment will be described. In the gaming machine 10 shown in the fifth embodiment, the symbol is composed of two or more identification elements, and the identification elements can be selectively displayed in the fluctuation process. First, the decorative design (decorative design) of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 167. FIG. 167 is a diagram showing an example of a decorative symbol according to the fifth embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 can selectively display the decorative symbol A, the decorative symbol B, and the decorative symbol C as the decorative symbols. The decorative symbol A is a decorative symbol mainly used, and the decorative symbol B and the decorative symbol C are decorative symbols used as subordinates. For example, the decorative symbol A is used during the variable display effect without using the movie, and the decorative symbol B and the decorative symbol C are used during the variable display effect using the movie.

The decorative symbol A includes symbols 1201, 1202, 1203, 1204, 1205. The symbols 1201, 1202, 1203, 1204, 1205 can be distinguished from other symbols by different display modes.

The symbol 1201 is a symbol displaying the number "1". The symbol 1201 is a graphic element 1201a having distinctiveness as a symbol by a figure (for example, a character such as a boy), a numerical element 1201b having distinctiveness as a symbol by a number "1", and a character "Taro" as a symbol. Includes the character element 1201c having the distinctiveness of. That is, the graphic element 1201a, the numerical element 1201b, and the character element 1201c are identification elements of the symbol 1201, respectively.

The symbol 1202 is a symbol that displays the number "2". The symbol 1202 is a graphic element 1202a having distinctiveness as a symbol by a figure (for example, a character such as a girl), a numerical element 1202b having distinctiveness as a symbol by a number "2", and a character "Hanako" as a symbol. Includes the character element 1202c having the distinctiveness of. That is, the graphic element 1202a, the numerical element 1202b, and the character element 1202c are identification elements of the symbol 1202, respectively.

The symbol 1203 is a symbol that displays the number "3". The symbol 1203 is a graphic element 1203a having distinctiveness as a symbol by a figure (for example, a character like a tiger), a numerical element 1203b having distinctiveness as a symbol by a number "3", and a character "Tiger" as a symbol. Includes the character element 1203c having the distinctiveness of. That is, the graphic element 1203a, the numerical element 1203b, and the character element 1203c are identification elements of the symbol 1203, respectively.

The symbol 1204 is a symbol displaying the number "4". The symbol 1204 is a graphic element 1204a having distinctiveness as a symbol by a figure (for example, a character such as a lion), a numerical element 1204b having distinctiveness as a symbol by a number "4", and a symbol as a symbol by a character "lion". Includes a character element 1204c having the distinctiveness of. That is, the graphic element 1204a, the numerical element 1204b, and the character element 1204c are identification elements of the symbol 1204, respectively.

The symbol 1205 is a symbol displaying the number "5". The symbol 1205 is a graphic element 1205a having distinctiveness as a symbol by a figure (for example, a character such as a rocket), a numerical element 1205b having distinctiveness as a symbol by a number "5", and a character "rocket" as a symbol. Includes the character element 1205c having the distinctiveness of. That is, the graphic element 1205a, the numerical element 1205b, and the character element 1205c are identification elements of the symbol 1205, respectively.

The decorative symbol B is a symbol having the same discriminating power as the numerical element in the decorative symbol A, and is, for example, a similar figure to the numerical element in the decorative symbol A. The decorative symbol B includes symbols 1211, 121, 121, 1214, 1215. The symbols 1211, 121, 121, 1214, 1215 can be distinguished from other symbols by different display modes.

The decorative symbol C is a symbol having the same discriminating power as the character element in the decorative symbol A, and is, for example, a similar figure to the character element in the decorative symbol A. The decorative symbol C includes symbols 1221, 1222, 1223, 1224, 1225. The symbols 1221, 1222, 1223, 1224, 1225 can be distinguished from other symbols by different display modes.

The gaming machine 10 can use the decorative symbol A, the decorative symbol B, and the decorative symbol C simultaneously or exclusively according to the display effect.
Next, a typical display mode during variation in the decorative symbol A will be described with reference to FIG. 168. FIG. 168 is a diagram showing an example of a changing display mode in the decorative symbol A of the fifth embodiment.

The display mode during the change in the decorative symbol A will be described with reference to the symbol 1201 as a representative. Since the symbols 1202, 1203, 1204, 1205 are the same as the symbols 1201, the description thereof will be omitted.

The symbol 1201 displays all of the graphic element 1201a, the numeric element 1201b, and the character element 1201c when the symbol is stopped (P1). As a result, the gaming machine 10 can fully exert the effect of the symbol 1201.

At the start of the fluctuation, the symbol 1201 hides the graphic element 1201a and the character element 1201c and displays the numerical element 1201b (P2). As a result, the gaming machine 10 can simplify the display content and enhance the discriminating power of the symbol 1201 that starts to fluctuate.

The symbol 1201 can improve the discriminating power of the numerical element 1201b by displaying the numerical element 1201b in a larger size than when it is displayed together with the graphic element 1201a.

The symbol 1201 hides the graphic element 1201a and the character element 1201c and transparently displays the numerical element 1201b during the fluctuation (P3). As a result, the gaming machine 10 can fully exert the effect of the background, the movie, the character, and the like.

The symbol 1201 hides the graphic element 1201a and the character element 1201c and displays the numerical element 1201b before the fluctuation is stopped (P4). As a result, the gaming machine 10 can simplify the display content and enhance the discriminating power of the symbol 1201 before the fluctuation is stopped.

The symbol 1201 hides the graphic element 1201a and the numerical element 1201b and displays the character element 1201c as the first step before the fluctuation is stopped (P5). That is, the symbol 1201 switches the display target from the number element 1201b to the character element 1201c. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can enhance the discriminating power of the symbol 1201 before the fluctuation is stopped from various angles. Further, the gaming machine 10 can emphasize the correspondence between the number element 1201b and the character element 1201c.

The symbol 1201 can improve the discriminating power of the character element 1201c by displaying the character element 1201c in a larger size than when the character element 1201c is displayed together with the graphic element 1201a.

The symbol 1201 displays all of the graphic element 1201a, the numerical element 1201b, and the character element 1201c as the second step before the fluctuation is stopped (P6). That is, the symbol 1201 switches the display target from only the character element 1201c to all of the graphic element 1201a, the number element 1201b, and the character element 1201c. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can fully exert the effect of the symbol 1201. Further, the gaming machine 10 can enhance the discriminating power of the symbol 1201 before the fluctuation is stopped from various angles. Further, the gaming machine 10 can emphasize the correspondence between the character element 1201c and the graphic element 1201a. Further, the gaming machine 10 can further emphasize the correspondence between the numerical element 1201b and the character element 1201c.

Such a gaming machine 10 is effective when the discriminating powers of the graphic element 1201a, the numerical element 1201b, and the character element 1201c are not the same. For example, when similar characters (girls A, B, C, D, E) are used as graphic elements in a plurality of symbols, the graphic elements cannot be distinguished at first glance. In such a case, the gaming machine 10 can emphasize the correspondence between the graphic element and the numerical element and the character element, and each of the graphic element and the numerical element, the graphic element and the character element, and the numerical element and the character element, respectively. Facilitates stringing. Such ease of stringing is an effect that cannot be obtained only by presenting a graphic element, a numerical element, and a character element at the same time.

In the gaming machine 10, the symbol 1201 is composed of the graphic element 1201a, the number element 1201b, and the character element 1201c, but the symbol 1201 may be configured by adding the second graphic element. Further, the gaming machine 10 may construct the symbol 1201 by adding a second graphic element instead of the character element 1201c.

That is, the gaming machine 10 may have two or more graphic elements, and may selectively display two or more graphic elements during the variable display. Further, the two or more graphic elements may be independent graphic elements (for example, a stage, a character, a background, etc.), or may be a graphic element having a mutual relationship (for example, a character's head, upper body, lower body, etc.). ) May be. For example, two or more graphic elements may constitute a composite graphic as a whole. In other words, two or more graphic elements can be regarded as sub-graphic elements (lower-level graphic elements) with respect to the composite graphic (upper-level graphic element). It should be noted that all of the sub-graphic elements do not need to have discriminating power. The discriminating power as a graphic element may be realized by having at least one of the sub graphic elements having the discriminating power, or may be realized by a combination of two or more sub graphic elements. ..

For example, when a character consisting of a head, an upper body, and a lower body is a composite figure (upper figure element), each of the head, upper body, and lower body is a sub figure element (lower figure element). The gaming machine 10 constructs a symbol by adding a numerical element to such a graphic element (composite graphic), so that, for example, a symbol with a number attached to a character (whole body) is displayed during a variable display including when the variable is stopped. can. The gaming machine 10 can display a symbol in which a number is added to a part of two or more sub-graphic elements (for example, the head of a character) during the variable display.

Further, when the character having the armor and the armor is a composite figure (upper figure element), each of the character, the armor, and the armor is a sub figure element (lower figure element). The gaming machine 10 constructs a symbol by adding a numerical element to such a graphic element (composite graphic), so that, for example, a symbol with a number attached to a character having armor or armor can be changed at the start or stop of the fluctuation. Can be displayed during variable display including. The gaming machine 10 can display a symbol in which a number is added to a part (for example, armor or armor) of two or more sub-graphical elements during the variable display.

The gaming machine 10 may fix the number or combination of sub-graphic elements displayed during the variable display, or may change it in relation to the game progress or the expectation degree notification.
Next, the configuration of the display screen in the display device 41 will be described with reference to FIG. 169. FIG. 169 is a diagram (No. 1) showing an example of a display screen in the display device of the fifth embodiment.

The display screen 1250 is the display content of the display device 41 in which the symbol is stopped in the variable display game. The display screen 1250 includes two sets of decorative symbols, a special figure 1 hold number display 1253, a special figure 2 hold number display 1254, a hold display 1255, and a hold digestion display 1256.

The two sets of decorative symbols include a large symbol group 1251 as a first decorative symbol and a small symbol group 1252 as a second decorative symbol. The large design group 1251 is in charge of game production for the purpose of improving the interest. Therefore, the large symbol group 1251 is displayed large in the substantially central portion of the display device 41. The large symbol group 1251 includes the left symbol 1251L, the middle symbol 1251C, and the right symbol 1251R. The left symbol 1251L, the middle symbol 1251C, and the right symbol 1251R of the display screen 1250 all indicate that the corresponding special symbol variation display game is in the symbol stop state.

Generally, the large symbol group 1251 starts to change in the order of the left symbol 1251L, the right symbol 1251R, and the middle symbol 1251C, and stops (including temporary stop) in the order of the left symbol 1251L, the right symbol 1251R, and the middle symbol 1251C. Therefore, in many cases, the large symbol group 1251 forms a reach mode with the left symbol 1251L and the right symbol 1251R, and waits for the middle symbol 1251C to stop to form a hit mode.

Decorative symbols A are mainly used as the symbols (left symbol 1251L, middle symbol 1251C, and right symbol 1251R) constituting the large symbol group 1251. For example, the left symbol 1251L displays the symbol 1201, the middle symbol 1251C displays the symbol 1203, and the right symbol 1251R displays the symbol 1205.

The small symbol group 1252 is in charge of notifying the variable display state for the purpose of improving the ease of grasping the game state of the player. Therefore, the small symbol group 1252 is displayed small on the peripheral edge of the display device 41 so as to ensure visibility without interfering with the display effect of the large symbol group 1251. The small symbol group 1252 includes a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol. The left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the small symbol group 1252 of the display screen 1250 indicate that the corresponding special symbol variation display game is in the symbol stop state.

In general, the large symbol group 1251 is displayed larger than the small symbol group 1252, the degree of freedom of the display position is high, and the display mode can be greatly changed. On the contrary, the small symbol group 1252 is displayed smaller than the large symbol group 1251, and the degree of freedom of the display position is low (for example, the position is fixed).

The special figure 1 hold number display 1253 displays the hold storage number (starting memory number) of the special figure 1 game. The special figure 2 hold number display 1254 displays the hold storage number of the special figure 2 game. The hold display 1255 can clearly indicate the number of hold storages of the special figure variation display game and notify the degree of expectation for the game result for each hold storage according to the display mode. The hold storage number displayed by the hold display 1255 corresponds to the sum of the hold storage number displayed by the special figure 1 hold number display 1253 and the hold storage number displayed by the special figure 2 hold number display 1254. The hold digestion display 1256 can indicate that the special figure variable display game is in the variable display state and notify the degree of expectation for the game result depending on the display mode.

On the display screen 1250, the number of hold storages of the special figure 1 game shown by the special figure 1 hold number display 1253 is "0", and the number of hold storages of the special figure 2 game shown by the special figure 2 hold number display 1254 is "0". Therefore, the number of hold storages indicated by the hold display 1255 is also "0". Further, the display screen 1250 indicates that the special figure variation display game is stopped by the hold digestion display 1256.

Further, in the gaming machine 10, the large symbol group 1251 and the small symbol group 1252 are each composed of three-digit symbols, but the gaming machine 10 may have any number of digits as long as it includes one or more symbols. Further, in the gaming machine 10, the number of digits of the symbol is the same for the large symbol group 1251 and the small symbol group 1252, but the number of digits of the symbol is different between the large symbol group 1251 and the small symbol group 1252. May be good.

Further, the gaming machine 10 may change the transparency of the symbol for the large symbol group 1251 between the variable display and the stop display, or during the variable display (for example, the transparency is changed from 0% to 50%). The transparency of the symbol can be fixed (for example, fixed to 0%) for the small symbol group 1252. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can secure the visibility of the small symbol group 1252 while ensuring the variety of display effects for the large symbol group 1251 and facilitate the grasp of the gaming state of the player.

Next, the variation display process in the special figure variation display game will be described with reference to FIGS. 170 to 172. FIG. 170 is a diagram (No. 2) showing an example of a display screen in the display device of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 171 is a diagram (No. 3) showing an example of a display screen in the display device of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 172 is a diagram (No. 4) showing an example of a display screen in the display device of the fifth embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 stops and displays the symbol before the start of the fluctuation in the fluctuation display game. The display screen 1261 shown in FIG. 170 (1) shows a state in which the large symbol group 1251 using the decorative symbol A and the small symbol group 1252 are stopped and displayed. The large symbol group 1251 displays all of the graphic elements, the numerical elements, and the character elements in the decorative symbol A. In the large symbol group 1251, the left symbol 1251L displays "1 (symbol 1201)", the middle symbol 1251C displays "2 (symbol 1202)", and the right symbol 1251R displays "2 (symbol 1202)". It is displayed and stopped. The display screen 1261 displays the left symbol 1251L and the right symbol 1251R in a size larger than that of the middle symbol 1251C. The small symbol group 1252 is stopped by displaying the symbols corresponding to the large symbol group 1251 (for example, one-to-one correspondence). In the small symbol group 1252, the left symbol displays "1", the middle symbol displays "2", and the right symbol displays "2". At this time, the reserved memory number of the special figure 1 game shown by the special figure 1 reserved number display 1253 is "2", and the reserved stored number of the special figure 2 game shown by the special figure 2 reserved number display 1254 is "1". Therefore, the number of pending storages indicated by the pending display 1255 is "3". Further, the display screen 1261 indicates that the special figure variation display game is stopped by the hold digestion display 1256.

Next, the gaming machine 10 starts the symbol change. The display screen 1262 shown in FIG. 170 (2) shows a state after the start of variable display of the large symbol group 1251 using the decorative symbol A and the small symbol group 1252. The large symbol group 1251 hides the graphic element and the character element in the decorative symbol A and displays the numerical element. In the large symbol group 1251, the left symbol 1251L displays "1 (symbol element 1201b)", the middle symbol 1251C displays "2 (symbol element 1202b)", and the right symbol 1251R displays "2 (symbol element 1202b)". ) ”Is displayed and the fluctuation is being displayed. The display screen 1262 displays the left symbol 1251L and the right symbol 1251R in a size larger than that of the middle symbol 1251C. The small symbol group 1252 is changing and displaying asynchronously with the large symbol group 1251 by solving the correspondence with the large symbol group 1251. At this time, the special figure 1 hold number display 1253 displays the hold storage number of the special figure 1 game by subtracting it by one, and the hold display 1255 displays the hold storage number of the special figure variation display game by subtracting it by one. do. The hold digestion display 1256 indicates that the special figure variable display game is in the variable display state.

Next, the gaming machine 10 fluctuates by increasing the speed of the symbol fluctuation. The display screen 1264 shown in FIG. 170 (3) shows a state in which the large symbol group 1251 using the decorative symbol A and the small symbol group 1252 are in a variable display. The large symbol group 1251 hides the graphic element and the character element in the decorative symbol A, and displays the numerical element with a predetermined transmittance (for example, a transmittance of 70%).

Next, the gaming machine 10 reduces the speed of the symbol fluctuation to be before the fluctuation stop (for example, the first step of the temporary stop). The display screen 1266 shown in FIG. 170 (4) shows the state before the fluctuation of the large symbol group 1251 using the decorative symbol A and the small symbol group 1252 is stopped. The large symbol group 1251 hides the graphic element and the character element in the decorative symbol A and displays the numerical element. As a result, the gaming machine 10 facilitates the identification of the stop symbol. In the large symbol group 1251, the left symbol 1251L displays "3 (symbol element 1203b)", the middle symbol 1251C displays "5 (symbol element 1205b)", and the right symbol 1251R displays "4 (symbol element 1204b)". ) ”Is displayed and the vehicle is temporarily stopped. The small symbol group 1252 is asynchronously and variablely displayed with the large symbol group 1251 while the correspondence with the large symbol group 1251 is solved.

Next, the gaming machine 10 is before the variable stop (for example, the second step of the temporary stop). The display screen 1268 shown in FIG. 171 (1) shows a state in which the large symbol group 1251 using the decorative symbol A and the small symbol group 1252 are in a state before the fluctuation is stopped. The large symbol group 1251 hides the graphic element and the numerical element in the decorative symbol A and displays the character element. That is, the gaming machine 10 switches the display target from the numerical element to the character element among the identification elements in the decorative symbol A. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can clarify the correspondence between the numerical element and the character element. Further, the gaming machine 10 facilitates the identification of the stop symbol from various angles. In the large symbol group 1251, the left symbol 1251L displays "3 (symbol element 1203c)", the middle symbol 1251C displays "5 (symbol element 1205c)", and the right symbol 1251R displays "4 (symbol element 1204c)". ) ”Is displayed and the vehicle is temporarily stopped. The small symbol group 1252 is asynchronously and variablely displayed with the large symbol group 1251 while the correspondence with the large symbol group 1251 is solved.

Next, the gaming machine 10 is before the variable stop (for example, the temporary stop third step). The display screen 1270 shown in FIG. 171 (2) shows a state in which the large symbol group 1251 using the decorative symbol A and the small symbol group 1252 are in a state before the fluctuation is stopped. The large symbol group 1251 displays graphic elements, numeric elements, and character elements in the decorative symbol A. That is, the gaming machine 10 switches the display target from the character element to all the identification elements among the identification elements in the decorative symbol A. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can clarify the correspondence between the character element and the graphic element. Further, the gaming machine 10 facilitates the identification of the stop symbol from various angles. In the large symbol group 1251, the left symbol 1251L displays "3 (symbol 1203)", the middle symbol 1251C displays "5 (symbol 1205)", and the right symbol 1251R displays "4 (symbol 1204)". It is displayed and temporarily stopped. The small symbol group 1252 is asynchronously and variablely displayed with the large symbol group 1251 while the correspondence with the large symbol group 1251 is solved.

Next, the gaming machine 10 is stopped fluctuating. The display screen 1272 shown in FIG. 171 (3) shows that the large symbol group 1251 using the decorative symbol A and the small symbol group 1252 are in a variable stop state. The small symbol group 1252 is stopped and displayed in correspondence with the large symbol group 1251. Further, the display screen 1272 indicates that the special figure variation display game has stopped the symbol due to the hold digestion display 1256.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can satisfactorily visually recognize the symbol according to the variation display process, and can satisfactorily identify the symbol according to the variation display process.
Next, another example of the display mode of the decorative symbol during the symbol variation (for example, reach variation) is shown in FIG. 172 (1). The display screen 1274 shows a state in which the large symbol group 1277 and the small symbol group 1252 are in variable display. The display screen 1274 includes an effect display area 1275. Since the display area of the large symbol group 1277 is smaller than the display area of the large symbol group 1251 and is not sufficient to display the decorative symbol A, the decoration is similar to a part of the identification element of the decorative symbol A. Display symbol B. The effect display area 1275 is playing the movie A, and the movie A displays the effect element 1276. The large symbol group 1277 displays the decorative symbol B corresponding to the effect element 1276.

Next, another example of the display mode of the decorative symbol during the symbol variation (for example, reach variation) is shown in FIG. 172 (2). The display screen 1278 shows a state in which the large symbol group 1277 and the small symbol group 1252 are in variable display. The display screen 1278 includes an effect display area 1275. Since the display area of the large symbol group 1277 is smaller than the display area of the large symbol group 1251 and is not sufficient to display the decorative symbol A, the decoration is similar to a part of the identification element of the decorative symbol A. The symbol C is displayed. The effect display area 1275 is playing the movie B, and the movie B displays the effect element 1279. The large symbol group 1277 displays the decorative symbol C corresponding to the effect element 1276.

As described above, when the size of the display area of the large symbol group 1277 is not sufficient, the gaming machine 10 can display the decorative symbol B or the decorative symbol C instead of the decorative symbol A. Further, the gaming machine 10 can selectively display the decorative symbol B or the decorative symbol C in accordance with the display content of the effect display area 1275.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can improve the distinctiveness of the symbols in the large symbol group 1277 while improving the effect effect by the effect display area 1275. Further, the gaming machine 10 can further improve the effect of the effect by performing a coordinated effect between the effect display area 1275 and the large symbol group 1277.

Next, the switching timing of the display mode of the decorative symbol will be described with reference to FIG. 173. FIG. 173 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart showing the switching timing of the decorative symbol display mode in the special figure game variation of the fifth embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 performs a special symbol game variation in which the period Ta from the timing t11 to the timing t17 is the symbol variation time and the period Tb from the timing t17 to the timing t18 is the symbol stop time.

The decorative symbol A is a display mode (A1) for displaying all identification elements from before the start of symbol variation to timing t12 (including at least the period Ta1 from timing t11 to timing t12). Further, the decorative symbol A is a display mode (A2) in which the graphic element and the character element are hidden and the numerical element is displayed in the period Ta2 from the timing t12 to the timing t13.

The period Ta3 from the timing t13 to the timing t14 is the movie production period, and the decorative symbol A is switched to the decorative symbol B when the movie A is displayed, and the decorative symbol A becomes the decorative symbol C when the movie B is displayed. Can be switched. If the period Ta3 from the timing t13 to the timing t14 is not set as the movie production period, the decorative symbol A may be continuously displayed during the period.

Then, when the movie production period ends at the timing t14, the decorative symbol B or the decorative symbol C is switched to the decorative symbol A. The decorative symbol A is a display mode (A2) in which the graphic element and the character element are hidden and the numerical element is displayed in the period Ta4 from the timing t14 to the timing t15. The decorative symbol A is a display mode (A3) in which the character element is displayed by hiding the graphic element and the numerical element in the period Ta5 from the timing t15 to the timing t16. The decorative symbol A is a display mode (A1) for displaying all the identification elements in the period Ta6 from the timing t16 to the timing t17, and continues the display mode (A1) including the period Tb from the timing t17 to the timing t18. do.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can selectively display two or more identification elements included in the decorative symbol according to the variable display state. The selective display mode of the two or more identification elements included in the decorative pattern and the switching order are not limited to those exemplified, and may be other combinations or other switching orders.

Next, a modification 1 of the fifth embodiment will be described. In the gaming machine 10 of the first modification of the fifth embodiment, the decorative symbol is composed of two or more identification elements and an accessory element. The decorative design of the first modification of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 174. FIG. 174 is a diagram showing an example of a decorative symbol of the first modification of the fifth embodiment.

A symbol 1291, which is a symbol displaying the number "1" on behalf of the decorative symbol A, will be described. The other symbols (for example, the symbols displaying the numbers "2" and the numbers "3") are the same as the symbols 1291, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

The symbol 1291 is a symbol displaying the number "1". The symbol 1291 includes a graphic element 1291a having distinctiveness as a symbol by a figure (for example, a character such as a boy), a numerical element 1291b having distinctiveness as a symbol by a number "1", and an attachment that does not necessarily have discriminating power. Includes element 1291c. That is, the graphic element 1291a and the numerical element 1291b are identification elements of the symbol 1291, respectively. Further, the graphic element 1291a, the numerical element 1291b, and the accessory element 1291c are constituent elements of the symbol 1291, respectively.

The accessory element 1291c may have a display mode different from that of the accessory element in other symbols, or may have a display mode overlapping. The accessory element 1291c has a predetermined display mode (for example, a star mark) by default, and changes the display mode to one of the special symbols at a predetermined time.

The special symbol includes, for example, "tiger", "pig", and "lion" as characters for notifying the transition to a predetermined gaming state in the variable display game. At this time, the "tiger" notifies the transition to the tiger (tiger) mode (for example, latent probability change), the "pig" notifies the transition to the pig (pig) mode (for example, Fuden support), and the "lion" informs the lion. Notify the transition to the (lion) mode (for example, probability fluctuation). The special symbol may include, for example, "tiger", "pig", and "lion" as characters for notifying a predetermined effect in the variable display game. At this time, "tiger" announces the appearance of a character like a tiger (tiger), "pig" announces the appearance of a character like a pig (pig), and "lion" is a lion (lion). Foretell the production that a character like this will appear.

In addition, the special symbol is a character that informs the reliability of the result (for example, a big hit) derived by the variable display game, for example, "?", "!", "!!", "chance", "super heat", " Includes "correct". At this time, "?" Notifies the jackpot reliability "1%", "!" Notifies the jackpot reliability "10%", and "!!" informs the jackpot reliability "20%". , "Chance" notifies the jackpot reliability "30%", "super heat" notifies the jackpot reliability "90%", and "correct" notifies the jackpot reliability "100%". Further, the special symbol includes, for example, "development" and "continuation" as characters for notifying the progress in the variable display game. At this time, "development" informs the development to super reach, and "continuation" informs the continuation of the pseudo-ream. Further, the special symbol includes, for example, "hit", "hit 5R", "hit 16R", "time reduction", and "probability change" as characters for notifying the value of the result (hit) derived by the variable display game. At this time, "hit" notifies the hit itself without clearly indicating the magnitude of the value, "hit 5R" informs that it is a hit of the 5R round, and "hit 16R" is a hit of the 16R round. Notify, "time reduction" informs that it is a hit accompanied by time reduction (Public electric support), and "probability change" informs that it is a hit accompanied by probability fluctuation.

Further, the special symbol includes, for example, "mode A", "mode B", and "mode C" as characters for notifying the mode change on the display effect. At this time, "mode A" notifies the transition to mode A, "mode B" notifies the transition to mode B, and "mode C" notifies the transition to mode C. Further, the special symbol includes, for example, "last 10 times" as a character for notifying the number of continuations of a predetermined gaming state such as a normal electric support or a probability fluctuation. At this time, "last 10 times" notifies that the number of continuations of the probability fluctuation is 10 times remaining. In addition, the special symbol includes, for example, "press!" As a character for notifying the game guidance. At this time, "press!" Notifies the reception timing of the pressing operation of the push button 25.

The symbol 1291 can also selectively display the identification element and the accessory element, as in the decorative symbol A described in the fifth embodiment. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can achieve both improvement in the distinctiveness of the symbol and improvement in the effect of the effect.

Next, the gaming machine 10 of the second modification of the fifth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine 10 of the second modification of the fifth embodiment makes it possible to easily recognize the variable state of the symbol by the temporary stop display mode according to the variable display process.

First, the configuration of the display screen in the display device 41 will be described with reference to FIG. 175. FIG. 175 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen in the display device of the second modification of the fifth embodiment.
The display screen 1330 shown in FIG. 175 (1) is a display content of the display device 41 in which the symbol is stopped in the variable display game. The display screen 1330 includes two sets of decorative symbols, a special figure 1 hold number display 1303, a special figure 2 hold number display 1304, a hold display 1305, and a hold digestion display 1306.

The two sets of decorative symbols include a large symbol group 1331 as the first decorative symbol and a small symbol group 1302 as the second decorative symbol. The large design group 1331 is in charge of game production for the purpose of improving the interest. Therefore, the large symbol group 1331 is displayed large in the substantially central portion of the display device 41. The large symbol group 1331 includes an upper left symbol 1331A, a lower left symbol 1331B, a middle upper symbol 1331C, a middle lower symbol 1331D, an upper right symbol 1331E, and a lower right symbol 1331F. The special symbol variation display game corresponding to the upper left symbol 1331A, the lower left symbol 1331B, the middle upper symbol 1331C, the middle lower symbol 1331D, the upper right symbol 1331E, and the lower right symbol 1331F of the display screen 1330 is in a symbol stop state. Indicates that. The large symbol group 1331 has a first effective line consisting of the upper left symbol 1331A, a middle upper symbol 1331C, and an upper right symbol 1331E, and a second effective line consisting of the lower left symbol 1331B, the middle lower symbol 1331D, and the lower right symbol 1331F. , The hit effective line.

The upper left symbol 1331A and the lower left symbol 1331B, the middle upper symbol 1331C and the middle lower symbol 1331D, and the upper right symbol 1331E and the lower right symbol 1331F are on the same symbol arrangement, and scroll in the vertical direction in conjunction with each other.

Further, the upper left symbol 1331A, the lower left symbol 1331B, the middle upper symbol 1331C, the middle lower symbol 1331D, the upper right symbol 1331E, and the lower right symbol 1331F are configured to include the identification element 1332 and the auxiliary element 1333, respectively. To. The identification element 1332 contains information that can uniquely identify a symbol, and is configured to include, for example, a number. The auxiliary element 1333 is an auxiliary element that guides the fluctuation state of the upper left symbol 1331A, the lower left symbol 1331B, the middle upper symbol 1331C, the middle lower symbol 1331D, the upper right symbol 1331E, and the lower right symbol 1331F. For example, the upper left symbol 1331A includes the number "1" as the identification element 1332, and is specified to be a symbol corresponding to the number "1". Further, the upper left symbol 1331A is guided to the symbol stop state by the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333.

The auxiliary element 1333 is a display element that assists in guiding the state of the fluctuation table, and is a decorative element that decorates the design from one viewpoint. The auxiliary element 1333 can be composed of, for example, a character, a figure, or the like.

The small symbol group 1302 is in charge of notifying the variable display state for the purpose of improving the ease of grasping the game state of the player. Therefore, the small symbol group 1302 is displayed small on the peripheral edge of the display device 41 so as to ensure visibility without interfering with the display effect by the large symbol group 1331. The small symbol group 1302 includes a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol. The left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the small symbol group 1302 on the display screen 1330 indicate that the corresponding special symbol variation display game is in the symbol stop state.

In general, the large symbol group 1331 is displayed larger than the small symbol group 1302, the degree of freedom of the display position is high, and the display mode can be greatly changed. On the contrary, the small symbol group 1302 is displayed smaller than the large symbol group 1331, and the degree of freedom of the display position is low (for example, the position is fixed).

The special figure 1 hold number display 1303 displays the hold storage number (starting memory number) of the special figure 1 game. The special figure 2 hold number display 1304 displays the hold storage number of the special figure 2 game. The hold display 1305 can clearly indicate the number of hold storages of the special figure variation display game and notify the degree of expectation for the game result for each hold storage according to the display mode. The hold storage number displayed by the hold display 1305 corresponds to the sum of the hold storage number displayed by the special figure 1 hold number display 1303 and the hold storage number displayed by the special figure 2 hold number display 1304. The hold digestion display 1306 can indicate that the special figure variable display game is in the variable display state and notify the degree of expectation for the game result depending on the display mode.

On the display screen 1330, the reserved storage number of the special figure 1 game indicated by the special figure 1 reserved number display 1303 is “0”, and the reserved storage number of the special figure 2 game indicated by the special figure 2 reserved number display 1304 is “0”. Therefore, the number of hold storages indicated by the hold display 1305 is also "0". Further, the display screen 1330 indicates that the special figure variation display game is stopped by the hold digestion display 1306.

Further, in the gaming machine 10, the large symbol group 1331 is composed of six symbols and the small symbol group 1302 is composed of three-digit symbols, but any number may be used as long as it includes one or more symbols. Further, in the gaming machine 10, the number of digits of the symbol is the same in the large symbol group 1331 and the small symbol group 1302, but the number of digits of the symbol is different between the large symbol group 1331 and the small symbol group 1302. May be good. For example, the small symbol group 1302 displays the symbol "1, 2, 2" corresponding to the first effective line of the large symbol group 1331, but corresponds to the first effective line and the second effective line of the large symbol group 1331. The symbol "1, 2, 2, 2, 1, 1" may be displayed.

Further, even if the gaming machine 10 changes the transparency of the symbol for the large symbol group 1331 between the variable display and the stop display, or during the variable display (for example, the transparency is changed from 0% to 50%), the game machine 10 may change the transparency. The transparency of the symbol can be fixed (for example, fixed to 0%) for the small symbol group 1302. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can secure the visibility of the small symbol group 1302 while ensuring the variety of display effects for the large symbol group 1331, and facilitate the grasp of the gaming state of the player.

Further, even if the game machine 10 changes the hue of the symbol of the large symbol group 1331 (for example, from red to blue) during the variable display and the stop display, or during the variable display, the small symbol group The hue of the design can be fixed (for example, fixed to red) for 1302. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may change the saturation of the symbol for the large symbol group 1331 between the variable display and the stop display, or during the variable display (for example, the saturation is changed from 100% to 0%). Also, the saturation of the symbol can be fixed (for example, fixed to 100%) for the small symbol group 1302. Further, even if the gaming machine 10 changes the brightness of the symbol for the large symbol group 1331 between the variable display and the stop display, or during the variable display (for example, the brightness is changed from 100% to 10%), the gaming machine 10 may change the brightness. The brightness of the symbol can be fixed (for example, fixed to 100%) for the small symbol group 1302. Further, the gaming machine 10 may change the size of the symbol for the large symbol group 1331 between the variable display and the stop display, or during the variable display (for example, change from the standard size to the enlarged (reduced) size). Even if there is, the size of the symbol can be fixed for the small symbol group 1302. Further, even if the gaming machine 10 changes the display position of the symbol for the large symbol group 1331 between the variable display and the stop display, or during the variable display (for example, the display position is changed from the center of the screen to the upper left of the screen). The display position of the symbol for the small symbol group 1302 can be fixed (for example, fixed at the lower right of the screen). Further, the gaming machine 10 may change the design of the large symbol group 1331 (for example, change from a rectangle to a circle, or change from a number to a character) between the variable display and the stop display, or during the variable display. Even if there is, the design of the symbol can be fixed (for example, fixed to a number) for the small symbol group 1302. Further, even if the gaming machine 10 may change the variable display mode of the symbol for the large symbol group 1331 (for example, change from vertical scroll to horizontal scroll) during the variable display, the variable display mode of the symbol for the small symbol group 1302. Can be fixed (for example, fixed to shaft rotation fluctuation).

Even with these, the gaming machine 10 can secure the visibility of the small symbol group 1302 while ensuring the variety of display effects for the large symbol group 1331, and facilitate the grasp of the gaming state of the player.

Further, the gaming machine 10 can have different modes of variation during the variation display for the large symbol group 1331 and the small symbol group 1302. For example, the gaming machine 10 can easily distinguish between the large symbol group 1331 and the small symbol group 1302 when the large symbol group 1331 is vertically scrolled. Further, the gaming machine 10 can reduce the sense of discomfort given to the player even if the symbols are asynchronously updated between the large symbol group 1331 and the small symbol group 1302.

The display screen 1334 shown in FIG. 175 (2) is the display content of the display device 41 during the symbol variation in the variation display game. On the display screen 1334, the number of hold storages of the special figure 1 game shown by the special figure 1 hold number display 1303 is "1", and the number of hold storages of the special figure 2 game shown by the special figure 2 hold number display 1304 is "0". Therefore, the number of hold storages indicated by the hold display 1305 is also "1". Further, the display screen 1334 indicates that the special figure variation display game is undergoing symbol variation by the hold digestion display 1306. In the upper left symbol 1331A, lower left symbol 1331B, middle upper symbol 1331C, middle lower symbol 1331D, upper right symbol 1331E, and lower right symbol 1331F of the display screen 1334, the corresponding special symbol variation display game is in the symbol variation state. Indicates that. Further, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the small symbol group 1302 on the display screen 1334 indicate that the corresponding special symbol variation display game is in the symbol variation state.

At this time, the upper left symbol 1331A, the lower left symbol 1331B, the middle upper symbol 1331C, the middle lower symbol 1331D, the upper right symbol 1331E, and the lower right symbol 1331F all have symbols that do not clearly indicate the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333. Indicates that the variable display is in progress.

Here, the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 will be described with reference to FIG. 176. FIG. 176 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a large symbol in the display device of the second modification of the fifth embodiment.

The symbol 1335 shown in FIG. 176 (1) is one display mode of the symbol (large symbol) included in the large symbol group 1331, and shows a state in which the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 is not specified. The display mode (unspecified) of the auxiliary element 1333 indicates a specific variable display state, and for example, the symbol 1335 is a display mode from the start of the fluctuation to the stop (temporary stop) of the symbol.

The symbol 1336 shown in FIG. 176 (2) is one display mode of the symbols included in the large symbol group 1331, and shows a state in which the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 is clearly indicated by the first color (for example, silver). The display mode (explicit) of the auxiliary element 1333 indicates a specific variable display state, for example, a state during a symbol stop (temporary stop).

The symbol 1336 shown in FIG. 176 (3) is one display mode of the symbols included in the large symbol group 1331, and shows a state in which the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 is clearly indicated by a second color (for example, gold). The display mode (explicit) of the auxiliary element 1333 indicates a specific variable display state, for example, a state during a symbol stop (temporary stop).

The color in the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 may be selected according to the current gaming state, such as the establishment of reach on the jackpot effective line and the establishment of jackpot on the jackpot effective line. Further, the color in the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 may be selected according to the progress of the game, such as the magnitude of the expectation, the reach notice, the big hit notice, and the like.

Next, the temporary stop display mode of the symbol (large symbol) included in the large symbol group 1331 will be described with reference to FIG. 177. FIG. 177 is a diagram showing an example of a list of temporary stop display modes for each state of a large symbol in the display device of the second modification of the fifth embodiment.

The symbol 1338 shown in FIG. 177 (1) is one display mode of the symbols included in the large symbol group 1331, and shows a temporary stop display mode in which the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 is not specified. The symbol 1338 swings in the scroll direction (vertical direction) by obscuring the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333.

The symbol 1339 shown in FIG. 177 (2) is one display mode of the symbols included in the large symbol group 1331, and shows a temporary stop display mode that clearly indicates the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333. The symbol 1339 dynamically changes the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 (for example, the symbol 1339a and the symbol 1339b are alternately displayed) (non-fixed display). In such a temporary stop display mode, since the identification element 1332 is statically displayed, the visibility of the identification element 1332 is excellent. On the other hand, in the temporary stop display mode, since the auxiliary element 1333 is dynamically displayed, the symbol 1339 provides the guidance effect and the effect of the temporary stop display state while ensuring the visibility of the identification element 1332. It can be compatible.

The symbol 1340 shown in FIG. 177 (3) is one display mode of the symbols included in the large symbol group 1331, and shows a temporary stop display mode in which the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 is clearly indicated. The symbol 1340 swings (for example, the symbol 1340a) so as to rotate at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical axis of the symbol 1340 as a whole while statically displaying (fixing display) the auxiliary element 1333 with respect to the identification element 1332. And the symbol 1340b are displayed alternately). Such a temporary stop display mode can guide and produce a temporary stop display state in a form different from the temporary stop display mode according to the symbol 1339.

Next, the variation display process in the special figure variation display game will be described with reference to FIGS. 178 to 181. FIG. 178 is a diagram showing an example (No. 1) of a screen displayed by the display device of the second modification of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 179 is a diagram showing an example (No. 2) of a screen displayed by the display device of the second modification of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 180 is a diagram showing an example (No. 3) of a screen displayed by the display device of the second modification of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 181 is a diagram showing an example (No. 4) of a screen displayed by the display device of the second modification of the fifth embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 stops and displays the symbol before the start of the fluctuation in the fluctuation display game. The display screen 1341 shown in FIG. 178 (1) shows a state in which the large symbol group 1331 and the small symbol group 1302 are stopped and displayed. In the large symbol group 1331, the upper left symbol 1331A displays "1", the middle upper symbol 1331C displays "2", the upper right symbol 1331E displays "2", and the lower left symbol 1331B displays "2". Is displayed, the lower right symbol 1331D displays "1", and the lower right symbol 1331F displays "1" and is stopped. The small symbol group 1302 is stopped by displaying the symbol corresponding to the large symbol group 1331. In the small symbol group 1302, the left symbol displays "1", the middle symbol displays "2", and the right symbol displays "2". At this time, the reserved memory number of the special figure 1 game shown by the special figure 1 reserved number display 1303 is "2", and the reserved stored number of the special figure 2 game shown by the special figure 2 reserved number display 1304 is "1". Therefore, the number of pending storages indicated by the pending display 1305 is "3". Further, the display screen 1341 indicates that the special figure variation display game is stopped by the hold digestion display 1306.

Next, the gaming machine 10 starts the symbol change. The display screen 1342 shown in FIG. 178 (2) shows the state after the start of the variable display of the large symbol group 1331 and the small symbol group 1302. In the large symbol group 1331, the upper left symbol 1331A, the lower left symbol 1331B, the middle upper symbol 1331C, the middle lower symbol 1331D, the upper right symbol 1331E, and the lower right symbol 1331F are being displayed in a variable manner. The small symbol group 1302 is changing and displaying asynchronously with the large symbol group 1331 by solving the correspondence with the large symbol group 1331. At this time, the special figure 1 hold number display 1303 is displayed by subtracting the number of hold storages of the special figure 1 game by one, and the hold display 1305 is displayed by reducing the number of hold storages of the special figure variation display game by one. do. The hold digestion display 1306 indicates that the special figure variable display game is in the variable display state.

Next, the gaming machine 10 temporarily stops and displays the upper left symbol 1331A and the lower left symbol 1331B in a temporary manner. On the display screen 1344 shown in FIG. 178 (3), the upper left symbol 1331A and the lower left symbol 1331B of the large symbol group 1331 are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the middle upper symbol 1331C, the middle lower symbol 1331D, and the upper right are displayed. The symbol 1331E and the lower right symbol 1331F are being displayed in a variable manner. The upper left symbol 1331A and the lower left symbol 1331B display "1" and "2", respectively, and temporarily stop while swinging in the vertical direction. In the small symbol group 1302, some symbols are being displayed in a variable manner without being temporarily stopped. At this time, the temporary stop display performed by the upper left symbol 1331A and the lower left symbol 1331B is a temporary temporary stop display mode, and is to smoothly connect to the temporary stop display mode performed on the display screen 1346 shown in FIG. 178 (4). It is a connecting display. The temporary stop display performed by the upper left symbol 1331A and the lower left symbol 1331B swings in the vertical direction in synchronization with the upper left symbol 1331A and the lower left symbol 1331B (see the symbol 1338 in FIG. 177). Since the gaming machine 10 has a temporary temporary stop display mode, the upper left symbol 1331A and the lower left symbol 1331B are synchronously swung in the vertical direction only for a short period (for example, one cycle).

Next, the gaming machine 10 temporarily stops and displays the upper left symbol 1331A and the lower left symbol 1331B in a non-temporary manner. On the display screen 1346 shown in FIG. 178 (4), the upper left symbol 1331A and the lower left symbol 1331B of the large symbol group 1331 are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the middle upper symbol 1331C and the middle lower symbol 1331D are displayed. The upper right symbol 1331E and the lower right symbol 1331F are being displayed in a variable manner. The upper left symbol 1331A and the lower left symbol 1331B display "1" and "2", respectively, and temporarily stop while dynamically changing the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333. In the small symbol group 1302, some symbols are being displayed in a variable manner without being temporarily stopped. At this time, the temporary stop display performed by the upper left symbol 1331A and the lower left symbol 1331B is a non-temporary temporary stop display mode. The temporary stop display performed by the upper left symbol 1331A and the lower left symbol 1331B dynamically changes the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 in the upper left symbol 1331A and the lower left symbol 1331B (see the symbol 1339 in FIG. 177). Since the gaming machine 10 has a non-temporary temporary stop display mode, the game machine 10 repeatedly dynamically changes the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 performed by the upper left symbol 1331A and the lower left symbol 1331B.

Next, the gaming machine 10 temporarily stops and displays the upper right symbol 1331E and the lower right symbol 1331F in a non-temporary manner. On the display screen 1348 shown in FIG. 179 (1), the upper left symbol 1331A, the lower left symbol 1331B, the upper right symbol 1331E, and the lower right symbol 1331F of the large symbol group 1331 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a non-temporary manner. The middle upper symbol 1331C and the middle lower symbol 1331D are being displayed in a variable manner. The upper left symbol 1331A and the lower left symbol 1331B display "1" and "2", respectively, and the upper right symbol 1331E and the lower right symbol 1331F display "1" and "9", respectively, to display the auxiliary element 1333. Temporarily stop while changing dynamically. In the small symbol group 1302, some symbols are being displayed in a variable manner without being temporarily stopped. At this time, the display screen 1348 forms the reach mode of the symbol "1" at the first effective line.

Next, the gaming machine 10 notifies the reach mode formed by the first effective line. The display screen 1350 shown in FIG. 179 (2) notifies the reach mode formed by the first effective line by the notification display 1351. The notification display 1351 guides the formation of the reach mode by the character message "reach!", And guides the formation of the reach mode in the first effective line by the outer shape along the first effective line. In this way, the gaming machine 10 temporarily stops while dynamically changing the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 as one of the variable display states (reach mode formation process) until the reach mode is notified. .. That is, the temporary stop display mode while dynamically changing the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 guides the reach mode forming process.

In the upper left symbol 1331A and the upper right symbol 1331E that form the reach mode on the first effective line, the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 is set to the second color (for example, gold), and the formation of the reach mode is clearly shown to the player (reach notification). ) May be done. Further, the upper left symbol 1331A and the upper right symbol 1331E clearly indicate to the player that the reach mode is formed by setting the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 to the second color before forming the reach mode on the first effective line (reach). (Notice) may be given. In addition, the symbol which is not subject to the notice shows the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 in the state clearly indicated by the first color (for example, silver).

Next, the gaming machine 10 displays the reach mode (the process of forming the hit mode). On the display screen 1352 shown in FIG. 179 (3), the upper left symbol 1331A, the lower left symbol 1331B, the upper right symbol 1331E, and the lower right symbol 1331F of the large symbol group 1331 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a non-temporary manner. The middle upper symbol 1331C and the middle lower symbol 1331D are being displayed in a variable manner. The upper left symbol 1331A and the lower left symbol 1331B display "1" and "2", respectively, and the upper right symbol 1331E and the lower right symbol 1331F display "1" and "9", respectively.

The upper left symbol 1331A and the upper right symbol 1331E forming the reach mode on the first effective line are temporarily stopped while swinging so as to rotate at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical axis. On the other hand, the lower left symbol 1331B and the lower right symbol 1331F, which do not form a reach mode on the second effective line, are displayed semi-transparently after the symbols are stopped. In the small symbol group 1302, some symbols are being displayed in a variable manner without being temporarily stopped.

In this way, after the notification of the reach mode, the gaming machine 10 swings so as to rotate the symbol at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical axis as one of the variable display states (hit mode forming process). While temporarily stopping. That is, the temporary stop display mode in which the symbol is swung so as to rotate at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical axis guides the process of forming the hit mode.

On the display screen 1354 shown in FIG. 179 (4), the upper left symbol 1331A, the lower left symbol 1331B, the upper right symbol 1331E, and the lower right symbol 1331F of the large symbol group 1331 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a non-temporary manner. The middle-upper symbol 1331C and the middle-lower symbol 1331D are being displayed in a variable manner while being enlarged. The display screen 1354 is one of the display states in which the player's attention is expected to be paid to the middle and lower symbols 1331C and the middle and lower symbols 1331D. Further, the display screen 1354 is one of the display modes for guiding the process of forming the hit mode, similarly to the display screen 1352.

On the display screen 1356 shown in FIG. 180 (1), the upper left symbol 1331A, the lower left symbol 1331B, the upper right symbol 1331E, and the lower right symbol 1331F of the large symbol group 1331 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a non-temporary manner. The Nakagami symbol 1331C is being displayed in a variable manner while being enlarged. The display screen 1356 is one of the display states in which the player's attention is expected to be paid to the Nakagami symbol 1331C. Further, the display screen 1356 is one of the display modes for guiding the process of forming the hit mode, similarly to the display screen 1352.

On the display screen 1358 shown in FIG. 180 (2), the upper left symbol 1331A, the lower left symbol 1331B, the upper right symbol 1331E, and the lower right symbol 1331F of the large symbol group 1331 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a non-temporary manner. Nakagami symbol 1331C is temporarily stopped. The display screen 1358 is one of the display states in which the player's attention is expected to be paid to the Nakagami symbol 1331C. Further, the display screen 1358 is one of the display modes for guiding the process of forming the hit mode, similarly to the display screen 1352. Further, the Nakagami symbol 1331C displays "1" and temporarily stops while dynamically changing the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333.

The display screen 1360 shown in FIG. 180 (3) and the display screen 1362 shown in FIG. 180 (4) temporarily stop and display the hit mode (the process of forming the hit mode). The display screens 1360 and 1362 display a temporary stop while swinging the symbol on the first effective line of the large symbol group 1331 so as to rotate at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical axis, and display the temporary stop on the second effective line. Stop and display the design.

The display screen 1364 shown in FIG. 181 (1) stops and displays the symbol in a hit manner, and derives the variation display result in the variation display game. The display screen 1364 shows a state in which the large symbol group 1331 and the small symbol group 1302 are stopped and displayed. In the large symbol group 1331, the upper left symbol 1331A displays "1", the middle upper symbol 1331C displays "1", the upper right symbol 1331E displays "1", and the lower left symbol 1331B displays "2". Is displayed, the lower right symbol 1331D displays "9", and the lower right symbol 1331F displays "9" and is stopped. The small symbol group 1302 is stopped by displaying the symbol corresponding to the large symbol group 1331. In the small symbol group 1302, the left symbol displays "1", the middle symbol displays "1", and the right symbol displays "1". The display screen 1364 indicates that the special figure variation display game has stopped the symbol due to the hold digestion display 1306.

Up to this point, the variable display process leading to the hit mode through the reach mode forming process and the hit mode forming process has been described. Next, the variable display process leading to the missing mode without going through the reach mode forming process will be described.

The display screen 1366 shown in FIG. 181 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 1364. On the display screen 1366, the upper left symbol 1331A, the lower left symbol 1331B, the upper right symbol 1331E, and the lower right symbol 1331F are temporarily stopped and displayed in a non-temporary manner among the large symbol group 1331, and the middle upper symbol 1331C and the middle lower symbol are displayed. The symbol 1331D is being displayed in a variable manner. The upper left symbol 1331A and the lower left symbol 1331B display "1" and "2", respectively, and temporarily stop while dynamically changing the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333, and the upper right symbol 1331E and the lower right symbol 1331F are "1" and "2", respectively. 7 ”and“ 6 ”are displayed, and the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 is dynamically changed to temporarily stop. That is, the display screen 1366 does not form a reach mode in either the first effective line or the second effective line.

In the small symbol group 1302, some symbols are being displayed in a variable manner without being temporarily stopped. At this time, the temporary stop display performed by the upper left symbol 1331A, the lower left symbol 1331B, the upper right symbol 1331E, and the lower right symbol 1331F is a non-temporary temporary stop display mode.

The display screen 1368 shown in FIG. 181 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 1366. In the display screen 1368, all the symbols of the symbol group 1331 are in a non-temporary temporary stop display mode. The upper left symbol 1331A and the lower left symbol 1331B display "1" and "2", respectively, and temporarily stop while dynamically changing the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333, and the middle upper symbol 1331C and the middle lower symbol 1331D, respectively. "6" and "5" are displayed and temporarily stopped while dynamically changing the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333, and the upper right symbol 1331E and the lower right symbol 1331F display "7" and "6", respectively. Temporarily stop while dynamically changing the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333. That is, the display screen 1368 is an out-of-order mode that does not form a reach mode in either the first effective line or the second effective line. In the small symbol group 1302, some symbols are being displayed in a variable manner without being temporarily stopped. At this time, the temporary stop display performed by all the symbols of the symbol group 1331 is a non-temporary temporary stop display mode. That is, the display screen 1368 does not have an opportunity to perform a temporary stop display for guiding the hit mode forming process by reaching the detached mode without going through the reach mode forming process.

The display screen 1370 shown in FIG. 181 (4) stops and displays the symbol in an out-of-order manner, and derives the variation display result in the variation display game. The display screen 1370 shows a state in which the large symbol group 1331 and the small symbol group 1302 are stopped and displayed. In the large symbol group 1331, the upper left symbol 1331A displays "1", the middle upper symbol 1331C displays "6", the upper right symbol 1331E displays "7", and the lower left symbol 1331B displays "2". Is displayed, the lower right symbol 1331D displays "5", and the lower right symbol 1331F displays "6" and is stopped. The small symbol group 1302 is stopped by displaying the symbol corresponding to the large symbol group 1331. In the small symbol group 1302, the left symbol displays "1", the middle symbol displays "6", and the right symbol displays "7". The display screen 1370 indicates that the special figure variation display game has stopped the symbol due to the hold digestion display 1306.

The gaming machine 10 changes the temporary stop display mode according to the reach mode forming process and the hit mode forming process, but changes the temporary stop display mode according to other variable display states (game states). You may.

Further, although the gaming machine 10 changes the temporary stop display mode according to the reach mode forming process and the hit mode forming process, the temporary stop display mode may be changed according to the number of symbols to be temporarily stopped. ..

Further, although the gaming machine 10 changes the temporary stop display mode according to the reach mode forming process and the hit mode forming process, the temporary stop display mode may be changed according to the position and number of effective lines. ..

In this way, the gaming machine 10 changes the temporary stop display mode according to the variable display state (game state), thereby guiding the player from the temporary stop display mode displayed on the display device 41 to the variable display state. be able to.

Next, the gaming machine 10 of the third modification of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 182. The gaming machine 10 of the third modification of the fifth embodiment changes the temporary stop display mode by changing the display mode of the symbol.

The provisional stop display mode of the gaming machine 10 of the modification 3 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 182. FIG. 182 is a diagram showing an example of a temporary stop display mode of a large symbol in the display device of the modification 3 of the fifth embodiment.

The symbol 1380 shown in FIG. 182 (1) is a symbol constituting the large symbol group 1331. The symbol 1380 includes a background element 1381, a subordinate identification element 1382, and a main identification element 1383. In the symbol 1380, the subordinate identification element 1382 and the main identification element 1383 are overlapped with the background element 1381 as the background, and the main identification element 1383 is brought to the foreground. The main identification element 1383 is an identification display that makes it possible to identify a symbol, and is, for example, a character, a figure, or the like. The subordinate identification element 1382 is an identification display that assists the main identification element 1383 to make it possible to identify a symbol, and is, for example, a character or the like. The symbol 1380 includes the background element 1381, the subordinate identification element 1382, and the main identification element 1383, and swings in the scroll direction (vertical direction) to realize one of the temporary stop display modes.

The symbol 1384 shown in FIG. 182 (2) is a symbol constituting the large symbol group 1331. The symbol 1384 includes a subordinate identification element 1382 and a main identification element 1383. In the symbol 1384, the subordinate identification element 1382 and the main identification element 1383 are overlapped with each other, and the main identification element 1383 is brought to the foreground. The symbol 1384 includes the subordinate identification element 1382 and the main identification element 1383 and swings in the scroll direction (vertical direction) to realize one of the temporary stop display modes.

The symbol 1385 shown in FIG. 182 (3) is a symbol constituting the large symbol group 1331. The symbol 1385 includes a background element 1381 and a main identification element 1383. In the symbol 1385, the main identification element 1383 is overlapped with the background element 1381 as the background, and the main identification element 1383 is brought to the foreground. The symbol 1385 realizes one of the temporary stop display modes by swinging in the scroll direction (vertical direction) including the background element 1381 and the main identification element 1383.

The symbol 1386 shown in FIG. 182 (4) is a symbol constituting the large symbol group 1331. Symbol 1386 includes a main discriminating element 1383. The symbol 1386 has the main identification element 1383 in the foreground. The symbol 1386 includes the main identification element 1383 and swings in the scroll direction (vertical direction) to realize one of the temporary stop display modes.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can change the temporary stop display mode by changing the display mode of the symbol. With the temporary stop display mode changed in this way, the gaming machine 10 can guide the player to the variable display state.

The gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment (including the modified example) described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a display means (display device 41) and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display means can display a variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game, special figure 2 variable display game). The control means causes the display means to display the variable display game including the symbol group (large symbol group 1331) composed of a plurality of symbols. Further, the control means displays a predetermined number of symbols in the first temporary stop display mode (1) when a predetermined number of symbols (upper left symbol 1331A, upper right symbol 1331E) form a reach mode and perform a temporary stop display. Display screen 1352, 1354), and when a predetermined number of symbols (upper left symbol 1331A, upper right symbol 1331E) perform a temporary stop display without forming a reach mode, the predetermined number of symbols are different from the first temporary stop display mode. As the second temporary stop display mode (display screens 1366, 1368), the display means is displayed.

The gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment (including the modified example) described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a display means (display device 41) and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display means can display a variable display game in which a symbol is variablely displayed. The control means includes a first component having a first discriminating power (for example, a graphic element 1201a) and a second component having a second discriminating power (for example, a number element 1201b or a character element 1201c). The first component and the second component are selectively displayed on the display means according to the variable display process.

(2) The gaming machine 10 includes a display means (display device 41) and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display means can display a variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game, special figure 2 variable display game). The control means causes the display means to display the variable display game including the symbol group (large symbol group 1331) composed of a plurality of symbols. Further, the control means displays a predetermined number of symbols in the first temporary stop display mode (1) when a predetermined number of symbols (upper left symbol 1331A, upper right symbol 1331E) form a reach mode and perform a temporary stop display. Display screen 1352, 1354), and when a predetermined number of symbols (upper left symbol 1331A, upper right symbol 1331E) perform a temporary stop display without forming a reach mode, the predetermined number of symbols are different from the first temporary stop display mode. As the second temporary stop display mode (display screens 1366, 1368), the display means is displayed.

(3) The gaming machine 10 includes a display means (display device 41) and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display means can display a variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game, special figure 2 variable display game). The control means causes the display means to display the variable display game including the symbol group (large symbol group 1331) composed of a plurality of symbols. Further, when the temporary stop display of the symbol is performed, the control means adds a decorative element (auxiliary element 1333) for decorating the symbol to the symbol, puts the symbol in a stopped state, and puts the decorative element in a non-stop state (design 1339). And display it on the display means (display screens 1348, 1350).

(4) The gaming machine 10 includes a display means (display device 41) and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display means can display a variable display game in which a symbol is variablely displayed. The control means discriminates the symbol from the first component having the first discriminating power (for example, the graphic element 1201a) and the second component having the second discriminating power (for example, the numerical element 1201b). It is configured to include a third component having power (for example, a character element 1201c), and the first component, the second component, and the third component are selectively displayed on the display means according to the variable display process. Let me.

(5) The gaming machine 10 includes a display means (display device 41) and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display means can display a variable display game in which a symbol is variablely displayed. The control means comprises a design including a first component having a first discriminating power (for example, a graphic element 1201a) and a second component having a second discriminating power (for example, a numerical element 1201b). Further, the first component is configured to include a third component (for example, a head when the first component is a character) and a fourth component (for example, an upper body when the first component is a character). Then, according to the variable display process, the first component is displayed only on the third component, or the third component and the fourth component are selectively displayed on the display means.

(6) The gaming machine 10 includes a display means (display device 41) and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display means can display a variable display game in which a symbol is variablely displayed. The control means comprises a design including a first component having a first discriminating power (for example, a graphic element 1201a) and a second component having a second discriminating power (for example, a numerical element 1201b). Further, the first component is configured to include a third component (for example, a head when the first component is a character) and a fourth component (for example, an upper body when the first component is a character). Then, the second component, the third component, and the fourth component are selectively displayed on the display means according to the variable display process.

The above processing function can be realized by a computer. In that case, a program describing the processing contents of the functions that the gaming machine of the embodiment should have is provided. By executing the program on a computer, the above processing function is realized on the computer. The program describing the processing content can be recorded on a computer-readable recording medium. The recording medium that can be read by a computer includes a magnetic storage device, an optical disk, a photomagnetic recording medium, a semiconductor memory, and the like. The magnetic storage device includes a hard disk device (HDD), a flexible disk (FD), a magnetic tape, and the like. Optical discs include DVD (Digital Versatile Disk), DVD-RAM, CD (Compact Disk) -ROM / RW (ReWritable), and the like. The magneto-optical recording medium includes MO (Magneto-Optical disk) and the like.

When a program is distributed, for example, a portable recording medium such as a DVD or a CD-ROM in which the program is recorded is sold. It is also possible to store the program in the storage device of the server computer and transfer the program from the server computer to another computer via the network.

The computer that executes the program stores, for example, the program recorded on the portable recording medium or the program transferred from the server computer in its own storage device. Then, the computer reads the program from its own storage device and executes the processing according to the program. The computer can also read the program directly from the portable recording medium and execute the processing according to the program. Further, the computer can sequentially execute the processing according to the received program each time the program is transferred from the server computer connected via the network.

Further, at least a part of the above processing functions can be realized by an electronic circuit such as a DSP (Digital Signal Processor), an ASIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit), or a PLD (Programmable Logic Device).

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the disclosed embodiment as a gaming machine, and is not limited to, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. It is applicable to all gaming machines that use the game balls of the above, and slot machines that are gaming machines that use medals.

It should also be considered that the disclosed embodiments are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. Further, each configuration of the above-described embodiment and modification may be applied in combination. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

10 Game machine 41 Display device 100 Game control device 300 Production control device

Claims (1)

Display means and
A control for causing the display means to display a variable display game that displays a symbol in a variable manner, a hold display that indicates the start storage number of the variable display game, and a hold digestion display that indicates that the variable display game is in the variable display state. Means, including
The symbols include the first symbol and the second symbol.
The first symbol is composed of a first large symbol, a second large symbol, and a third large symbol.
The second symbol is composed of a first small symbol, a second small symbol, and a third small symbol, which are smaller than the first symbol.
The control means is
When the variable display game is executed in a mode of forming a reach mode, the first large symbol and the second large symbol that perform a temporary stop display as a first trigger are set as the first temporary stop display mode. The third major symbol, which displays a temporary stop at the second trigger after the first trigger, can be displayed on the display means as the first temporary stop display mode.
When the first large symbol , the second large symbol, and the third large symbol perform the temporary stop display in the first temporary stop display mode, the first small symbol, the second small symbol, and the first one. The 3 small symbols do not display a temporary stop,
When the variable display game derives the variable display result, the first large symbol, the second large symbol , the third large symbol , the first small symbol, the second small symbol, and the third small symbol. The symbol is stopped and displayed, and the held digestion display is hidden so that the variable display and the stop display of the variable display game can be distinguished .
Pachinko machine.

Images